sign in sign up
<<
Home , Buick LaCrosse, Odometer

2010 LaCrosse Owner Manual M

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 1-1 Instruments and Controls . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls ...... 7-1 Keys and Locks ...... 1-2 Instrument Panel Overview. . . . 4-4 Climate Control Systems ...... 7-1 Doors ...... 1-11 Controls ...... 4-6 Air Vents ...... 7-8 Vehicle Security...... 1-13 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Maintenance ...... 7-8 Exterior Mirrors ...... 1-15 Indicators ...... 4-11 Interior Mirrors ...... 1-16 Information Displays ...... 4-25 Driving and Operating ...... 8-1 Windows ...... 1-17 Vehicle Messages ...... 4-33 Driving Information ...... 8-2 Roof ...... 1-19 Vehicle Personalization ...... 4-38 Starting and Operating ...... 8-17 OnStar® System ...... 4-43 Engine Exhaust ...... 8-26 Seats and Restraints ...... 2-1 Universal Remote System . . . . 4-45 Automatic ...... 8-27 Head Restraints ...... 2-2 Drive Systems ...... 8-30 Front Seats ...... 2-3 Lighting ...... 5-1 ...... 8-31 Rear Seats ...... 2-9 Exterior Lighting ...... 5-1 Ride Control Systems ...... 8-34 Safety Belts ...... 2-10 Interior Lighting ...... 5-5 ...... 8-37 System ...... 2-25 Lighting Features ...... 5-5 Object Detection Systems . . . . 8-40 Child Restraints ...... 2-39 Fuel ...... 8-48 Infotainment System ...... 6-1 Towing...... 8-53 Storage ...... 3-1 Introduction ...... 6-1 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 8-60 Storage Compartments ...... 3-1 Radio ...... 6-12 Additional Storage Features . . . 3-2 Audio Players ...... 6-20 Rear Seat Infotainment ...... 6-34 Phone ...... 6-42 2010 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care ...... 9-1 Technical Data ...... 11-1 General Information ...... 9-2 Vehicle Identification ...... 11-1 Vehicle Checks ...... 9-4 Vehicle Data ...... 11-2 Headlamp Aiming ...... 9-31 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-34 Customer Information ...... 12-1 Electrical System ...... 9-40 Customer Information ...... 12-1 Wheels and Tires ...... 9-48 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 12-14 Jump Starting ...... 9-77 Vehicle Data Recording and Towing...... 9-81 Privacy...... 12-15 Appearance Care ...... 9-84 Index ...... i-1 Service and Maintenance . . . 10-1 General Information ...... 10-1 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 10-2 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts ...... 10-7 Maintenance Records ...... 10-10 Introduction iii

For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “ of Canada Limited” for Buick Motor Division wherever it appears in this manual.

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the Manufactured under license from GM Emblem, BUICK, the BUICK Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the Emblem, and the name LaCrosse double-D symbol are trademarks are registered trademarks of of Dolby Laboratories. Copyright General Motors. 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. This manual describes features that Manufactured under license may or may not be on your specific under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942; This product incorporates copyright vehicle either because they are 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; protection technology that is options that you did not purchase 6,487,535 & other U.S. and protected by U.S. patents and other or due to changes subsequent to worldwide patents issued & intellectual property rights. Use of the printing of this owner manual. pending. DTS and DTS Digital this copyright protection technology Please refer to the purchase Surround are registered trademarks must be authorized by Macrovision, documentation relating to your and the DTS logos and Symbol and is intended for home and other specific vehicle to confirm each of are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © limited viewing uses only unless the features found on your vehicle. 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 20923540 A First Printing © 2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved. iv Introduction otherwise authorized by Canadian Vehicle Owners Using this Manual Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Propriétaires Canadiens To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the Index in A French language copy of this the back of the manual. It is an manual can be obtained from your alphabetical list of what is in the dealer/retailer or from: manual and the page number On peut obtenir un exemplaire de where it can be found. ce guide en français auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse Danger, Warnings, and “Made for iPod” means that an suivante: Cautions electronic accessory has been Helm, Incorporated designed to connect specifically Warning messages found on vehicle P.O. Box 07130 labels and in this manual describe to iPod and has been certified , MI 48207 by the developer to meet Apple hazards and what to do to avoid or performance standards. iPod is a 1-800-551-4123 reduce them. trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., Numéro de poste 6438 Danger indicates a hazard with a registered in the U.S. and other de langue française high level of risk which will result in countries. www.helminc.com serious injury or death. Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death. Introduction v

Symbols Vehicle Symbol Chart { WARNING The vehicle has components and Here are some additional symbols These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of that may be found on the vehicle that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with and what they mean. For more people. the text describing the operation or information on the symbol, refer information relating to a specific to the index. Notice: This means there is component, control, message, 9 : Airbag Readiness Light something that could result in gauge, or indicator. property or vehicle damage. # : M : This symbol is shown when This would not be covered by ! : Antilock System (ABS) you need to see your owner manual the vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or g : Audio Controls information. or OnStar® * : This symbol is shown when $ : Brake System Warning Light you need to see a service manual " : Charging System for additional instructions or information. I : Cruise Control B : Engine Coolant Temperature A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means “Do Not,”“Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen.” vi Introduction

O : Exterior Lamps # : Fog Lamps . : + : Fuses i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer j : LATCH System Child Restraints * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp : : Oil Pressure } : Power / : Remote Vehicle Start > : Safety Belt Reminders 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor d : Traction Control M : Windshield Washer Fluid Keys, Doors and Windows 1-1

Vehicle Security Keys, Doors and Vehicle Security ...... 1-13 Windows Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 1-13 Immobilizer ...... 1-13 Immobilizer Operation Keys and Locks (Key Access) ...... 1-13 Keys ...... 1-2 Immobilizer Operation Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) (Keyless Access) ...... 1-14 System ...... 1-3 Exterior Mirrors Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Power Mirrors ...... 1-15 System Operation Folding Mirrors ...... 1-15 (Key Access) ...... 1-4 Heated Mirrors ...... 1-16 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 1-16 System Operation (Keyless Access) ...... 1-5 Interior Mirrors Remote Vehicle Start ...... 1-8 Manual Rearview Mirror ...... 1-16 Door Locks ...... 1-10 ...... 1-10 Windows Safety Locks ...... 1-11 Windows ...... 1-17 Power Windows ...... 1-17 Doors Sun Visors ...... 1-19 Trunk ...... 1-11 Roof Sunroof ...... 1-19 1-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks { WARNING Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with the keyless access transmitter is { WARNING dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly Leaving children in a vehicle with injured or even killed. They could the ignition key is dangerous for operate the power windows or many reasons, children or others other controls or even make the could be badly injured or even vehicle move. The windows will killed. They could operate the function with the keyless access power windows or other controls transmitter in the vehicle and they The key, that is part of the Remote or even make the vehicle move. could be seriously injured or killed Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, The windows will function with the if caught in the path of a closing can be used for the ignition and all keys in the ignition and children window. Do not leave the keyless locks if the vehicle is a key access could be seriously injured or killed access transmitter in a vehicle vehicle. If the vehicle has the if caught in the path of a closing with children. keyless ignition, the key can be window. Do not leave the keys in used for the locks. a vehicle with children. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-3

Notice: If you ever lock your keys Changes or modifications to in the vehicle, you may have to this system by other than an damage the vehicle to get in. authorized service facility could Be sure you have spare keys. void authorization to use this If you are locked out of the vehicle, equipment. see Roadside Assistance Program If there is a decrease in the RKE on page 12‑6 or OnStar® System operating range: on page 4 43. ‑ . Check the distance. The transmitter may be Remote Keyless Entry too far from the vehicle. (RKE) System . Check the location. Other Press the button on the RKE See Radio Frequency Statement on vehicles or objects may be transmitter to extend the key. page 12‑17 for information blocking the signal. Press the button and the key regarding Part 15 of the Federal . Check the transmitter's battery. blade to retract the key. Communications Commission (FCC) See “Battery Replacement” later See your dealer/retailer if a new key Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry in this section. Canada. is needed. . If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for service. 1-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

Remote Keyless Entry If the passenger door is open (RKE) System Operation when Q is pressed, all doors lock. (Key Access) Pressing Q may also arm The transmitter functions will work the theft-deterrent system. up to 20 m (65 feet) away from the See Anti-Theft Alarm System on vehicle. On vehicles with remote page 1‑13. start the distance will be greater. K (Unlock): Press to unlock Keep in mind that other conditions, the driver door or all doors, see such as those previously stated, “Door Unlock Options” under can impact the performance of the Vehicle Personalization on transmitter. page 4‑38. RKE without Remote Start Shown The turn signal indicators may flash The following may be available: and/or the horn may sound to Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors. indicate unlocking, see “Unlock Feedback” under Vehicle The turn signal indicators may Personalization on page 4‑38. flash and/or the horn may sound to indicate locking, see “Locking Pressing K will disarm Feedback” under Vehicle the theft-deterrent system. Personalization on page 4‑38. See Anti-Theft Alarm System on page 1‑13. If the driver door is open when Q is pressed, all doors lock except the V (Remote Trunk Release): driver door, if enabled through the Press and hold to unlock the trunk. vehicle personalization. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-5

7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic Programming Transmitters to Remote Keyless Entry Alarm): Press and release the Vehicle (RKE) System Operation one time to locate the vehicle. Only RKE transmitters programmed (Keyless Access) The exterior lamps flash and the to this vehicle will work. If a horn chirps. transmitter is lost or stolen, a The Keyless Access System lets you lock and unlock the doors and Press and hold 7 for at least replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer/ access the trunk without removing two seconds to sound the panic the remote transmitter from your alarm. The horn sounds and the retailer. When the replacement 7 transmitter is programmed to this pocket, purse, briefcase, etc. turn signals flash until is pressed vehicle, all remaining transmitters The keyless access transmitter again or the vehicle is started. must also be reprogrammed. should be within 1 m (3 feet) of / (Remote Vehicle Start): For Any lost or stolen transmitters the door or trunk being opened. vehicles with this feature, press Q will no longer work once the Keyless Unlocking new transmitter is programmed. and then press and hold / within With the keyless access transmitter five seconds to start the engine from Battery Replacement within 1 m (3 feet), approach the outside the vehicle using the RKE Replace the battery if the Replace front door and pull the handle to transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Battery in Remote Key message unlock and open the door. If the Start on page 1 8 for additional transmitter is recognized, the door ‑ displays in the DIC. See “Replace information. will unlock and open. Battery in Remote Key” under Key and Lock Messages on page 4‑36. Entering any door other than the The battery is not rechargeable. driver door will always cause all of See your dealer/retailer to replace the doors to unlock. This is not the battery. customizable. 1-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

To customize which doors unlock Keyless Trunk Opening Programming with a Recognized when the driver's door is opened, Lift up on the touch pad located Transmitter see “Door Unlock Options” under above the license plate to open A new transmitter can be Vehicle Personalization on the trunk if the keyless access programmed to the vehicle page 4‑38. transmitter is within range. when there are two recognized Lock Sensor transmitters available. If there are Transmitter Buttons not two recognized transmitters See the information on how the available see your dealer/retailer. transmitter buttons function earlier To program, the vehicle must be in this section under “Remote off and all of the transmitters, both Keyless Transmitter Operation currently recognized and new, must (Key Access)”. be with you. Programming Transmitters to 1. Place the recognized the Vehicle transmitters in the cupholder. Only keyless access transmitters 2. Insert the vehicle key of the new programmed to the vehicle will work. transmitter into the key lock If a transmitter is lost or stolen, cylinder located on the outside a replacement can be purchased of the driver door and turn the When all doors are closed and the and programmed through your key to the unlock position five ignition is off, the vehicle can be dealer/retailer. The vehicle can be times within ten seconds. locked by pressing this area on the reprogrammed so that lost or stolen The Driver Information Center door handle. This feature will be transmitters no longer work. Any (DIC) displays Ready For available for several minutes after remaining transmitters will need to Remote #2, 3, 4 or 5. the vehicle has been turned off. be reprogrammed. Each vehicle can have up to five transmitters matched to it. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-7

3. Place the new transmitter Starting the Vehicle with a Low 3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or into the transmitter pocket. Transmitter Battery N (Neutral), press the brake The transmitter pocket is pedal and the ignition control. located inside the center If the transmitter battery is weak, See Starting the Engine on the DIC may display No Remote console storage area under page 8‑20, for additional the cupholder. The cupholder Detected when you try to start the information about the vehicle's will need to be pulled out to vehicle. The Replace Battery in keyless ignition with push start. access the transmitter pocket. Remote Key message may also be displayed at this time. Replace the transmitter battery 4. Press the ignition. When the as soon as possible. transmitter is learned the DIC will display will show that it is Battery Replacement ready to program the next Replace the battery if the Replace transmitter. Battery in Remote Key message 5. Remove the transmitter from the displays in the DIC. See “Replace transmitter pocket and press the Battery in Remote Key” under Key unlock button. and Lock Messages on page 4‑36. To program additional The battery is not rechargeable. transmitters, repeat Steps 3 See your dealer/retailer to replace through 5. the battery. When all additional transmitters are programmed, press and hold To start the vehicle: the ignition for 5 seconds to exit programming mode. 1. Remove the cupholder from the center console storage area. 2. Place the transmitter in the transmitter pocket with the buttons facing up. 1-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Remote Vehicle Start Starting the Engine Using Remote 3. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN Start (Key Access), or select the If available, this feature allows the ON/RUN/START ignition position engine to be started from outside To start the engine using the remote start feature: (Keyless Access), to drive the the vehicle. vehicle. This button / will be on the RKE 1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter. The engine will shut off after transmitter if the vehicle has remote The vehicle's doors will be 10 minutes unless a time start. locked. extension is done or the ignition is put in ON/RUN (Key Access) To enable and disable remote start, 2. Within five seconds, press and or ON/RUN/START (Keyless see Remote Vehicle Start under hold / until the turn signal “ ” Access). Vehicle Personalization on lamps flash. This confirms page 4‑38. the request to remote start Vehicles with an automatic climate control system will default to a Laws in some local communities the vehicle has been received. heating or cooling mode depending may restrict the use of remote Once the vehicle is started, the on the outside temperature during a starters. For example, some laws parking lamps will turn on and remote start. When the key is turned may require a person using remote remain on as long as the engine to ON/RUN (Key Access), or the start to have the vehicle in view. is running. ON/RUN/START ignition position Check local regulations for any is selected (Keyless Access), the requirements. climate control system will turn on at the setting the vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-9

Vehicles with heated or heated and A maximum of two remote starts or Conditions in Which Remote Start ventilated front seats can have this remote start attempts are allowed Will Not Work feature turn on automatically during between ignition cycles. The remote start will not operate if: a remote start see “Remote Start The vehicle's ignition must be . The key is in the ignition Heated Seats” and “Remote Start turned on and then back off before Vented Seats” under Vehicle (Key Access) or the ignition the remote start procedure can be is in any position other than Personalization on page 4‑38 used again. for more information. OFF (Keyless Access). Shutting the Engine Off After a Extending Engine Run Time . The transmitter is in the vehicle Remote Start (Keyless Access). For a 10 minute extension, repeat To shut off the engine: Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is . The hood is not closed. still running. The remote start can . Press / until the parking lamps . The hazard warning flashers only be extended once. turn off. are on. When the remote start is extended, . Turn on the hazard warning . There is an emission control the second 10 minutes will start flashers. system malfunction. immediately. . Turn the ignition on and then . The engine coolant temperature For example, if the vehicle has back off. is too high. been running for five minutes, and . 10 minutes are added, the engine The oil pressure is low. will run for a total of 15 minutes. . Two remote vehicle starts have already been used. . The vehicle is not in P (Park). 1-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

Door Locks For more information see: WARNING (Continued) . Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) { WARNING . Outsiders can easily enter System Operation (Key Access) through an unlocked door on page 1‑4 or Remote Unlocked doors can be when you slow down or stop Keyless Entry (RKE) System dangerous. your vehicle. Locking your Operation (Keyless Access) on page 1 5 . Passengers, especially doors can help prevent this ‑ children, can easily open the from happening. . Power Door Locks on doors and fall out of a moving page 1‑10 To lock and unlock the door, use vehicle. The chance of being . Vehicle Personalization on thrown out of the vehicle in the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) page 4‑38 a crash is increased if the transmitter or the key from the doors are not locked. So, all outside and the door lock knob passengers should wear or switch from the inside. Power Door Locks safety belts properly and the From inside the vehicle with the The power door lock switches doors should be locked doors locked, pull once on the door are located on the center of the whenever the vehicle is handle to unlock it, and a second instrument panel. driven. time to open it. K (Unlock): Press to unlock the . Young children who get into Manually locking the driver door doors. unlocked vehicles may be also automatically locks all other Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. unable to get out. A child can doors. If the driver door is open, be overcome by extreme heat or the key is in the ignition the driver See Vehicle Personalization on and can suffer permanent door unlocks. page 4‑38 for more information. injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it. (Continued) Keys, Doors and Windows 1-11

Safety Locks Doors WARNING (Continued)

Trunk If the vehicle must be driven with { the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: WARNING . Close all of the windows. Exhaust gases can enter the . Fully open the air outlets on vehicle if it is driven with the or under the instrument liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with panel. any objects that pass through the . Adjust the Climate Control seal between the body and the system to a setting that trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine brings in only outside air exhaust contains Carbon and set the fan speed to the Monoxide (CO) which cannot be Press the button on the driver door highest setting. See Climate to activate the safety locks seen or smelled. It can cause Control System in the Index. unconsciousness and even death. on the passenger rear doors. . If the vehicle has a power (Continued) This switch also disables the rear liftgate, disable the power power windows. liftgate function. Once activated, the light, located on For more information about the switch, illuminates and goes out carbon monoxide, see Engine when deactivated. Exhaust on page 8‑26. If the light flashes the feature may not be working properly. 1-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

Remote Trunk Release Rear Seat Pass-Through To open the trunk from the outside the vehicle, press the V button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or by pressing the touchpad above the license plate. Emergency Trunk Release Handle Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release handle as a tie-down or anchor point There is an emergency trunk when securing items in the trunk release handle located inside the as it could damage the handle. trunk on the trunk latch. On some The vehicle has a small door in the The emergency trunk release vehicles, the release handle can be rear seat. This door allows access handle is only intended to aid a accessed by folding the rear seat to the trunk from inside the vehicle. person trapped in a latched trunk, center seatback. See Rear Seats enabling them to open the trunk on page 2 9. Pull the release The rear seat armrest must be down ‑ for the pass-through door to open. from the inside. handle to open the trunk from the To release the pass-through door, inside. pull the release handle. To close the door, raise it and push it until it latches. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-13

Vehicle Security Disarming the System Immobilizer Vehicle theft is big business, To disarm the system, do one of the See Radio Frequency Statement on especially in some cities. following: page 12‑17 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal This vehicle has theft-deterrent . Press K on the RKE transmitter. features, however, they do not Communications Commission (FCC) make it impossible to steal. . Approach the vehicle with the Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry RKE transmitter (Keyless Canada. Anti-Theft Alarm System Access). . Start the engine. Immobilizer Operation This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm system. The alarm automatically disarms. (Key Access) How to Detect a Tamper This vehicle has a passive Arming the System theft-deterrent system. Condition To arm the system, press Q on the The system does not have to be RKE transmitter. If K is pressed and the horn manually armed or disarmed. sounds, an attempted break-in The alarm automatically arms after The vehicle is automatically has occurred while the system about 30 seconds. The security immobilized when the key is was armed. light, located on the instrument removed from the ignition. panel, flashes. If the alarm has been activated, The system is automatically the Theft Attempted message will disarmed when the vehicle is Press V on the RKE transmitter to appear on the DIC. See Key and started with the correct key. open the trunk without setting off the Lock Messages on page 4‑36 for alarm. The system rearms when the additional information. trunk is closed. 1-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

The key uses a transponder that If the engine still does not start, and The immobilization system is matches an immobilizer control unit the key appears to be undamaged disarmed when the ignition button is in the vehicle and automatically or the light continues to stay on, try pushed in and a valid transmitter is disarms the system. Only the another ignition key. found in the vehicle. correct key starts the vehicle. If the engine still does not start with The vehicle may not start if the the other key, the vehicle needs key is damaged. service. If the vehicle does start, the first key may be damaged. See your dealer/retailer who can service the theft-deterrent system and have a new key made. The security light, located in the Do not leave the key or device that instrument panel cluster, comes on disarms or deactivates the theft if there is a problem with arming The security light, located in the deterrent system in the vehicle. or disarming the theft-deterrent instrument panel cluster, comes on system. if there is a problem with arming Immobilizer Operation The system has one or more or disarming the theft-deterrent (Keyless Access) transmitters that are matched to system. This vehicle has a passive an immobilizer control unit in your When trying to start the vehicle, the theft-deterrent system. vehicle. Only a correctly matched security light comes on briefly when transmitter will start the vehicle. the ignition is turned on. The system does not have to be If the transmitter is ever damaged, manually armed or disarmed. If the engine does not start and the you may not be able to start your security light stays on there is a The vehicle is automatically vehicle. problem with the system. Turn the immobilized when the transmitter When trying to start the vehicle, the ignition off and try again. leaves the vehicle. security light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-15

If the engine does not start and the Exterior Mirrors Vehicles with the memory feature security light stays on there is a can store a preferred mirror position. problem with the system. Turn the See “Memory Seats” under Power ignition off and try again. Power Mirrors Seat Adjustment on page 2‑4 for If the keyless access transmitter more information. appears to be undamaged, try another keyless access transmitter. Folding Mirrors Or, you may try placing the Manual Foldaway Mirrors transmitter in the transmitter pocket located in the center console. See Vehicles with manual folded mirrors “No Remote Detected” under Key are folded inward to prevent and Lock Messages on page 4‑36. damage when going through an automatic wash. To fold, pull the If the engine does not start with mirror toward the vehicle. Push the the other transmitter or when the mirror outward, to return it to the transmitter is on the pocket in the original position. center console, your vehicle needs service. See your dealer/retailer To adjust the mirrors: Automatic Dimming Feature who can service the theft-deterrent system and have a new transmitter 1. Turn the control knob to the The driver outside mirror programmed to the vehicle. L (left) or R (right) selecting the automatically adjusts for the glare of driver or passenger mirror. the headlamps behind you. Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft 2. Push the control knob to the left, deterrent system in the vehicle. right, up, or down to adjust the mirror. 1-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

Turn Signal Indicator Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors The vehicle might have a turn signal If the vehicle has the memory indicator lamp that is built into the package, the outside mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror mirror housing. The turn signal lamp have a park tilt feature. This feature Adjust this mirror for a clear view of flashes with the use of the vehicle's automatically tilts the outside turn signal and hazard flashers. the area behind the vehicle. Hold mirrors to a preselected position the mirror in the center to move it when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). up, down, or side-to-side. To reduce Heated Mirrors This allows the driver to view the headlamp glare during night-time For vehicles with heated mirrors: curb for parallel parking. use, move the lever at the bottom of < (Rear Window Defogger): The passenger and driver mirrors the mirror to the right. Press to heat the mirrors. return to their original position Vehicles with OnStar® have three when the vehicle is shifted out of additional control buttons located at See “Rear Window Defogger” under R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned Automatic Climate Control System the bottom of the mirror. See your off or to OFF/LOCK. dealer/retailer for more information on page 7‑1 for more information. This feature can be turned on or on the system and how to subscribe off through the Driver Information to OnStar. See OnStar® System on Center (DIC). See Vehicle page 4‑43 for more information Personalization on page 4‑38 about the services OnStar provides. for more information. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-17

Windows Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or The power window switches located hot weather. on the driver door control all four windows. The passenger door only has a window switch that controls that window. Push the switch down to open the window. Pull the front of the switch up to close it. The switches work when the ignition is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained Accessory Power (RAP). See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 8‑20. 1-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

Express Window Operation still can be raised or lowered using To program each front window, the driver window switches when follow these steps: Windows with an express-up or the lockout feature is active. down feature allow the window to be 1. With the ignition in ACC/ To restore power to the rear lowered or raised without holding ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, windows, press the button again. the switch. Rear windows only have or when Retained Accessory The light on the button will go out. express down. Pull a window switch Power (RAP) is active, close If the light flashes, the feature may up or push it down all the way, all doors. not be working properly. release it, and the window goes 2. Press and hold the power down or up automatically. Stop the This switch also activates the Safety window switch until the window window by pushing or pulling the Locks. See Power Door Locks on is fully open. switch. page 1‑10 for more information. 3. Pull the power window switch up Rear Window Lockout Programming the Power until the window is fully closed. Windows The rear window lockout 4. Continue holding the switch up button v is located on the driver If the battery on the vehicle has for approximately two seconds door near the window switches. been recharged, disconnected, after the window is completely Press the button to disable the rear or is not working, you will need to closed. reprogram each front power window window controls. The light on the The window is now reprogrammed. for the express-up feature to work. button illuminates, indicating the Repeat the process for the other Before reprogramming, replace or feature is in use. The rear windows windows. recharge the vehicle's battery. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-19

Sun Visors Roof The sunroof only operates when the ignition is in ON/RUN, ACC/ Pull the toward you or ACCESSORY, or if Retained move it to the side to reduce glare. Sunroof Accessory Power (RAP) is active. Rear Window Sunshade See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 8‑20. On vehicles with this feature the switch Q is located on the center Vent console, to the right of the shifter. The sunroof has an express-vent open feature. From the closed The engine must be running to position, press the rear of the operate it. sunroof switch (A) to vent the Press the switch Q to raise or sunroof. To stop the sunroof lower the sunshade. partway, press the switch a second time. To close the sunroof, press If the shade is up, and the vehicle and hold the front of the sunroof is shifted into R (Reverse) it will switch (B). To stop the sunroof automatically lower. When the On vehicles with a sunroof, the partway, release the switch. vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) switch is located on the overhead it does not automatically raise itself. console. To raise the sunshade, press the front of the switch. 1-20 Keys, Doors and Windows

Express-Open/Express-Close If the sunshade is closed, it opens Anti-Pinch Feature automatically with the sunroof but To express-open the sunroof from If an object is in the path of the can also be express-opened/ the closed or vent position, fully sunroof while it is closing, the express-closed by using the press and release the rear of the anti-pinch feature will detect sunshade control (C) (D). switch (A). The sunroof opens the object and stop the sunroof The sunshade cannot be fully automatically. To stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the closed with the sunroof open. partway, press the switch a second obstruction. The sunroof, and time. To express-close the sunroof, Notice: Forcing the sunshade sunshade will then return to the fully press and release the front of forward of the sliding glass panel open or vent position. To close the switch (B). The sunroof closes may cause damage and the the sunroof once the obstruction automatically. To stop the sunroof sunroof may not operate properly. has been removed, refer to the partway, press the switch a Always close the glass panel "Express-Open/Express-Close" second time. before closing the sunshade. functions described previously. The sunroof glass panel cannot be Do not keep the sunroof open for opened or closed if the vehicle has long periods of time while the an electrical failure. vehicle is not in use. Debris can collect in the tracks, damage the sunroof operation and plug the water draining system. Seats and Restraints 2-1

Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 2-19 Adding Equipment to the Seats and Safety Belt Use During Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 2-37 Restraints Pregnancy ...... 2-23 Airbag System Check ...... 2-38 Safety Belt Extender ...... 2-23 Replacing Airbag System Safety System Check ...... 2-24 Parts After a Crash ...... 2-38 Safety Belt Care ...... 2-24 Head Restraints Child Restraints Head Restraints ...... 2-2 Replacing Safety Belt System Parts After a Crash ...... 2-24 Older Children ...... 2-39 Front Seats Infants and Young Seat Adjustment ...... 2-3 Airbag System Children ...... 2-41 Power Seat Adjustment ...... 2-4 Airbag System ...... 2-25 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 2-43 Lumbar Adjustment ...... 2-5 Where Are the ? . . . . . 2-27 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 2-45 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 2-6 When Should an Airbag Lower Anchors and Tethers Heated Front Seats ...... 2-7 Inflate? ...... 2-28 for Children Heated and Ventilated Front What Makes an Airbag (LATCH System) ...... 2-47 Seats ...... 2-8 Inflate? ...... 2-30 Replacing LATCH System How Does an Airbag Parts After a Crash ...... 2-53 Rear Seats Restrain? ...... 2-30 Securing Child Restraints Rear Seats ...... 2-9 What Will You See After an (Rear Seat) ...... 2-54 Airbag Inflates? ...... 2-30 Securing Child Restraints Safety Belts Passenger Sensing (Front Seat ) ...... 2-56 Safety Belts ...... 2-10 System ...... 2-32 How to Wear Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Properly ...... 2-13 Vehicle ...... 2-36 2-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints Front Seat The vehicle's front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions. The vehicle's rear seats have adjustable head rests in the outboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, Adjust the head restraint so that the there is a greater chance that top of the restraint is at the same occupants will suffer a neck/ height as the top of the occupant's To raise or lower the head restraint, spinal injury in a crash. Do not head. This position reduces the press the release button located on drive until the head restraints for chance of a neck injury in a crash. the side of the head restraint and all occupants are installed and pull up or push the head restraint adjusted properly. down and release the button. Pull and push on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. Seats and Restraints 2-3

Rear Seat Front Seats WARNING (Continued)

Seat Adjustment vehicle is moving. The sudden Manual Seat Adjustment movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat position: 1. Pull the handle located at the front of the seat. 2. Move the seat forward or Pull the head rest up to raise it. backward to adjust the seat To lower the head rest, press the position. release button, located on the head rest post on the top of the seatback, 3. Release the handle to stop the while you push the head rest down. seat from moving. { WARNING Push down on the head rest after the button is released to make sure You can lose control of the that it is locked in place. vehicle if you try to adjust a This vehicle's head restraints and manual driver's seat while the head rests are not designed to be (Continued) removed. 2-4 Seats and Restraints

Power Seat Adjustment Memory Seats To save your positions in memory: 1. Adjust the driver seat, including the seatback recliner and both outside mirrors to a comfortable position. 2. Press and hold MEM and button 1until the beep lets you know that the position has been stored. A second seating and mirror position can be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button 2. To adjust a power seat, do any of The vehicle may have a memory the following: function which allows seat settings . Move the seat forward or to be saved and recalled. rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward. . Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down. . Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down. Seats and Restraints 2-5

To recall the memory positions, If something has blocked the driver Lumbar Adjustment press and hold either button 1 or seat while recalling a memory button 2 corresponding to the position, the driver seat recall may desired driving position. The seat stop working. If this happens, press and outside mirrors move to the appropriate control for the area the position previously stored. that is not recalling for two seconds, Releasing the button before the after the obstruction is removed. stored position is reached cancels Then try recalling the memory the recall. position again by pressing the Using the Remote Keyless appropriate memory button. If the Entry (RKE) transmitter to enter memory position is still not being the vehicle with the remote recall recalled, see your dealer/retailer for memory feature on causes service. automatic seat and mirror Easy Exit Seat adjustment associated with that With this feature, the driver seat To increase or decrease lumbar transmitter. There is no adjustment support, press and hold the front or automatically moves back to give when the position has not been rear of the round control knob. changed by another seating the driver more room to exit when position. the ignition is turned to OFF and the To raise or lower lumbar support, driver door is opened. press and hold the top or bottom of To stop recall movement of the the round control knob. memory feature at any time, press one of the power seat controls, Release the control knob when the memory buttons, or power mirror seatback reaches the desired level buttons. of lumbar support. See Power Seat Adjustment on page 2‑4 for more information. 2-6 Seats and Restraints

Reclining Seatbacks Manual Reclining Seatbacks { WARNING

{ WARNING Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be You can lose control of the dangerous. Even when buckled vehicle if you try to adjust the up, the safety belts cannot do seat while the vehicle is moving. their job when reclined like this. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make The shoulder belt cannot do its you push a pedal when you do job because it will not be against not want to. Adjust the driver's your body. Instead, it will be in seat only when the vehicle is not front of you. In a crash, you could moving. go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. On vehicles with manual reclining The lap belt cannot do its job seatbacks, the control lever is either. In a crash, the belt could located on the outboard side of go up over your abdomen. The the seat. belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly. Seats and Restraints 2-7

To recline the seatback: Power Reclining Seatbacks Heated Front Seats 1. Lift the recline lever. 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. To return the seatback to an upright position: 1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will On vehicles with power reclining On vehicles with heated seats, the return to the upright position. seatbacks the vertical control is buttons are located near the climate 2. Push and pull on the seatback to located on the outboard side of controls. make sure it is locked. the seat. The ignition must be on to use this . To recline the seatback, press feature. the control toward the rear of the vehicle. Press the button to heat the seat cushion and seatback. A light on . To raise the seatback, press the that button indicates the feature control toward the front of the is on. vehicle. 2-8 Seats and Restraints

There are three temperature Heated and Ventilated There are three temperature settings: Front Seats settings for each feature: . High = three lights . High = three . Medium = two lights . Medium = two . Low = one light . Low = one The heat comes on at the highest Press a button to turn the feature setting. Each press of the button on at the maximum setting. Each decreases the temperature setting press of the button changes the by one. temperature one setting. To turn the feature off, press the Turn the feature off by pressing button until the display lights the button until the display lights turn off. turn off. If the vehicle has remote vehicle If the vehicle has remote vehicle start and is started by using the On vehicle with the heated and start and is started by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ventilated cooled seat feature the remote keyless entry transmitter, the transmitter, the front heated seats buttons are located near the climate heated and ventilated seats turn on will be turned on to the high setting controls. at the maximum setting according to if it is cold outside. When the key the temperature outside. When the is inserted into the ignition and the To use this feature the ignition must key is inserted into the ignition and ignition is turned on, the heated be on. the ignition is turned on, the heated seat feature will turn off. To turn the Press a button to turn on the or cooled seat feature turns off. heated seat feature back on, press desired feature. A light on that To turn this feature back on, press the desired button. button indicates the feature is on. the desired button. Seats and Restraints 2-9

Rear Seats To raise the seatback: 1. Push the seatback up and The vehicle's rear seat can be push it back to lock it into place. folded down to allow for more cargo Make sure the safety belt is in space or it can be placed back into the retainer clip and does not a locked upright position. Adjust the get twisted or caught in the seatback only when the vehicle is seatback. not moving. 2. A tab on the handle pops down To fold the seatback down: to indicate the seatback has been locked. 3. Push and pull the top of the 2. Pull on the lever located on the seatback to be sure it is locked top of the of the seatback to into position. unlock it. 3. Fold the seatback down.

1. Be sure the safety belt is in the retainer clip. 2-10 Seats and Restraints

Safety Belts In most states and in all Canadian { WARNING provinces, the law requires wearing This section of the manual safety belts. Here is why: describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride You never know if you will be in properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside a crash. If you do have a crash, things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more you do not know if it will be a serious one. { WARNING likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride A few crashes are mild, and some Do not let anyone ride where in any area of your vehicle that crashes can be so serious that even a safety belt cannot be worn is not equipped with seats and buckled up, a person would not properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in survive. But most crashes are in passenger(s) are not wearing your vehicle is in a seat and using between. In many of them, people safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly. who buckle up can survive and much worse. You can hit things sometimes walk away. Without safety belts they could have been inside the vehicle harder or be This vehicle has indicators as a badly hurt or killed. ejected from the vehicle. You reminder to buckle the safety belts. and your passenger(s) can be See Safety Belt Reminders on After more than 40 years of safety seriously injured or killed. In the page 4‑14 for additional belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. information. same crash, you might not be, In most crashes buckling up does if you are buckled up. Always matter ... a lot! fasten your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s) are restrained properly too. Seats and Restraints 2-11

Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels. 2-12 Seats and Restraints

The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... or the safety belts! stopped by something. In a real With safety belts, you slow down vehicle, it could be the windshield... as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense. Seats and Restraints 2-13

Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I How to Wear Safety Belts Safety Belts never drive far from home, why should I wear safety Properly Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle belts? This section is only for people of after a crash if I am wearing a adult size. safety belt? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a crash — even Be aware that there are special A: You could be whether you — one that is not your fault — you things to know about safety belts are wearing a safety belt or and your passenger(s) can be and children. And there are different not. But your chance of being hurt. Being a good driver does rules for smaller children and conscious during and after an not protect you from things infants. If a child will be riding in accident, so you can unbuckle beyond your control, such as the vehicle, see Older Children on and get out, is much greater if bad drivers. page 2‑39 or Infants and Young you are belted. And you can Most accidents occur within Children on page 2‑41. Follow unbuckle a safety belt, even those rules for everyone's if you are upside down. 40 km (25 ) of home. And the greatest number of protection. Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why serious injuries and deaths It is very important for all occupants should I have to wear safety occur at speeds of less than to buckle up. Statistics show that belts? 65 km/h (40 mph). unbelted people are hurt more often A: Airbags are supplemental Safety belts are for everyone. in crashes than those who are systems only; so they work with wearing safety belts. safety belts — not instead of Occupants who are not buckled up them. Whether or not an airbag can be thrown out of the vehicle in a is provided, all occupants still crash. And they can strike others in have to buckle up to get the the vehicle who are wearing safety most protection. That is true belts. not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. 2-14 Seats and Restraints

First, before you or your worn low and snug on the hips, just Q: What is wrong with this? passenger(s) wear a safety belt, touching the thighs. In a crash, this there is important information you applies force to the strong pelvic should know. bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash. A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as much protection this way. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be Seats and Restraints 2-15

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if your You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a lap belt is too loose. In a crash, crash, you would move forward you could slide under the lap too much, which could increase belt and apply force on your injury. The shoulder belt should fit abdomen. This could cause snugly against your body. serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way. 2-16 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong A: The belt is over an armrest. buckle. Seats and Restraints 2-17

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest you wear the shoulder belt under like this. The belt would be much your arm. In a crash, your body too high. In a crash, you can slide would move too far forward, under the belt. The belt force which would increase the chance would then be applied on the of head and neck injury. Also, abdomen, not on the pelvic the belt would apply too much bones, and that could cause force to the ribs, which are not serious or fatal injuries. Be sure as strong as shoulder bones. the belt goes under the . You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or A: The shoulder belt is worn under spleen. The shoulder belt should the arm. It should be worn over go over the shoulder and across the shoulder at all times. the chest. 2-18 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. You might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal A: The belt is behind the body. injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across go over the shoulder and across the body. the chest. { WARNING

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it. Seats and Restraints 2-19

Lap-Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt. The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index. 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull 3. Push the latch plate into the the belt across you. Do not let it buckle until it clicks. get twisted. Pull up on the latch plate to The lap-shoulder belt may lock if make sure it is secure. If the belt you pull the belt across you very is not long enough, see Safety quickly. If this happens, let the Belt Extender on page 2‑23. belt go back slightly to unlock it. Position the release button on Then pull the belt across you the buckle so that the safety belt more slowly. could be quickly unbuckled if If the shoulder portion of a necessary. passenger belt is pulled out If equipped with a shoulder belt all the way, the child restraint height adjuster, move it to the locking feature may be engaged. height that is right for you. If this happens, let the belt go See “Shoulder Belt Height back all the way and start again. 2-20 Seats and Restraints

Adjustment” later in this section Slide the latch plate up the safety for instructions on use and belt webbing, when the safety belt is important safety information. not in use. The latch plate should 4. To make the lap part tight, pull rest on the stitching on the safety up on the shoulder belt. belt, near the guide loop on the side wall. It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt Before a door is closed, be sure the through the latch plate to fully safety belt is out of the way. If a tighten the lap belt on smaller door is slammed against a safety occupants. belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Press the release button (A) and The vehicle has a shoulder belt move the height adjuster to the height adjuster for the driver and desired position. The adjuster can right front passenger seating be moved up by pushing the slide/ positions. trim up. After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to move it Adjust the height so that the down without pushing the release shoulder portion of the belt is button to make sure it has locked centered on the shoulder. The belt into position. should be away from the face and neck, but not falling off of the shoulder. Improper shoulder belt To unlatch the belt, push the button height adjustment could reduce the on the buckle. The belt should effectiveness of the safety belt in a return to its stowed position. crash. Seats and Restraints 2-21

Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat. This vehicle has safety belt Guides Here is how to install a comfort pretensioners for front outboard This vehicle may have rear shoulder guide to the safety belt: occupants. Although the safety belt comfort guides. If not, they are belt pretensioners cannot be seen, available through your dealer/ they are part of the safety belt retailer. The guides may provide assembly. They can help tighten added safety belt comfort for older the safety belts during the early children who have outgrown booster stages of a moderate to severe seats and for some adults. When frontal and near frontal crash if installed and properly adjusted, the the threshold conditions for comfort guide positions the belt pretensioner activation are met. away from the neck and head. Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and probably other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt system. 1. Remove the guide from its See Replacing Safety Belt System storage pocket on the side of Parts After a Crash on page 2‑24. the seat. 2-22 Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 2. Place the guide over the belt, 3. Be sure that the belt is and insert the two edges of the not twisted and it lies flat. belt into the slots of the guide. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top. Seats and Restraints 2-23

Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them wear safety belts. properly. Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. 4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described But if a safety belt is not long previously in this section. Make enough, your dealer/retailer will sure that the shoulder belt order you an extender. When you crosses the shoulder. go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it A pregnant woman should wear only for the seat it is made to fit. a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap The extender has been designed portion should be worn as low as for adults. Never use it for securing possible, below the rounding, child seats. To wear it, attach it to throughout the pregnancy. the regular safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender. 2-24 Seats and Restraints

Safety System Check Safety Belt Care WARNING (Continued) Now and then, check that the safety Keep belts clean and dry. belt reminder light, safety belts, safety belt systems are working buckles, latch plates, retractors { WARNING properly after a crash, have them and anchorages are working inspected and any necessary properly. Look for any other loose Do not bleach or dye safety belts. replacements made as soon as or damaged safety belt system parts It may severely weaken them. possible. that might keep a safety belt system In a crash, they might not be able from doing its job. See your dealer/ to provide adequate protection. After a minor crash, replacement of retailer to have it repaired. Torn or Clean safety belts only with mild safety belts may not be necessary. frayed safety belts may not protect soap and lukewarm water. But the safety belt assemblies that you in a crash. They can rip apart were used during any crash may under impact forces. If a belt is torn have been stressed or damaged. or frayed, get a new one right away. Replacing Safety Belt See your dealer/retailer to have the System Parts After a Make sure the safety belt reminder safety belt assemblies inspected or light is working. See Safety Belt Crash replaced. Reminders on page 4‑14 for more New parts and repairs may be information. { WARNING necessary even if the safety belt Keep safety belts clean and dry. system was not being used at the A crash can damage the safety See Safety Belt Care on time of the crash. belt system in the vehicle. page 2‑24. Have the safety belt pretensioners A damaged safety belt system checked if the vehicle has been in a may not properly protect the crash, or if the airbag readiness light person using it, resulting in stays on after you start the vehicle serious injury or even death in or while you are driving. See Airbag a crash. To help make sure the Readiness Light on page 4‑15. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 2-25

Airbag System The vehicle may have the following With seat-mounted side impact airbags: airbags, the word AIRBAG will The vehicle has the following appear on the side of the seatback . A seat-mounted side impact airbags: airbag for the rear seat closest to the door. . A frontal airbag for the driver. passenger seated directly With roof-rail airbags, the word . A frontal airbag for the right front behind the driver. AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim. passenger. . A seat-mounted side impact . A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the rear seat Airbags are designed to supplement airbag for the driver. passenger seated directly the protection provided by safety behind the right front passenger. belts. Even though today's airbags . A seat-mounted side impact All of the airbags in the vehicle will are also designed to help reduce airbag for the right front the risk of injury from the force of an passenger. have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label inflating bag, all airbags must inflate . A roof-rail airbag for the driver near the deployment opening. very quickly to do their job. and the passenger seated directly behind the driver. For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle . A roof-rail airbag for the right part of the steering wheel for the front passenger and the driver and on the instrument panel passenger seated directly for the right front passenger. behind the right front passenger. 2-26 Seats and Restraints

Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system: { WARNING { WARNING Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against, { WARNING faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag You can be severely injured or Anyone who is up against, or very when it inflates can be seriously killed in a crash if you are not close to, any airbag when it injured or killed. Airbags plus inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection wearing your safety belt — even if you have airbags. Airbags are or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but designed to work with safety close to the airbag, as you would not for young children and infants. belts, but do not replace them. be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle's safety belt Also, airbags are not designed to of your seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system deploy in every crash. In some Safety belts help keep you in is designed for them. Young crashes safety belts are your only position before and during a children and infants need the restraint. See When Should an crash. Always wear your safety protection that a child restraint belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑28. should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of your vehicle. To read how, see crash helps reduce your chance the vehicle. Older Children on page 2‑39 or of hitting things inside the vehicle Infants and Young Children on or being ejected from it. Airbags Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side page 2‑41. are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. Everyone in your windows in seating positions with vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags. properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. Seats and Restraints 2-27

Where Are the Airbags?

There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Driver Side shown, Passenger Readiness Light on page 4‑15 Side similar for more information. The driver frontal airbag is in the The seat-mounted side impact middle of the steering wheel. airbags for the driver and right front The right front passenger frontal passenger are in the side of the airbag is in the instrument panel on seatbacks closest to the door. the passenger's side. The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger, and second row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows. 2-28 Seats and Restraints

When Should an Airbag WARNING (Continued) Inflate? that person causing severe injury Frontal airbags are designed to or even death. The path of an inflate in moderate to severe frontal inflating airbag must be kept or near-frontal crashes to help clear. Do not put anything reduce the potential for severe between an occupant and an injuries mainly to the driver's or airbag, and do not attach or put right front passenger's head and anything on the steering wheel chest. However, they are only hub or on or near any other designed to inflate if the impact airbag covering. exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment Rear Seat Driver Side Shown, Do not use seat accessories Passenger Side Similar thresholds are used to predict how that block the inflation path of a severe a crash is likely to be in time If the vehicle has second row seat‐ seat-mounted side impact airbag. for the airbags to inflate and help mounted side impact airbags, they Never secure anything to the roof restrain the occupants. are in the sides of the rear seatback of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags closest to the door. Whether the frontal airbags will by routing a rope or tie down or should deploy is not based on through any door or window how fast your vehicle is traveling. { WARNING opening. If you do, the path of It depends largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and how If something is between an an inflating roof-rail airbag will quickly your vehicle slows down. occupant and an airbag, the be blocked. airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into (Continued) Seats and Restraints 2-29

Frontal airbags may inflate Frontal airbags are not intended to the system's designed threshold at different crash speeds. inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear level. The threshold level can vary For example: impacts, or in many side impacts. with specific vehicle design. . If the vehicle hits a stationary In addition, the vehicle has Roof‐rail airbags are not intended to object, the airbags could inflate dual-stage frontal airbags. inflate in rear impacts. Both roof‐rail at a different crash speed than if Dual-stage airbags adjust the airbags will deploy when either side the vehicle hits a moving object. restraint according to crash severity. of the vehicle is struck or if the The vehicle has electronic frontal sensing system predicts that the . If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the airbags could sensors, which help the sensing vehicle is about to roll over, or in inflate at a different crash speed system distinguish between a a severe frontal impact. than if the vehicle hits an object moderate frontal impact and a more In any particular crash, no one can that does not deform. severe frontal impact. For moderate say whether an airbag should have frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflated simply because of the . If the vehicle hits a narrow object inflate at a level less than full (like a pole), the airbags could damage to a vehicle or because deployment. For more severe frontal of what the repair costs were. inflate at a different crash speed impacts, full deployment occurs. than if the vehicle hits a wide For frontal airbags, inflation is object (like a wall). The vehicle has seat-mounted determined by what the vehicle hits, side impact and roof-rail airbags. the angle of the impact, and how . If the vehicle goes into an object See Airbag System on page 2‑25. quickly the vehicle slows down. at an angle, the airbags could Seat-mounted side impact and For seat-mounted side impact and inflate at a different crash speed roof-rail airbags are intended to roof-rail airbags, deployment is than if the vehicle goes straight inflate in moderate to severe side determined by the location and into the object. crashes. In addition, these roof‐rail severity of the side impact. airbags are intended to inflate Thresholds can also vary with In a rollover event, roof‐rail airbag specific vehicle design. during a rollover or in a severe deployment is determined by the frontal impact. Seat-mounted side direction of the roll. impact and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above 2-30 Seats and Restraints

What Makes an Airbag How Does an Airbag Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement Inflate? Restrain? to safety belts. In a deployment event, the sensing In moderate to severe frontal or system sends an electrical signal near frontal collisions, even belted What Will You See After triggering a release of gas from the occupants can contact the steering an Airbag Inflates? inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the wheel or the instrument panel. In airbag causing the bag to break out moderate to severe side collisions, After the frontal airbags and of the cover and deploy. The inflator, even belted occupants can contact seat-mounted side impact airbags the airbag, and related hardware are the inside of the vehicle. inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not all part of the airbag module. Airbags supplement the protection even realize an airbag inflated. Frontal airbag modules are located provided by safety belts. Frontal Roof-rail airbags may still be at least inside the steering wheel and airbags distribute the force of the partially inflated for some time after instrument panel. For vehicles with impact more evenly over the they deploy. Some components of seat-mounted side impact airbags, occupant's upper body, stopping the airbag module may be hot for there are airbag modules in the side the occupant more gradually. several minutes. For location of the of the front seatbacks closest to the Seat-mounted side impact and airbag modules, see What Makes door. For vehicles with roof-rail roof-rail airbags distribute the force an Airbag Inflate? on page 2 30. airbags, there are airbag modules in of the impact more evenly over the ‑ the ceiling of the vehicle, near the occupant's upper body. The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be side windows that have occupant But airbags would not help in warm, but not too hot to touch. seating positions. many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑28 for more information. Seats and Restraints 2-31

There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the WARNING (Continued) { WARNING deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from it is safe to do so. If you have A crash severe enough to inflate seeing out of the windshield or breathing problems but cannot the airbags may have also being able to steer the vehicle, nor get out of the vehicle after an damaged important functions does it prevent people from leaving airbag inflates, then get fresh air in the vehicle, such as the fuel the vehicle. by opening a window or a door. system, brake and steering If you experience breathing systems, etc. Even if the vehicle { WARNING problems following an airbag appears to be drivable after a deployment, you should seek moderate crash, there may be When an airbag inflates, there medical attention. concealed damage that could may be dust in the air. This dust make it difficult to safely operate could cause breathing problems The vehicle has a feature that may the vehicle. for people with a history of automatically unlock the doors, turn Use caution if you should attempt asthma or other breathing trouble. on the interior lamps and hazard to restart the engine after a crash To avoid this, everyone in the warning flashers, and shut off the has occurred. vehicle should get out as soon as fuel system after the airbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn off the (Continued) In many crashes severe enough to interior lamps and hazard warning inflate the airbag, windshields are flashers by using the controls for broken by vehicle deformation. those features. 2-32 Seats and Restraints

Additional windshield breakage an airbag system will not work check is complete, either the word may also occur from the right front properly. See your dealer/retailer ON or the word OFF will be visible. passenger airbag. for service. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 15. . Airbags are designed to inflate ‑ only once. After an airbag Passenger Sensing The passenger sensing system inflates, you will need some System turns off the right front passenger new parts for the airbag system. frontal airbag under certain The vehicle has a passenger If you do not get them, the conditions. The driver airbags, sensing system for the right front airbag system will not be there seat mounted side impact airbags, passenger position. The passenger ‐ to help protect you in another and roof rail airbags are not affected airbag status indicator will be visible ‐ crash. A new system will include by the passenger sensing system. on the instrument panel when the airbag modules and possibly vehicle is started. The passenger sensing system other parts. The service manual works with sensors that are part for your vehicle covers the need of the right front passenger seat. to replace other parts. The sensors are designed to detect . The vehicle has a crash sensing the presence of a properly-seated and diagnostic module which occupant and determine if the right records information after a front passenger frontal airbag crash. See Vehicle Data should be enabled (may inflate) Recording and Privacy on or not. The words ON and OFF will be page 12 15 and Event Data ‑ visible during the system check. According to accident statistics, Recorders on page 12 16. ‑ If you are using remote start, children are safer when properly . Let only qualified technicians if equipped, to start the vehicle from secured in a rear seat in the correct work on the airbag systems. a distance you may not see the child restraint for their weight Improper service can mean that system check. When the system and size. Seats and Restraints 2-33

We recommend that children be The passenger sensing system is secured in a rear seat, including: an WARNING (Continued) designed to turn off the right front infant or a child riding in a passenger frontal airbag if: rear-facing child restraint; a child injured or killed if the right front . The right front passenger seat is passenger airbag inflates and the riding in a forward-facing child seat; unoccupied. an older child riding in a booster passenger seat is in a forward seat; and children, who are large position. . The system determines that an enough, using safety belts. infant is present in a rear-facing Even if the passenger sensing infant seat. A label on the sun visor says, system has turned off the right “Never put a rear-facing child seat front passenger frontal airbag, . The system determines that a in the front.” This is because the risk no system is fail-safe. No one small child is present in a child restraint. to the rear-facing child is so great, can guarantee that an airbag will if the airbag deploys. not deploy under some unusual . The system determines that circumstance, even though the a small child is present in a { WARNING airbag is turned off. booster seat. . A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child A right front passenger takes restraint can be seriously restraints in a rear seat, even if his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time. injured or killed if the right the airbag is off. If you secure a front passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in . The right front passenger seat is This is because the back of the the right front seat, always move occupied by a smaller person, rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far such as a child who has be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to outgrown child restraints. airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a . Or, if there is a critical problem child restraint can be seriously rear seat. with the airbag system or the (Continued) passenger sensing system. 2-34 Seats and Restraints

When the passenger sensing sensing system may or may not If the On Indicator is Lit for a system has turned off the right turn off the right front passenger Child Restraint front passenger frontal airbag, the frontal airbag, depending upon the off indicator will light and stay lit to person's seating posture and body If a child restraint has been installed remind you that the airbags are off. build. Everyone in the vehicle and the on indicator is lit: See Passenger Airbag Status who has outgrown child restraints 1. Turn the vehicle off. Indicator on page 4 15. should wear a safety belt ‑ 2. Remove the child restraint from properly whether or not The passenger sensing system is — the vehicle. designed to turn on (may inflate) the there is an airbag for that person. 3. Remove any additional items right front passenger frontal airbag from the seat such as blankets, anytime the system senses that a { WARNING cushions, seat covers, seat person of adult size is sitting heaters, or seat massagers. properly in the right front passenger If the airbag readiness light ever seat. When the passenger sensing comes on and stays on, it means 4. Reinstall the child restraint system has allowed the airbag to be that something may be wrong following the directions enabled, the on indicator will light with the airbag system. To help provided by the child restraint and stay lit to remind you that the avoid injury to yourself or others, manufacturer and refer to airbag is active. have the vehicle serviced right Securing Child Restraints (Rear away. See Airbag Readiness Seat) on page 2 54 or Securing For some children who have ‑ Child Restraints (Front Seat) on outgrown child restraints and for Light on page 4‑15 for more page 2 56. very small adults, the passenger information, including important ‑ safety information. Seats and Restraints 2-35

5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an use the following steps to allow the restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant system to detect that person and vehicle, the on indicator is enable the right front passenger still lit, turn the vehicle off. frontal airbag: Then slightly recline the vehicle 1. Turn the vehicle off. seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make 2. Remove any additional material sure that the vehicle seatback is from the seat, such as blankets, not pushing the child restraint cushions, seat covers, seat into the seat cushion. heaters, or seat massagers. Also make sure the child 3. Place the seatback in the fully restraint is not trapped under upright position. the vehicle head restraint. 4. Have the person sit upright in If this happens, adjust the head the seat, centered on the seat restraint. See Head Restraints cushion, with legs comfortably on page 2‑2. If a person of adult-size is sitting in extended. 6. Restart the vehicle. the right front passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be 5. Restart the vehicle and have the If the on indicator is still lit, because that person is not sitting person remain in this position for secure the child in the child properly in the seat. If this happens, two to three minutes after the on restraint in a rear seat position in indicator is lit. the vehicle, and check with your dealer/retailer. 2-36 Seats and Restraints

Additional Factors Affecting approved by GM for your specific Your dealer/retailer and the service System Operation vehicle. See Adding Equipment to manual have information about the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on servicing the vehicle and the airbag Safety belts help keep the page 2‑37 for more information system. To purchase a service passenger in position on the about modifications that can affect manual, see Service Publications seat during vehicle maneuvers how the system operates. Ordering Information on page 12‑13. and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. { WARNING { WARNING See Safety Belts and Child “ ” “ Stowing of articles under the For up to 10 seconds after the Restraints in the Index for ” passenger seat or between the ignition is turned off and the additional information about the importance of proper restraint use. passenger seat cushion and battery is disconnected, an airbag seatback may interfere with the can still inflate during improper A thick layer of additional material, proper operation of the passenger service. You can be injured if you such as a blanket or cushion, sensing system. are close to an airbag when it or aftermarket equipment such inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. as seat covers, seat heaters, and Servicing the They are probably part of the seat massagers can affect how airbag system. Be sure to follow well the passenger sensing system Airbag-Equipped Vehicle proper service procedures, and operates. We recommend that Airbags affect how the vehicle make sure the person performing you not use seat covers or other should be serviced. There are work for you is qualified to do so. aftermarket equipment except when parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Seats and Restraints 2-37

Adding Equipment to the position, which includes sensors addresses for Customer that are part of the passenger Assistance are in Step Two Airbag-Equipped Vehicle seat. The passenger sensing of the Customer Satisfaction Q: Is there anything I might add system may not operate properly Procedure in this manual. to or change about the vehicle if the original seat trim is See Customer Satisfaction that could keep the airbags replaced with non-GM covers, Procedure on page 12‑1. from working properly? upholstery or trim, or with GM Q: Because I have a disability, covers, upholstery or trim A: Yes. If you add things that I have to get my vehicle designed for a different change the vehicle's frame, modified. How can I find out vehicle. Any object, such as bumper system, height, front end whether this will affect my an aftermarket seat heater or or side sheet metal, they may airbag system? a comfort enhancing pad or keep the airbag system from device, installed under or on top A: If you have questions, working properly. Changing or of the seat fabric, could also call Customer Assistance. moving any parts of the front interfere with the operation of The phone numbers and seats, safety belts, the airbag the passenger sensing system. addresses for Customer sensing and diagnostic module, This could either prevent proper Assistance are in Step Two steering wheel, instrument deployment of the passenger of the Customer Satisfaction panel, roof-rail airbag modules, airbag(s) or prevent the Procedure in this manual. ceiling headliner or pillar garnish passenger sensing system See Customer Satisfaction trim, front sensors, side impact from properly turning off Procedure on page 12‑1. sensors, or airbag wiring can the passenger airbag(s). affect the operation of the airbag In addition, your dealer/retailer and See Passenger Sensing system. the service manual have information System on page 2‑32. about the location of the airbag In addition, the vehicle has a If you have questions, sensors, sensing and diagnostic passenger sensing system call Customer Assistance. module and airbag wiring. for the right front passenger The phone numbers and 2-38 Seats and Restraints

Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. The airbag system does not need Parts After a Crash See your dealer/retailer for service. regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the { WARNING If the airbag readiness light stays on airbag readiness light is working. after the vehicle is started or comes See Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag page 4‑15 for more information. airbag systems in your vehicle. system may not work properly. Have A damaged airbag system the vehicle serviced right away. Notice: If an airbag covering is See Airbag Readiness Light may not work properly and on damaged, opened, or broken, page 4‑15 for more information. the airbag may not work properly. may not protect you and your Do not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death. opened or broken airbag covers, To help make sure your airbag have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them location of the airbag modules, inspected and any necessary see What Makes an Airbag replacements made as soon Inflate? on page 2‑30. See your as possible. dealer/retailer for service. Seats and Restraints 2-39

Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that Q: What is the proper way to come with the booster seat, state wear safety belts? Older Children the weight and height limitations for A: An older child should wear a that booster. Use a booster seat lap-shoulder belt and get the with a lap-shoulder belt until the additional restraint a shoulder child passes the below fit test: belt can provide. The shoulder . Sit all the way back on the seat. belt should not cross the face Do the knees bend at the seat or neck. The lap belt should fit edge? If yes, continue. If no, snugly below the hips, just return to the booster seat. touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the . Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on child's pelvic bones in a crash. the shoulder? If yes, continue. It should never be worn over the If no, then return to the abdomen, which could cause booster seat. severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. . Does the lap belt fit low and Older children who have outgrown snug on the hips, touching the According to accident statistics, booster seats should wear the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, children and infants are safer when vehicle's safety belts. return to the booster seat. properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint . Can proper safety belt fit be system secured in a rear seating maintained for the length of the position. trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. 2-40 Seats and Restraints

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people WARNING (Continued) who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older head and neck injury. The child children need to use safety belts might also slide under the lap properly. belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. { WARNING That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should Never do this. go over the shoulder and across Never allow two children to wear the chest. the same safety belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the { WARNING impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together Never do this. and seriously injured. A safety Never allow a child to wear the belt must be used by only one safety belt with the shoulder belt person at a time. behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of (Continued) Seats and Restraints 2-41

Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older WARNING (Continued) Children children, but not for young children Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's For example, in a crash at only protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every infant will suddenly become a distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the arms. An infant should be need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate secured in an appropriate restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints. restraint. state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained every Canadian province says properly can strike other people, children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle. restrained while in a vehicle. { WARNING { WARNING Never do this. Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash. allow children to play with the (Continued) safety belts. 2-42 Seats and Restraints

For most basic types of child { WARNING restraints, there are many different models available. Never do this. When purchasing a child Children who are up against, restraint, be sure it is designed or very close to, any airbag when to be used in a motor vehicle. it inflates can be seriously injured If it is, the restraint will have a or killed. Never put a rear-facing label saying that it meets federal child restraint in the right front motor vehicle safety standards. seat. Secure a rear-facing child The restraint manufacturer's restraint in a rear seat. It is also instructions that come with the better to secure a forward-facing restraint state the weight and Q: What are the different types of child restraint in a rear seat. If you height limitations for a particular add-on child restraints? must secure a forward-facing child restraint. In addition, there child restraint in the right front A: Add-on child restraints, which are many kinds of restraints seat, always move the front are purchased by the vehicle's available for children with passenger seat as far back as it owner, are available in four basic special needs. will go. types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child's weight, height, and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. Seats and Restraints 2-43

Child Restraint Systems { WARNING { WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck and A young child's hip bones are still head injury during a crash, infants so small that the vehicle's regular need complete support. This is safety belt may not remain low because an infant's neck is not on the hip bones, as it should. fully developed and its head Instead, it may settle up around weighs so much compared with the child's abdomen. In a crash, the rest of its body. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a an infant in a rear-facing child body area that is unprotected by restraint settles into the restraint, any bony structure. This alone so the crash forces can be could cause serious or fatal distributed across the strongest injuries. To reduce the risk of part of an infant's body, the back serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat and shoulders. Infants should crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A) always be secured in rear-facing always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating child restraints. child restraints. surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. 2-44 Seats and Restraints

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH system, following the (B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the in this manual. body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system. A booster seat can also help To help reduce the chance of injury, a child to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. Seats and Restraints 2-45

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Keep in mind that an unsecured Where to Put the Children (LATCH System) on child restraint can move around in a Restraint page 2‑47 for more information. collision or sudden stop and injure Children can be endangered in a people in the vehicle. Be sure to According to accident statistics, crash if the child restraint is not properly secure any child restraint in children and infants are safer when properly secured in the vehicle. the vehicle — even when no child is properly restrained in a child When securing an add-on child in it. restraint system or infant restraint restraint, refer to the instructions system secured in a rear seating Securing the Child Within the position. that come with the restraint which Child Restraint may be on the restraint itself or in a We recommend that children and booklet, or both, and to this manual. child restraints be secured in a rear The child restraint instructions { WARNING seat, including: an infant or a child are important, so if they are not A child can be seriously injured riding in a rear-facing child restraint; available, obtain a replacement or killed in a crash if the child a child riding in a forward-facing copy from the manufacturer. child seat; an older child riding in a is not properly secured in the booster seat; and children, who are child restraint. Secure the child large enough, using safety belts. properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint. 2-46 Seats and Restraints

A label on your sun visor says, If a child restraint is secured in the “Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) center rear seating position, the the front.” This is because the risk to safety belts and the child restraint the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not LATCH anchors for the rear outside if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual seating positions will not be circumstance, even though it is accessible. Child restraints or { WARNING turned off. passengers will not be able to ride in the rear outside seating positions. Secure rear-facing child restraints A child in a rear-facing child If two child restraints are secured in in a rear seat, even if the restraint can be seriously injured the rear outside seating positions, airbag is off. If you secure a or killed if the right front the safety belt for the center rear forward-facing child restraint in passenger airbag inflates. seat position will not be accessible. the right front seat, always move This is because the back of the Child restraints or passengers will the front passenger seat as far rear-facing child restraint would not be able to ride in the center rear back as it will go. It is better to be very close to the inflating seating position. secure the child restraint in a airbag. A child in a forward-facing Wherever you install a child rear seat. child restraint can be seriously restraint, be sure to secure the injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System child restraint properly. passenger airbag inflates and the on page 2‑32 for additional Keep in mind that an unsecured passenger seat is in a forward information. child restraint can move around in a position. collision or sudden stop and injure When securing a child restraint in Even if the passenger sensing people in the vehicle. Be sure to a rear seating position, study the properly secure any child restraint in system has turned off the right instructions that came with your front passenger frontal airbag, your vehicle — even when no child child restraint to make sure it is is in it. no system is fail-safe. No one can compatible with this vehicle. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 2-47

Configurations for Use of Child Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint with Restraints a top tether, you must also use Tethers for Children either the lower anchors or the (LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must restraint during driving or in a crash. never be installed using only the top This system is designed to make tether and anchor. installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system The LATCH system uses anchors in in the vehicle, you need a child A. Child restraint using LATCH the vehicle and attachments on the restraint that has LATCH B. Child restraint or occupant child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint prohibited with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you Make sure that a LATCH-compatible with instructions on how to use child restraint is properly installed the child restraint and its using the anchors, or use the attachments. The following explains vehicle's safety belts to secure the how to attach a child restraint with restraint, following the instructions these attachments in the vehicle. that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions also the instructions in this manual. or child restraints have lower A. Child restraint or occupant anchors and attachments or top prohibited tether anchors and attachments. B. Child restraint using LATCH 2-48 Seats and Restraints

Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being Lower anchors (A) are metal bars attached. Others require the top built into the vehicle. There are tether always to be attached. two lower anchors for each In Canada, the law requires that LATCH seating position that will forward-facing child restraints have accommodate a child restraint a top tether, and that the tether with lower attachments (B). be attached. Be sure to read and A top tether (A, C) anchors the follow the instructions for the child top of the child restraint to the restraint. vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Seats and Restraints 2-49

Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations

To assist you in locating the lower anchors, each rear anchor position has a label, near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.

The top tether anchors are located under the covers, behind the rear seat, on the filler panel. Be sure to Rear Seat use an anchor located on the same i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating side of the vehicle as the seating positions with top tether anchors. position where the child restraint will j To assist you in locating the top be placed. (Lower Anchor): Seating tether anchors, the top tether anchor positions with two lower anchors. symbol is located on the cover. Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached. 2-50 Seats and Restraints

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are { WARNING WARNING (Continued) restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See Where to Put the Do not attach more than one belts behind the child restraint Restraint on page 2‑45 for child restraint to a single anchor. so children cannot reach them. additional information. Attaching more than one child Pull the shoulder belt all the way restraint to a single anchor could out of the retractor to set the lock, Securing a Child Restraint cause the anchor or attachment if your vehicle has one, after the Designed for the LATCH to come loose or even break child restraint has been installed. System during a crash. A child or others could be injured. To reduce the Notice: Do not let the LATCH { WARNING risk of serious or fatal injuries attachments rub against the during a crash, attach only one vehicle’s safety belts. This may If a LATCH-type child restraint is child restraint per anchor. damage these parts. If necessary, not attached to anchors, the child move buckled safety belts to restraint will not be able to protect avoid rubbing the LATCH the child correctly. In a crash, the { WARNING attachments. child could be seriously injured Do not fold the empty rear or killed. Install a LATCH-type Children can be seriously injured seat with a safety belt buckled. child restraint properly using the or strangled if a shoulder belt is This could damage the safety belt anchors, or use the vehicle's wrapped around their neck and or the seat. Unbuckle and return safety belts to secure the the safety belt continues to the safety belt to its stowed restraint, following the instructions tighten. Buckle any unused safety position, before folding the seat. that came with the child restraint (Continued) and the instructions in this manual. Seats and Restraints 2-51

If you need to secure more than Instead use the vehicle's anchors one child restraint in the rear seat, and child restraint attachments see Where to Put the Restraint on to secure the restraints. Some page 2‑45. Depending on where restraints also use another vehicle you place the child restraint, you anchor to secure a top tether. may not be able to access certain 1. Attach and tighten the lower safety belt assemblies or LATCH attachments to the lower anchors for additional passengers anchors. If the child restraint or child restraints. does not have lower You cannot secure three child attachments or the desired restraints using the LATCH anchors seating position does not have in the rear seat at the same time, lower anchors, secure the child but you can install two of them. A. Passenger Side Rear Seat restraint with the top tether and If you want to do this, install one Lower Anchors the safety belts. Refer to the LATCH child restraint in the B. Center Rear Seat Lower child restraint manufacturer passenger-side position, and Anchors instructions and the instructions install the other one either in the in this manual. C. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower driver-side position or in the center Anchors 1.1. Find the lower anchors position. Refer to the following Make sure to attach the child for the desired seating illustration to learn which anchors position. to use. restraint at the proper anchor location. 1.2. Put the child restraint on This system is designed to make the seat. installation of child restraints easier. 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower When using lower anchors, do attachments on the child not use the vehicle's safety belts. restraint to the lower anchors. 2-52 Seats and Restraints

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps: 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. Open the cover to expose the anchor. 2.2. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether according If the position you are using If the position you are using to the child restraint does not have a headrest does not have a headrest instructions and the or head restraint and you or head restraint and you following instructions: are using a single tether, are using a dual tether, route the tether over the route the tether over the seatback. seatback. Seats and Restraints 2-53

Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCH system in the vehicle. A damaged LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make If the position you are using If the position you are using sure the LATCH system is has an adjustable headrest has an adjustable headrest working properly after a crash, or head restraint and you or head restraint and you see your dealer/retailer to have are using a single tether, are using a dual tether the system inspected and any route the tether under the route the tether around the necessary replacements made as headrest or head restraint headrest or head restraint. soon as possible. and in between the 3. Push and pull the child restraint If the vehicle has the LATCH system headrest or head restraint in different directions to be sure and it was being used during a posts. See Head Restraints it is secure. on page 2‑2. crash, new LATCH system parts may be needed. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the LATCH system was not being used at the time of the crash. 2-54 Seats and Restraints

Securing Child Restraints that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the (Rear Seat) child restraint say that the top strap When securing a child restraint in must be anchored. a rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have instructions that came with the the LATCH system, you will be child restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure compatible with this vehicle. the child restraint in this position. If the child restraint has the LATCH Be sure to follow the instructions system, see Lower Anchors and that came with the child restraint. Tethers for Children (LATCH Secure the child in the child restraint System) on page 2‑47 for how and when and as the instructions say. 3. Push the latch plate into the where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint buckle until it clicks. using LATCH. If a child restraint needs to be installed in the rear is secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 2‑45. the buckle so that the safety belt see Lower Anchors and Tethers for could be quickly unbuckled if 1. Put the child restraint on Children (LATCH System) on necessary. page 2‑47 for top tether anchor the seat. locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. Seats and Restraints 2-55

6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 2‑47 for more information. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt 5. To tighten the belt, push down unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and all the way out of the retractor to on the child restraint, pull the let it return to the stowed position. set the lock. shoulder portion of the belt to If the top tether is attached to a top tighten the lap portion of the belt tether anchor, disconnect it. and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 2-56 Seats and Restraints

Securing Child Restraints { WARNING WARNING (Continued) (Front Seat ) This vehicle has airbags. A rear A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints seat is a safer place to secure restraint can be seriously in a rear seat, even if the a forward-facing child restraint. injured or killed if the right airbag is off. If you secure a See Where to Put the Restraint on front passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in page 2‑45. This is because the back of the the right front seat, always move rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far In addition, the vehicle has a be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to passenger sensing system which is airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a designed to turn off the right front child restraint can be seriously rear seat. passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System passenger airbag inflates and the Sensing System on page 2‑32 and on page 2‑32 for additional Passenger Airbag Status Indicator passenger seat is in a forward information. on page 4‑15 for more information, position. including important safety Even if the passenger sensing If the child restraint has the LATCH information. system has turned off the right system, see Lower Anchors and A label on the sun visor says, front passenger frontal airbag, no Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 2 47 for how and “Never put a rear-facing child seat system is fail-safe. No one can ‑ where to install the child restraint in the front.” This is because the risk guarantee that an airbag will not to the rear-facing child is so great, deploy under some unusual using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though it is it uses a top tether, see Lower turned off. Anchors and Tethers for Children (Continued) (LATCH System) on page 2‑47 for top tether anchor locations. Seats and Restraints 2-57

Do not secure a child seat in a 2. Put the child restraint on position without a top tether anchor the seat. if a national or local law requires 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run that the top tether be anchored, or if the lap and shoulder portions of the instructions that come with the the vehicle's safety belt through child restraint say that the top strap or around the restraint. The child must be anchored. restraint instructions will show In Canada, the law requires that you how. forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. You will be using the lap-shoulder 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt belt to secure the child restraint in all the way out of the retractor to this position. Follow the instructions set the lock. that came with the child restraint. 1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, 4. Push the latch plate into the the off indicator on the buckle until it clicks. passenger airbag status Position the release button on indicator should light and stay the buckle so that the safety belt lit when you start the vehicle. could be quickly unbuckled if See Passenger Airbag Status necessary. Indicator on page 4‑15. 2-58 Seats and Restraints

If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint ” under Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑32 for more information. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and 6. To tighten the belt, push down let it return to the stowed position. on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Storage 3-1

Storage Storage Cupholders Compartments Storage Compartments Glove Box ...... 3-1 Glove Box Cupholders ...... 3-1 The glove box is located on the Front Storage ...... 3-2 passenger side of the instrument Center Console Storage ...... 3-2 panel. Lift up on the lever to open it. Additional Storage Features Convenience Net ...... 3-2

There are removable cupholders located in the center console. Slide the cover (B) to access the cupholders. Cupholders are also located in the rear armrest. 3-2 Storage

Front Storage Push the button (A) on the Additional Storage underside of the front edge The driver's storage compartment of the cover to open. Features is located near the left side of the Accessory Power Outlet is in the steering column on the bottom of Convenience Net the instrument panel. Pull the cover lower area. down to open. Some vehicles might also have Use the convenience net located in input jacks for auxiliary audio the trunk to store small loads as far Center Console Storage devices. See Auxiliary Devices forward as possible. The net should under Audio Players for more not be used to store heavy loads. information. Attach the loops on each corner of the net to the hooks located on the sides of the trunk.

A two tiered storage area is under the front adjustable armrest. Instruments and Controls 4-1

Instruments and Warning Lights, Gauges, and Electric Indicators Light ...... 4-20 Controls Warning Lights, Gauges, and Antilock Brake System (ABS) Indicators ...... 4-11 Warning Light ...... 4-21 Instrument Cluster ...... 4-12 Traction Off Light ...... 4-21 Instrument Panel Overview ...... 4-13 Electronic Stability Control Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4 Odometer ...... 4-13 (ESC) Indicator Light ...... 4-22 ...... 4-13 Electronic Stability Control Controls Fuel Gauge ...... 4-13 (ESC)/Traction Control Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 4-6 Engine Coolant Temperature System (TCS) Indicator/ Steering Wheel Controls ...... 4-6 Gauge ...... 4-14 Warning Light ...... 4-22 Heated Steering Wheel ...... 4-7 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 4-14 Tire Pressure Light ...... 4-22 Horn ...... 4-7 Airbag Readiness Light ...... 4-15 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 4-23 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 4-7 Passenger Airbag Status Low Fuel Warning Light ...... 4-24 Compass ...... 4-8 Indicator ...... 4-15 Security Light ...... 4-24 Clock (Without Date Charging System Light ...... 4-16 High-Beam on Light ...... 4-24 Display) ...... 4-8 Malfunction Fog Lamp Light ...... 4-25 Clock (With Date Display) . . . . . 4-9 Indicator Lamp ...... 4-17 Taillamp Indicator Light ...... 4-25 Power Outlets ...... 4-10 Brake System Warning Cruise Control Light ...... 4-25 Light ...... 4-19 4-2 Instruments and Controls

Information Displays Ride Control System Driver Information Messages ...... 4-37 Center (DIC) ...... 4-25 Anti-Theft Alarm System Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 4-29 Messages ...... 4-37 Tire Messages ...... 4-37 Vehicle Messages Transmission Messages . . . . . 4-38 Vehicle Messages ...... 4-33 Window Messages ...... 4-38 Battery Voltage and Charging Messages ...... 4-33 Vehicle Personalization Brake System Messages . . . . 4-33 Vehicle Personalization ...... 4-38 Compass Messages ...... 4-34 OnStar® System Cruise Control Messages . . . . 4-34 ® Door Ajar Messages ...... 4-34 OnStar System ...... 4-43 Engine Cooling System Universal Remote System Messages ...... 4-35 Universal Remote System . . . 4-45 Engine Oil Messages ...... 4-35 Universal Remote System Engine Power Messages . . . . 4-36 Programming ...... 4-46 Fuel System Messages ...... 4-36 Universal Remote System Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 4-36 Operation ...... 4-49 Lamp Messages ...... 4-36 Instruments and Controls 4-3

2 NOTES 4-4 Instruments and Controls

Instrument Panel Overview Instruments and Controls 4-5

A. Air Vents on page 7‑8. I. Front Storage on page 3‑2. Q. Power Door Locks on page 1 10. Hazard Warning B. Head-Up Display (HUD) on J. Cruise Control on page 8‑37. ‑ Flashers on page 5 3. page 4‑29 (If Equipped). Heated Steering Wheel on ‑ Passenger Sensing System on page 4‑7. C. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. page 2‑32. See Turn and Lane-Change K. Steering Wheel Adjustment on R. Parking Brake on page 8 32. Signals on page 5‑4. Driver page 4‑6. ‑ Information Center Buttons. See S. PRNDL. See Automatic L. Horn on page 4‑7. Driver Information Center (DIC) Transmission on page 8‑27. M. Steering Wheel Controls on on page 4‑25. T. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into page 4‑6. D. Instrument Cluster on Park on page 8‑24. N. Ignition Positions (Keyless page 4‑12. Driver Information U. Traction Control System (TCS) Center Display. See Driver Access) on page 8‑18 or Ignition Positions (Key Access) on page 8‑34. Electronic Information Center (DIC) on Stability Control (ESC) on page 4 25. on page 8‑19. ‑ page 8‑35. Ultrasonic Parking E. Windshield Wiper/Washer on O. Heated and Ventilated Front Assist on page 8‑40. Power page 4‑7. Seats on page 2‑8. Rear Sunshade. F. Info‐Display. P. Automatic Climate Control V. Glove Box on page 3‑1. System on page 7‑1 or Dual G. AM-FM Radio on page 6‑12. Automatic Climate Control H. Exterior Lamp Controls on System on page 7‑4. page 5‑1. Fog Lamps on page 5‑4 (If Equipped). Instrument Panel Illumination Control on page 5‑5. 4-6 Instruments and Controls

Controls 3. Pull the lever up to lock b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles the steering wheel in with an OnStar®, Bluetooth®, Steering Wheel place. or navigation system, press to Do not adjust the steering wheel interact with those systems. See ® Adjustment while driving. OnStar System on page 4‑43, Bluetooth (Overview) on page 6‑42 Steering Wheel Controls or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) on page 6‑43 or Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) on page 6‑46 or Bluetooth (Navigation) on page 6‑58, or the separate navigation manual for more information. $ / c (End Call / Mute): Press to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on. For vehicles with OnStar or Bluetooth systems, press to reject The adjustment lever is located on an incoming call, or end a the left side of the steering column. current call. To adjust the steering wheel: For vehicles with audio steering _ SRC ^ (Rotary Control): Press 1. Pull the lever down. wheel controls, some audio controls to select an audio source. can be adjusted at the steering Toggle up or down to select the next 2. Move the steering wheel up wheel. or down and in or out to a or previous favorite radio station or comfortable position. CD track, DVD, if equipped, track, or MP3 track. Instruments and Controls 4-7

+ x − (Volume): Press + to Windshield Wiper/Washer & (Adjustable Interval Wipes): increase the volume, press − to Turn the band up for more frequent decrease the volume. wipes or down for less frequent wipes. Heated Steering Wheel For vehicles with a heated steering wheel, the button for this feature is located on the climate control system. ( : Press to turn the heated steering wheel on or off. A light on 9 (Off): Turns the windshield the button displays when the feature wipers off. is turned on. 3 (Mist): Single wipe, briefly The steering wheel takes about The windshield wiper lever is on the move the wiper lever down. Several three minutes to start heating. side of the steering column. With wipes, hold the wiper lever down. the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or Clear ice and snow from the wiper ON/RUN, move the windshield Horn blades before using them. If frozen wiper lever to select the wiper to the windshield, carefully loosen or Press near the horn symbols or speed. press on the steering wheel pad to thaw them. Damaged wiper blades sound the horn. 2: Fast wipes. should be replaced. See Wiper 1: Slow wipes. Blade Replacement on page 9‑30. Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. A circuit breaker stops them until the motor cools. 4-8 Instruments and Controls

Wipe Parking windshield washer had been See Backglass Antenna on If the ignition is turned LOCK/OFF activated. See Washer Fluid on page 6‑19 and Satellite Radio & page 9‑24 for information on filling Antenna on page 6‑19 for the while the wipers are on 1, 2 or , the windshield washer fluid location of the vehicle's antennas. they will immediately stop. reservoir. The compass system is designed to If the windshield wiper lever is then operate for a certain number of moved to OFF before the driver { WARNING miles or degrees of turn before door is opened or within 10 minutes, needing a signal from the GPS the wipers will restart and move to In freezing weather, do not use satellites. When the compass the base of the windshield. your washer until the windshield display shows CAL, drive the is warmed. Otherwise the vehicle for a short distance in an If the ignition is turned to open area where it can receive a LOCK/OFF while the wipers washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. GPS signal. The compass system are performing wipes due to will automatically determine when windshield wash, the wipers Compass GPS signal is restored and provide continue to run until they reach a heading again. See Compass the base of the windshield. The vehicle may have a compass Messages on page 4‑34 for more Windshield Washer display on the Driver Information information on the messages that Center (DIC). The compass may be displayed for the compass. Pull the windshield wiper lever to receives its heading and other spray windshield washer fluid and information from Global Positioning Clock (Without Date activate the wipers. System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak, Display) The wipers will continue until the and vehicle speed information. lever is released or the maximum Avoid covering the GPS antenna The infotainment system controls wash time is reached. for long periods of time with objects are used to access the time and that may interfere with the antenna's date settings through the menu When the windshield wiper lever is system. See Operation on released, additional wipes may ability to receive a satellite signal. page 6‑7 for information about occur depending on how long the how to use the menu system. Instruments and Controls 4-9

Setting the Time Clock (With Date Display) Setting the 12/24 Hour Format 1. Press the CONFIG button and The infotainment system controls 1. Press the CONFIG button and select Time Settings, or press are used to access the time and select Time and Date Settings, the H button. date settings through the menu or press the H button. system. See Operation on 2. Select Set Time. 2. Highlight Set Time Format. page 6‑7 for information about 3. Turn the Menu knob to adjust how to use the menu system. 3. Press the SELECT button to the highlighted value. select the 12 hour or 24 hour Setting the Time and Date 4. Press the SELECT button to display format. select the next value. 1. Press the CONFIG button and Setting the Month & Day select Time and Date Settings, 5. To save the time and return to Format or press the H button. the Time Settings menu, press 1. Press the CONFIG button and the 0 BACK button at any time 2. Select Set Time or Set Date. select Time and Date Settings, or press the SELECT button 3. Turn the Menu knob to adjust or press the H button. after adjusting the minutes. the highlighted value. 2. Highlight Set Date Format. Setting the 12/24 Hour Format 4. Press the SELECT button to select the next value. 3. Press the SELECT button 1. Press the CONFIG button and to select MM/DD/YY select Time Settings, or press 5. To save the time or date (month/day/year) or the H button. and return to the Time and DD/MM/YY (day/month/year). Date Settings menu, press 2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format. the 0 BACK button at any time Setting the Auto Time Adjust 3. Press the SELECT button to or press the SELECT button 1. Press the CONFIG button and select the 12 hour or 24 hour after adjusting the minutes select Time and Date Settings, display format. or year. or press the H button. 2. Highlight Auto Time Adjust. 4-10 Instruments and Controls

3. Press the SELECT button to turn see your dealer/retailer for Power Outlet 120 Volt Alternating Auto Time Adjust on or off. additional information on the Current 4. Press the SELECT button to accessory power outlet. The vehicle may have a power select Time Zone, and then Notice: Adding any electrical outlet that can be used to plug in select the Time Zone. equipment to the vehicle can electrical equipment that uses a 5. Press the SELECT button to turn damage it or keep other maximum limit of 150 watts. Daylight Savings on or off. components from working as they should. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle Power Outlets warranty. Do not use equipment The accessory power outlets can exceeding maximum amperage be used to connect electrical rating of 20 amperes. Check with equipment, such as a cellular your dealer/retailer before adding phone. electrical equipment. There are two accessory power When adding electrical equipment, outlets, one is located inside the be sure to follow the installation center console storage and other on instructions included with the the rear of the center floor console. equipment. Open the protective cover to use the Notice: Improper use of the The power outlet is located on the accessory power outlet. power outlet can cause damage rear of the center console. not covered by the vehicle Certain electrical accessories warranty. Do not hang any type An indicator light on the outlet turns may not be compatible with the of accessory or accessory on to show it is in use. The light accessory power outlets and could bracket from the plug because comes on when the ignition is in result in blown vehicle or adapter the power outlets are designed ON/RUN and equipment requiring fuses. If you experience a problem, for accessory power plugs only. less than 150 watts is plugged into the outlet, and no system fault is detected. Instruments and Controls 4-11

The indicator light does not come on The power outlet is not designed for Warning Lights, when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or the following electrical equipment if no equipment is plugged into the and may not work properly if these Gauges, and outlet. items are plugged into the power Indicators If you try to connect equipment outlet: Warning lights come on when there using more than 150 watts or . Equipment with high initial peak a system fault is detected, the wattage such as: could be a problem with a vehicle equipment may operate for a compressor-driven refrigerators function. Some warning lights come short period and turn itself off. and electric power tools. on briefly when the engine is started A protection circuit shuts off the to indicate they are working. . Other equipment requiring an power supply and the indicator light extremely stable power supply Gauges can indicate when there turns off. To reset the circuit, unplug such as: could be a problem with a vehicle the item and plug it back in or turn microcomputer-controlled function. Often gauges and warning the Remote Accessory Power (RAP) electric blankets, touch sensor lights work together to indicate a off and then back on. See Retained lamps, etc. problem with the vehicle. Accessory Power (RAP) on When one of the warning lights page 8‑20. Prolonged usage of the comes on and stays on while power outlet at the maximum load driving, or when one of the gauges of 150 watts, may cause the outlet shows there may be a problem, to overheat and automatically check the section that explains what shutdown. The power restarts when to do. Follow this manual's advice. equipment that operates within the Waiting to do repairs can be costly limit is plugged into the outlet and a and even dangerous. system fault is not detected. 4-12 Instruments and Controls

Instrument Cluster Instruments and Controls 4-13

Speedometer Notice: If the engine is operated An arrow on the fuel gauge with the tachometer in the shaded indicates the side of the vehicle the The speedometer shows the warning area, the vehicle could fuel door is on. vehicle's speed in both kilometers be damaged, and the damages When the indicator nears empty, the per hour (km/h) and miles per would not be covered by the hour (mph). low fuel light comes on. There still is vehicle warranty. Do not operate a little fuel left, but the fuel tank the engine with the tachometer in should filled soon. Odometer the shaded warning area. Here are four things that some The odometer shows how far the owners ask about. None of these vehicle has been driven, in either Fuel Gauge show a problem with the fuel gauge: kilometers or miles. . At the service station, the fuel This vehicle has a tamper-resistant pump shuts off before the gauge odometer. If the vehicle needs a reads full. new odometer installed, the new one is set to the mileage of the old . It takes a little more or less odometer. If this is not possible, it is fuel to fill up than the gauge set at zero and a label is put on indicated. For example, the the driver's door to show the old gauge may have indicated the mileage reading. tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than Tachometer half the tank's capacity to fill the tank. The tachometer displays the . engine speed in revolutions per When the ignition is on, the fuel The gauge moves a little while minute (rpm). gauge indicates how much fuel is turning a corner or speeding up. left in the tank. 4-14 Instruments and Controls

. The gauge takes a few seconds This reading indicates the same safety belts. Then the light stays to stabilize after the ignition is thing as the warning light. It means on solid until the belt is buckled. turned on, and goes back to that the engine coolant has This cycle may continue several empty when the ignition is overheated. If the vehicle has been times if the driver remains or turned off. operating under normal driving becomes unbuckled while the conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle is moving. Engine Coolant vehicle, and turn off the engine as If the driver safety belt is buckled, Temperature Gauge soon as possible. See Engine neither the light nor chime come on. Overheating on page 9‑21 for more information. Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Safety Belt Reminders Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light There is a driver safety belt reminder light on the instrument panel cluster. When the vehicle is started this light flashes and a chime comes on to remind passengers to fasten their This gauge shows the engine safety belt. Then the light stays on coolant temperature. solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle continues several times if the If the gauge pointer moves towards passenger remains or becomes the shaded area, the engine is When the vehicle is started this light unbuckled while the vehicle is too hot. flashes and a chime may come on moving. to remind drivers to fasten their Instruments and Controls 4-15

If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the WARNING (Continued) light comes on. without a crash. To help avoid The front passenger safety belt injury, have the vehicle serviced warning light and chime may turn on right away. if an object is put on the seat such The airbag readiness light comes as a briefcase, handbag, grocery Passenger Airbag Status bag, laptop or other electronic on solid and stays on for several device. To turn off the warning light seconds when the vehicle is started. Indicator Then the light goes out. and or chime, remove the object The vehicle has a passenger from the seat or buckle the If it stays on solid after the vehicle sensing system. See Passenger safety belt has been started or comes on while Sensing System on page 2‑32 for driving, the airbag system may not important safety information. The Airbag Readiness Light work properly. Have the vehicle instrument panel has a passenger serviced right away. This light shows if there is an airbag status indicator. electrical problem. The system check includes the airbag sensor, { WARNING the pretensioners, the airbag If the airbag readiness light stays modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. on after the vehicle is started or For more information on the airbag comes on while driving, it means system, see Airbag System on the airbag system might not be page 2‑25. working properly. The airbags in When the vehicle is started, the the vehicle might not inflate in a passenger airbag status indicator crash, or they could even inflate will light the words ON and OFF for (Continued) several seconds as a system check. 4-16 Instruments and Controls

If you are using remote start, The light turns off when the if equipped, to start the vehicle from { WARNING engine is started. If it does not, a distance you may not see the have the vehicle serviced by your system check. Then, after several If the airbag readiness light ever dealer/retailer. comes on and stays on, it means more seconds, the status indicator If the light stays on, or comes on will light either the word ON or OFF that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help while driving, there could be a to let you know the status of the problem with the electrical charging right front passenger frontal airbag. avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right system. Have it checked by your If the word ON is lit on the dealer/retailer. Driving while this away. See Airbag Readiness passenger airbag status indicator, light is on could drain the battery. Light on page 4‑15 for more it means that the right front This light and a Transport On passenger frontal airbag is information, including important safety information. message display when the vehicle enabled (may inflate). is in Transport Mode. For more If the word OFF is lit on the airbag Charging System Light information, see Key and Lock status indicator, it means that the Messages on page 4‑36. passenger sensing system has If a short distance must be driven turned off the right front passenger with the light on, be sure to turn off frontal airbag. all accessories, such as the radio If, after several seconds, both status and air conditioner. indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the The charging system light comes on passenger sensing system. See briefly when the ignition is turned your dealer/retailer for service. on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show the light is working. Instruments and Controls 4-17

Malfunction If the comes on Notice: Modifications made to the and stays on, while the engine is engine, transmission, exhaust, Indicator Lamp running, this indicates that there is intake, or fuel system of the A computer system called OBD II an OBD II problem and service is vehicle or the replacement of (On-Board Diagnostics-Second required. the original tires with other Generation) monitors operation of Malfunctions often are indicated by than those of the same Tire the fuel, ignition, and emission the system before any problem is Performance Criteria (TPC) can control systems. It ensures that apparent. Being aware of the light affect the vehicle's emission emissions are at acceptable levels can prevent more serious damage controls and can cause this light for the life of the vehicle, helping to to the vehicle. This system assists to come on. Modifications to produce a cleaner environment. the service technician in correctly these systems could lead to diagnosing any malfunction. costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This could Notice: If the vehicle is also result in a failure to continually driven with this light pass a required Emission on, after a while, the emission Inspection/Maintenance test. controls might not work as well, See Accessories and the vehicle's fuel economy might Modifications on page 9‑3. This light comes on when the not be as good, and the engine might not run as smoothly. This This light comes on during a ignition is on, but the engine is malfunction in one of two ways: not running, as a check to show could lead to costly repairs that it is working. If it does not, have might not be covered by the Light Flashing: A misfire condition the vehicle serviced by your vehicle warranty. has been detected. A misfire dealer/retailer. increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. 4-18 Instruments and Controls

The following can prevent more An emission system malfunction . Make sure to fuel the vehicle serious damage to the vehicle: might be corrected. with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as . Reduce vehicle speed. . Make sure the fuel cap is fully efficiently as designed and may installed. See Filling the Tank on . Avoid hard accelerations. cause: stalling after start-up, page 8‑52. The diagnostic stalling when the vehicle is . Avoid steep uphill grades. system can determine if the changed into gear, misfiring, . If towing a trailer, reduce the fuel cap has been left off or hesitation on acceleration, amount of cargo being hauled as improperly installed. A loose or or stumbling on acceleration. soon as it is possible. missing fuel cap allows fuel to These conditions might go away evaporate into the atmosphere. once the engine is warmed up. If the light continues to flash, when A few driving trips with the cap it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. properly installed should turn the If one or more of these Find a safe place to park the light off. conditions occurs, change the vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at fuel brand used. It will require at least 10 seconds, and restart the . If the vehicle has been driven least one full tank of the proper engine. If the light is still flashing, through a deep puddle of water, fuel to turn the light off. follow the previous steps and see the vehicle's electrical system See Gasoline Specifications on your dealer/retailer for service as might be wet. The condition is page 8 49. soon as possible. usually corrected when the ‑ electrical system dries out. If none of the above have made Light On Steady: An emission A few driving trips should turn the light turn off, your dealer/retailer control system malfunction has the light off. can check the vehicle. The dealer/ been detected on the vehicle. retailer has the proper test Diagnosis and service might be equipment and diagnostic tools to required. fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed. Instruments and Controls 4-19

Emissions Inspection and . The vehicle will not pass this Brake System Warning Maintenance Programs inspection if the OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system Light Some state/provincial and local determines that critical emission The vehicle's hydraulic brake governments have or might begin control systems have not been system is divided into two parts. programs to inspect the emission completely diagnosed by the If one part is not working, the other control equipment on the vehicle. system. The vehicle would be part can still work and stop the Failure to pass this inspection considered not ready for vehicle. For good braking both parts could prevent getting a vehicle inspection. This can happen if need to working. registration. the battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run If the warning light comes on, there Here are some things to know to is a brake problem. Have your brake help the vehicle pass an inspection: down. The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical system inspected right away. . The vehicle will not pass this emission control systems during inspection if the check engine normal driving. This can take light is on with the engine several days of routine driving. running, or if the ignition is If this has been done and the placed in ON/RUN and the light vehicle still does not pass the is not on. inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness, your dealer/ retailer can prepare the vehicle If the vehicle has antilock brakes, for inspection. this light should come on when the key is placed in START. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. 4-20 Instruments and Controls

If the light comes on while driving, Electric Parking Brake pull off the road and stop carefully. The pedal may be harder to push or Light it can go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one or two times, if the light is still on, have For vehicles with the Electric Park the vehicle towed for service. See Brake (EPB), the park brake Antilock Brake System (ABS) warning light should come on briefly Warning Light on page 4‑21 and when ignition is placed in ON/RUN. Towing the Vehicle on page 9‑81. For vehicles with the Electric Park If it does not come on, then have it Brake (EPB), the park brake status fixed so it will be ready to warn if light comes on when the brake is there is a problem. { WARNING applied. If the light continues If this light comes on, there is a The brake system might not be flashing after the park brake is released, or while driving, there is a problem with a system on the working properly if the brake problem with the Electric Parking vehicle that is causing the park system warning light is on. Brake system. A Service Parking brake system to work at a reduced Driving with the brake system Brake message can also display in level. The vehicle can still be driven, warning light on can lead to a the Driver Information Center (DIC). but should be taken to a dealer/ crash. If the light is still on after See Brake System Messages on retailer as soon as possible. See the vehicle has been pulled off page 4‑33 for more information. Parking Brake on page 8‑32 for the road and carefully stopped, more information. If the light does not come on, have the vehicle towed for For vehicles with the uplevel cluster, service. or remains flashing, see your dealer/retailer. this telltale displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC) screen. Instruments and Controls 4-21

Antilock Brake System Then start the engine again to reset Traction Off Light the system. If the ABS light stays (ABS) Warning Light on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. A chime may also sound when the light comes on steady. If the ABS light is the only light on, the vehicle has regular brakes, but the antilock brakes are not This light comes on when the This light comes on briefly when the functioning. Traction Control System (TCS) has been turned off by pressing and engine is started. If both lights are on, the vehicle's releasing the traction control button. If the light does not come on, have it antilock brakes are not functioning fixed so it will be ready to warn if and there is a problem with the This light also comes on and the there is a problem. regular brakes. See your dealer/ system turns off if there is a problem retailer for service. with the traction control system. If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. See Brake System Warning Light If the light comes on and stays on on page 4‑19. for an extended period of time while If the light comes on while driving, the system is turned on, the vehicle See Brake System Messages on stop as soon as it is safely needs service. possible and turn off the vehicle. page 4‑33 for all brake related DIC messages. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 8‑34 and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 8‑35 for more information. 4-22 Instruments and Controls

Electronic Stability For vehicles with the uplevel cluster, the vehicle. Switch on the TCS and this light is shown in the Driver the ESC and the warning light Control (ESC) Indicator Information Center (DIC) screen. turns off. Light See Electronic Stability Control See Traction Control System (TCS) (ESC) on page 8‑35 for more on page 8‑34 and Electronic information. Stability Control (ESC) on page 8‑35 for more information Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Tire Pressure Light Control System (TCS) This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. Indicator/Warning Light If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off. For vehicles with a tire pressure If the light comes on and stays on monitoring system, this light comes while driving, there could be a on briefly when the engine is problem with the ESC and the This light comes on when the started. It provides information vehicle might need service. When Electronic Stability Control (ESC) about tire pressures and the Tire this warning light is on, the ESC is system is turned off. When the Pressure Monitoring System. off and does not limit wheel spin. ESC is off the Traction Control System (TCS) is also off, wheel spin When the Light is On Steady The light flashes if the system is is not limited. If the ESC is off, the This indicates that one or more active and is working to assist the system does not assist in controlling of the tires are significantly driver with directional control of the underinflated. vehicle in difficult driving conditions. Instruments and Controls 4-23

A tire pressure message in the Engine Oil Pressure Light Driver Information Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Tire { WARNING Messages on page 4‑37 for more information. Stop as soon as Do not keep driving if the oil possible, and inflate the tires to the pressure is low. The engine can pressure value shown on the tire become so hot that it catches fire. The oil pressure light should come loading information label. See Tire on briefly as the engine is started. Someone could be burned. Check Pressure on page 9‑56 for more If it does not come on have the information. the oil as soon as possible and vehicle serviced by your dealer/ have the vehicle serviced. retailer. When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady Notice: Lack of proper engine oil If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through This indicates that there may be a maintenance can damage the the engine properly. The vehicle problem with the Tire Pressure engine. The repairs would not be could be low on oil and might have Monitor System. The light flashes covered by the vehicle warranty. some other system problem. See for about a minute and stays on Always follow the maintenance your dealer/retailer. steady for the remainder of the schedule in this manual for ignition cycle. This sequence changing engine oil. For vehicles with the uplevel cluster repeats with every ignition cycle. this telltale displays in the Driver See Tire Pressure Monitor Information Center (DIC) screen. Operation on page 9‑59 for more information. 4-24 Instruments and Controls

Low Fuel Warning Light For vehicles with the uplevel cluster, High-Beam on Light this telltale displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC) screen. Security Light

This light, below the fuel gauge, This light comes on when the comes on briefly when the engine is high-beam headlamps are in use. started. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam If it does not come on have the Changer on page 5 2 for more This light flashes when the security ‑ vehicle serviced by your dealer/ information. system is activated. retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator light then For more information, see Vehicle goes off. Security on page 1‑13. This light also comes on when the For vehicles with the uplevel cluster fuel tank is low on fuel. When fuel is this telltale displays in the Driver added the light should go off. If it Information Center (DIC) screen. does not, have your vehicle serviced. Instruments and Controls 4-25

Fog Lamp Light Cruise Control Light Information Displays Driver Information Center (DIC) The Driver Information Center (DIC) displays information about the vehicle. It also displays warning For vehicles with fog lamps, this This light is white whenever the messages if a system problem is light comes on when the fog lamps cruise control is set and turns green detected. See Vehicle Messages on are in use. when the cruise control is active. page 4‑33 for more information. The light goes out when the fog The light goes out when the cruise All messages appear in the DIC lamps are turned off. See Fog control is turned off. See Cruise display located in the center of the Lamps on page 5‑4 for more Control on page 8‑37 for more instrument panel cluster. information. information. On some models, the DIC may have For vehicles with the uplevel cluster some warning lights or indicators Taillamp Indicator Light this telltale will be shown in the shown in the top portion of the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. See Warning Lights, screen. Gauges, and Indicators on page 4‑11 for more information. The vehicle may also have features that can be customized through the controls on the radio. See Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑38 for This light comes on when the more information. taillamps are in use. 4-26 Instruments and Controls

DIC Operation and Displays DIC Buttons Trip/Fuel Menu Items The DIC has different displays Press MENU on the turn signal which can be accessed by using lever until Trip/Fuel Information the DIC buttons located on the turn Menu is displayed. Use w x to signal lever located on the left side scroll through the following menu of the steering wheel. The DIC items: displays trip, fuel, vehicle system information, and warning messages . Digital Speedometer MENU: Press to get to the if a system problem is detected. . Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle Trip 1 The bottom of the DIC display Information Menu. . Trip 2 shows what position the shift lever . is in, the odometer, and the direction w x (Thumbwheel): Use to scroll Fuel Range through the items in each menu. the vehicle is driving. . Average Fuel Economy A small marker will move across the In cold weather the DIC display bottom of the page as you scroll . Average Vehicle Speed may change slowly. This is normal through the items. This shows . Timer and will move more quickly as the where each page is in the menu. vehicle's interior temperature rises. . Turn-by-Turn SET (Set/Clear): Press to set or clear the menu item when it is Digital Speedometer displayed. The speedometer shows how fast the vehicle is moving in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph). The speedometer cannot be reset. Instruments and Controls 4-27

Trip 1 and Trip 2 The fuel economy can be reset by record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes This display shows the current pressing SET while the Average and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after distance traveled, in either Fuel Economy display is showing. which the display will return to zero. To stop the timer, press SET briefly kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since Average Vehicle Speed the last reset for the trip odometer. while Timer is displayed. To reset The trip odometer can be reset to This display shows the average the timer to zero, press and zero by pressing SET while the trip speed of the vehicle in miles per hold SET. odometer display is showing. hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). This average is Turn-by-Turn Fuel Range calculated based on the various This display is used for the OnStar vehicle speeds recorded since the or Navigation System Turn-by-Turn This display shows the approximate ® distance the vehicle can be driven last reset of this value. The average guidance. See OnStar System on without refueling. The fuel range speed can be reset by pressing SET page 4‑43 or the Navigation estimate is based on an average of while the Average Vehicle Speed manual, if the vehicle has the vehicle's fuel economy over display is showing. navigation, for more information. recent driving history and the Timer Vehicle Information Menu amount of fuel remaining in the fuel Items tank. Fuel range cannot be reset. This display can be used as a timer. To start the timer, press SET while Press MENU on the turn signal Average Fuel Economy Timer is displayed. The display will lever until Vehicle Information Menu This display shows the approximate show the amount of time that has is displayed. Use w x to scroll passed since the timer was last average liters per 100 kilometers through the following menu items: (L/100 km) or miles per reset, not including time the ignition . Unit gallon (mpg). This number is is off. Time will continue to be calculated based on the number of counted as long as the ignition is . Tire Pressure on, even if another display is being L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the . Remaining Oil Life last time this menu item was reset. shown on the DIC. The timer will 4-28 Instruments and Controls

Unit Remaining Oil Life Remember, the Oil Life display must This display shows an estimate be reset after each oil change. It will Move w x to switch between not reset itself. Also, be careful Metric or US when the Unit display of the oil's remaining useful life. If Remaining Oil Life 99% is not to reset the Oil Life display is active. Press SET to confirm accidentally at any time other than the setting. This will change the displayed, that means 99% of the current oil life remains. when the oil has just been changed. displays on the cluster and DIC to It cannot be reset accurately until either metric or English (US) When the remaining oil life is low, the next oil change. To reset the measurements. the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON engine oil life system press SET Tire Pressure message will appear on the display. while the Oil Life display is active. See Engine Oil Messages on See Engine Oil Life System on The display will show a vehicle with page 4‑35. The oil should changed page 9‑13. the approximate pressures of all as soon as possible. See Engine Oil four tires. Tire pressure is displayed on page 9‑11. In addition to the Compass in either kilopascal (kPa) or pounds engine oil life system monitoring the The vehicle may have a compass per square inch (psi). See Tire oil life, additional maintenance is display in the Driver Information Pressure Monitor System on recommended in the Maintenance Center (DIC). See Compass on page 9 57 and Tire Pressure ‑ Schedule in this manual. See page 4‑8 for more information. Monitor Operation on page 9‑59 Scheduled Maintenance on for more information. page 10‑2 for more information. Instruments and Controls 4-29

Head-Up Display (HUD) The images are projected through the HUD lens located on the driver's side of the instrument panel. { WARNING Notice: If you try to use the HUD If the HUD image is too bright or image as a parking aid, you may too high in your field of view, it misjudge the distance and may take you more time to see damage your vehicle. Do not use things you need to see when it is the HUD image as a parking aid. dark outside. Be sure to keep the The tap shift gear will also appear HUD image dim and placed low in on the HUD if the vehicle has tap your field of view. shift and it is active. For vehicles with the Head-Up The HUD information can be HUD Display on the Vehicle Display (HUD), some information displayed in one of three languages, Windshield English, French, or Spanish. The concerning the operation of the The HUD information appears as an vehicle is projected onto the speedometer reading and other numerical values can be displayed image focused out toward the front windshield. This includes the of the vehicle. speedometer reading, RPM reading, in either English or metric units. transmission position, outside air The language selection is changed When the ignition key is turned to temperature, compass heading and through the radio and the units of ON/RUN, the HUD will display an a brief display of the current radio measurement is changed through introductory message for a short station, including XM information the in the Driver time, until the HUD is ready. or CD track. It will also display Information Center (DIC). See turn-by-turn navigation information if AM-FM Radio on page 6‑12 and the vehicle has a navigation radio. Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑25. 4-30 Instruments and Controls

The following indicator lights come The speedometer size is reduced Use the following settings to adjust on the instrument panel when when radio, CD information, the HUD. activated and also appear on warnings, or turn-by-turn navigation OFF: To turn HUD off, turn the HUD the HUD: information are displayed on dimming knob fully counterclockwise the HUD. . Turn Signal Indicators until the HUD display turns off. . High-Beam Indicator Symbol Brightness: Turn the dimming knob The HUD temporarily displays some clockwise or counterclockwise to vehicle warnings, such as CHECK brighten or dim the display. TIRE PRESSURE and FUEL « (Up): ª (Down): Press the up LEVEL LOW when these messages or down arrows to center the HUD are on the DIC trip computer. image in your view. The HUD image The HUD also displays the following can only be adjusted up and down, messages on vehicles with these not side to side. systems, when they are active: PAGE: Press to select the display formats. Release the page button . TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE when the format number with the . STABILITRAK ACTIVE desired display is shown on the The HUD control is located to the HUD. If vehicle messages are When the HUD is on, the left of the steering wheel. speedometer reading is continually displayed, pressing PAGE, may displayed. The current radio To adjust the HUD image so that clear the message. station or CD track number will items are properly displayed, do the display for a short period of time following: after the radio or CD track status 1. Adjust the driver's seat to a changes. This happens whenever comfortable position. radio information is changed. 2. Start the engine. 3. Adjust the HUD controls. Instruments and Controls 4-31

The three formats are as follows:

Format Two: This display includes Format Three: This display the information in Format One includes all the information in Format One: This display gives the without the transmission Format One along with a circular speedometer reading (in English or information, the outside air tachometer, but without outside air metric units), turn signal indication, temperature, and compass heading. temperature and compass heading. high beam indication, transmission All formats will show the positions, outside air temperature, turn-by-turn navigation information and compass heading. and provide details about the next driving maneuver to be made. When you near your destination, the HUD will display a distance bar that will empty the closer you get to your destination. 4-32 Instruments and Controls

All navigation information is The HUD image can temporarily If You Cannot See the HUD provided to the HUD by the light up depending on the angle and Image When the Ignition Is On navigation radio or OnStar® position of the sunlight on the HUD service, for vehicles that have display. This is normal and will . Is anything covering the these features. change when the angle of the HUD lens? sunlight on the HUD display . Is the HUD dimmer setting bright changes. enough? Polarized sunglasses could make . Is the HUD image adjusted to the HUD image harder to see. the proper height? Care of the HUD . Are you wearing polarized sunglasses? Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove any dirt or film . Still no HUD image? Check the that could reduce the sharpness or fuse in the instrument panel fuse clarity of the HUD image. block. See Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 9‑44. To clean the HUD lens, use a soft, clean cloth that has household glass If the HUD Image Is Not Clear cleaner sprayed on it. Wipe the The HUD image displayed on the . Is the HUD image too bright? windshield will automatically dim HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not . Are the windshield and HUD and brighten to compensate for spray cleaner directly on the lens lens clean? outside lighting. However, the HUD because the cleaner could leak into brightness control can still be the unit. If the HUD image is not correct, adjusted as needed. contact your dealer/retailer. Keep in mind that the windshield is part of the HUD system. Instruments and Controls 4-33

Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and Service Battery Charging System Messages are displayed on the DIC Charging Messages This message is displayed when to notify the driver that the status of Battery Saver Active the vehicle has changed and that there is a fault in the battery some action may be needed by the This message displays when the charging system. Take the vehicle driver to correct the condition. vehicle has detected that the battery to your dealer/retailer for service. Multiple messages may appear one voltage is dropping beyond a after another. reasonable point. The battery saver Brake System Messages system starts reducing certain Some messages may not require features of the vehicle that you may Brake Fluid Low immediate action, but you can press be able to notice. At the point that This message is displayed when the SET to acknowledge that you features are disabled, this message received the messages and to brake fluid level is low. See Brake is displayed. It means that the Fluid on page 9‑26. clear them from the display. Some vehicle is trying to save the charge messages cannot be cleared from in the battery. Turn off unnecessary Press Brake Pedal To Release the DIC display because they are accessories to allow the battery to Park Brake more urgent. These messages recharge. require action before they can be This message is displayed if you cleared. You should take any Low Battery attempt to release the electric messages that appear on the parking brake without the brake This message is displayed when the display seriously and remember pedal applied. See Parking Brake battery voltage is low. See Battery that clearing the messages will only on page 8‑32 for more information. on page 9 27 for more information. make the messages disappear, not ‑ correct the problem. You will find the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them grouped by subject in the following information. 4-34 Instruments and Controls

Release Park Brake Switch Cruise Control Messages Left Rear Door Open This message is displayed if the Apply Brakes Before Cruise This message will display when the electric parking brake is on while driver side rear passenger door is the vehicle is in motion. Release it If this message displays when open. Close the door completely. before you attempt to drive. See attempting to activate cruise control, Parking Brake on page 8‑32 for apply the brake and then try again. Passenger Door Open more information. Cruise Set to XXX This message will display when the passenger door is open. Close the Service Parking Brake This message will display when the door completely. This message is displayed when cruise control is set and it will show there is a problem with the electric the speed it was set to. See Cruise Right Rear Door Open parking brake. See Parking Brake Control on page 8‑37 for more This message will display when the on page 8‑32 for more information. information. passenger side rear passenger door Take the vehicle to your dealer/ is open. Close the door completely. retailer. Door Ajar Messages Trunk Open Compass Messages Driver Door Open This message will display when the This message will display when the trunk is open. Close the trunk CAL driver door is open. Close the door completely. This message is displayed when the completely. compass needs to be calibrated. Hood Open See Compass on page 4‑8. This message will display when ––– the hood is open. Close the hood Three dashes will be displayed if the completely. compass needs service. See your dealer/retailer for service. Instruments and Controls 4-35

Engine Cooling System Engine Overheated — Idle Engine Oil Messages Engine Messages Change Engine Oil Soon This message displays when the A/C Off Due to High engine coolant temperature is too This message displays when the Engine Temp hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to engine oil needs to be changed. This message displays when idle until it cools down. When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the Oil Life System. the engine coolant becomes Engine Overheated Stop hotter than the normal operating — See Engine Oil Life System on temperature. To avoid added strain Engine page 9‑13 and Driver Information on a hot engine, the air conditioning This message displays and a Center (DIC) on page 4‑25 for compressor automatically turns off. continuous chime sounds if the information on how to reset the When the coolant temperature engine cooling system reaches system. See Engine Oil on returns to normal, the air unsafe temperatures for operation. page 9‑11 and Scheduled conditioning compressor turns Stop and turn off the vehicle as Maintenance on page 10‑2 for back on. You can continue to soon as it is safe to do so to avoid more information. drive the vehicle. severe damage. This message Engine Oil Hot, Idle Engine If this message continues to appear, clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature. This message displays when the have the system repaired by your engine oil temperature is too hot. dealer/retailer as soon as possible High Coolant Temperature Stop and allow the vehicle to idle to avoid damage to the engine. This message displays if the coolant until it cools down. Coolant Level Low Add temperature is hot, see Engine Engine Oil Low – Add Oil Coolant Overheating on page 9‑21. This message displays when the This message will display if the engine oil level is too low. Check coolant is low, see Engine Coolant the oil level. See Engine Oil on on page 9‑18. page 9‑11. 4-36 Instruments and Controls

Oil Pressure Low – Stop Anytime this message stays on, the Replace Battery In Remote Key vehicle should be taken to your Engine This message displays when the dealer/retailer for service as soon battery in the Remote Keyless This message displays if low oil as possible. pressure levels occur. Stop the Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to vehicle as soon as safely possible be replaced. and do not operate it until the cause Fuel System Messages Transport Mode On of the low oil pressure has been Fuel Level Low corrected. Check the oil as soon as This message displays when the possible and have your vehicle This message displays when the ignition is held in START, or when serviced by your dealer/retailer. vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as the START button is pressed for soon as possible. 15 seconds. The battery light may Engine Power Messages Tighten Gas Cap also be flashing when this message is displayed. To turn this message Engine Power Is Reduced This message displays when the off, start the vehicle and hold the fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the This message displays when the key in the START position, or press fuel cap. vehicle's engine power is reduced. the START button for 15 seconds. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle's ability to accelerate. Key and Lock Messages Lamp Messages If this message is on, but there No Remote Detected is no reduction in performance, AFL (Adaptive Forward proceed to your destination. The This message displays when the Lighting) Lamps Need Service performance may be reduced the transmitter battery is weak on This message displays when the next time the vehicle is driven. vehicles with Keyless Access. See Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) The vehicle may be driven at a “Starting the Vehicle with a Low system is disabled and needs reduced speed while this message Battery” under “Remote Keyless service. See your dealer/retailer. is on, but maximum acceleration Transmitter Operation (Keyless See Adaptive Forward Lighting and speed may be reduced. Access)” for more information. (AFL) on page 5‑3 for more information. Instruments and Controls 4-37

Ride Control System The vehicle is safe to drive, Tire Messages however, you do not have the Messages benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce Check XXX Tire Pressure or Service Rear Axle your speed and drive accordingly. Add Air To Tire This message displays when there Sport Mode On This message displays if the vehicle is a problem with the All-Wheel detects low pressure in one or more This message displays when using tires. The tire with the low pressure Drive (AWD) System. See your the selective ride control. See dealer/retailer for service. will be shown in the message. Selective Ride Control on Check the tire pressures. Service Traction Control page 8‑36 for more information. Service Tire Monitor System This message displays when there Traction Control Off is a problem with the Traction This message displays if there is a This message displays when the problem with the Tire Pressure Control System (TCS). When this Traction Control System (TCS) is message is displayed, the system Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire turned off. Adjust your driving Pressure Monitor Operation on will not limit wheel spin. Adjust accordingly. your driving accordingly. See your page 9‑59 for more information. dealer/retailer for service. Anti-Theft Alarm System Tire Learning Active Service StabiliTrak Messages This message displays when the system is learning new tires. See This message displays if there is Theft Attempted a problem with the StabiliTrak® Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on system. If this message appears, try This message displays if the vehicle page 9‑59 for more information. to reset the system. Stop; turn off detects a tamper condition. the engine for at least 15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message still comes on, it means there is a problem. See your dealer/retailer for service. 4-38 Instruments and Controls

Transmission Messages Window Messages Vehicle Service Transmission Open, Then Close Driver Personalization This message displays if there is a Window The audio system controls are used problem with the transmission. See This message is displayed when the to access the personalization your dealer/retailer. window needs to be reprogrammed. menus for customizing vehicle If the vehicle's battery has been features. Shift To Park recharged or disconnected, you CONFIG (Configuration): Press This message displays when the will need to reprogram each front to access the Configuration transmission needs to be shifted to window for the express up feature Settings Menu. P (Park). This may appear when to work. See Power Windows on attempting to remove the key from page 1‑17 for more information. MENU / SELECT Knob: Press the the ignition if the vehicle is not in center of this knob to enter the P (Park). Open, Then Close Passenger menus and select menu items. Window Turn the knob to scroll through the Transmission Hot Idle – This message is displayed when the menus. Engine window needs to be reprogrammed. 0 BACK: Press to exit or move This message displays and a chime If the vehicle's battery has been backwards in a menu. sounds if the transmission fluid in recharged or disconnected, you the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the will need to reprogram each front transmission fluid temperature high window for the express up feature can cause damage to the vehicle. to work. See Power Windows on Stop the vehicle and let it idle to page 1‑17 for more information. allow the transmission to cool. This message clears when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level. Instruments and Controls 4-39

Entering the Personalization Climate and Air Quality Air Quality Control Menus Select the Climate and Air Quality This will allow you to select the 1. Press CONFIG to access the menu and the following will be whether the system will operate at Configuration Settings menu. displayed: high or low sensitivity. Only vehicles with the dual zone climate control 2. Turn the MENU / SELECT knob . Auto Fan Control to highlight Vehicle Settings. will have this option. . Air Quality Control 3. Press the center of the Press the MENU / SELECT knob . Auto Heated Seats MENU / SELECT knob to select when Air Quality Control is the Vehicle Settings menu. . Remote Start Heated Seats highlighted to open the menu. Turn the knob to highlight High or The following list of menu items will . Remote Start Cooled Seats Low. Press the knob to confirm the be available: . Auto Defog selection and move back to the . last menu. Climate and Air Quality . Auto Rear Defog . Comfort and Convenience Remote Start Heated Seats Auto Fan Control . Collision/Detection Systems When on, this feature will turn the This will allow you to select the heated seats on when using remote . Language automatic fan speed it can be start on cold days. . Lighting adjusted to run lower or higher than normal. Press the MENU / SELECT knob . Power Door Locks when Remote Start Heated Seats is Press the MENU / SELECT knob highlighted. Turn the knob to select . Remote Lock/Unlock/Start when Auto Fan Control is On or Off. Press the knob to confirm . Return to Factory Settings highlighted to open the menu. and go back to the last menu. Turn the knob to highlight High, Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to Medium, or Low. Press the knob to highlight the menu. Press the knob confirm the selection and move to select it. Each of the menus is back to the last menu. detailed in the following information. 4-40 Instruments and Controls

Remote Start Cooled Seats Press the MENU / SELECT knob Personalization by Driver When on, this feature will turn the when Auto Rear Defog is This allows the selection of if the cooled seats on when using remote highlighted to open the menu. personalization settings are specific start on warm days. Turn the knob to highlight On or to each driver or the same no matter Off. Press the knob to confirm the Press the MENU / SELECT knob which key was used to enter and selection and move back to the start the vehicle. when Remote Start Cooled Seats is last menu. highlighted. Turn the knob to select Press the MENU / SELECT knob On or Off. Press the knob to confirm Comfort and Convenience when Personalization by Driver is and go back to the last menu. Select the Comfort and highlighted. Turn the knob to select On or Off. Press the knob to confirm Auto Defog Convenience menu and the following will be displayed: and go back to the last menu. This will allow you to turn the auto defog on or off. Only vehicles with . Chime Volume Driver Seat Easy Exit the dual zone climate control will . Personalization by Driver This allows you to turn the easy exit have this option. seat feature on or off. . Driver Seat Easy Exit Press the MENU / SELECT knob Press the MENU / SELECT knob . Parking Tilt Mirrors when Auto Defog is highlighted to when Driver Seat Easy Exit is open the menu. Turn the knob to Chime Volume highlighted. Turn the knob to select highlight On or Off. Press the knob On or Off. Press the knob to confirm This allows the selection of the to confirm the selection and move and go back to the last menu. chime volume level. back to the last menu. Press the MENU / SELECT knob Auto Rear Defog when Chime Volume is highlighted. This will allow you to turn the auto Turn the knob to select Normal or rear defog on or off. This feature will High. Press the knob to confirm and automatically turn on the rear go back to the last menu. defogger when it is cold outside. Instruments and Controls 4-41

Park Tilt Mirrors Language Press the MENU / SELECT knob when Exit Lighting is highlighted. This allows you to turn the park tilt Select the Language menu and the Turn the knob to select Off, mirrors feature on or off. following will be displayed: 30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes. Press the MENU / SELECT knob . English Press the knob to confirm and go when Park Tilt Mirrors is highlighted. . French back to the last menu. Turn the knob to select Driver & Passenger or Off. Press the knob to . Spanish Vehicle Locator Lights confirm and go back to the Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to This allows the vehicle locator lights last menu. select the language. Press the to be turned on or off. Collision/Detection Systems knob to confirm and go back to the Press the MENU / SELECT knob last menu. when Vehicle Locator Lights is Select the Collision/Detection highlighted. Turn the knob to select Systems menu and the following Lighting On or Off. Press the knob to confirm will be displayed: Select the Lighting menu and the and go back to the last menu. . Park Assist following will be displayed: Power Door Locks Park Assist . Exit Lighting Select Power Door Locks and the This allows the Ultrasonic Parking . Vehicle Locator Lights following will be displayed: Assist feature to be turned on or off. Exit Lighting . Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out Press the MENU / SELECT knob This allows the selection of how . Auto Door Unlock when Park Assist is highlighted. long the exterior lamps stay on . Turn the knob to select On or Off. when leaving the vehicle when it is Delayed Door Lock Press the knob to confirm and go dark outside. back to the last menu. 4-42 Instruments and Controls

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out Press the MENU / SELECT knob Unlock Feedback (Lights) When on, this feature will keep the when Delayed Door Lock is When on, the exterior lamps will driver door from locking when the highlighted. Turn the knob to select flash when unlocking the vehicle door is open. If off is selected, the On or Off. Press the knob to confirm with the RKE transmitter. and go back to the last menu. Delayed Door Lock menu will be Press the MENU / SELECT knob available and the door will lock as Auto Door Unlock when Unlock Feedback (Lights) is programmed through this menu. This allows selection of which of the highlighted. Turn the knob to select Press the MENU / SELECT knob doors will automatically unlock when Flash Lights or Off. Press the knob when Auto Door Unlock is the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). to confirm and go back to the highlighted. Turn the knob to last menu. select On or Off. Press the knob Press the MENU / SELECT knob to confirm and go back to the when Auto Door Unlock is Locking Feedback last menu. highlighted. Turn the knob to This allows selection of what type of select All Doors, Driver Door, feedback is given when locking the Delayed Door Lock or Off. Press the knob to confirm vehicle with the RKE transmitter. and go back to the last menu. When on, this feature will delay Press the MENU / SELECT knob the locking of the doors until Remote Lock/Unlock/Start when Locking Feedback is five seconds after the last door is highlighted. Turn the knob to closed. You will hear three chimes Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Start and the following will be displayed: select Lights and Horn, Lights to signal delayed locking is in use. Only, Horn Only, or Off. Press the Pressing either the power lock . Unlock Feedback (Lights) knob to confirm and go back to the button or the lock button on the . Locking Feedback last menu. RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and . Door Unlock Options immediately lock all of the doors. . Remote Vehicle Start . Remote Recall Instruments and Controls 4-43

Door Unlock Options Press the MENU / SELECT knob OnStar® System This allows selection of which doors when Remote Vehicle Start is will unlock when pressing the unlock highlighted. Turn the knob to select button on the RKE transmitter. On or Off. Press the knob to confirm and go back to the last menu. Press the MENU / SELECT knob when Door Unlock Options is Remote Recall highlighted. Turn the knob to select This allows the Remote Recall All Doors or Driver Door Only. When feature to be turned on or off. set to Driver Door Only, the driver Remote Recall is when the OnStar® uses several innovative door will unlock the first time the memorized settings will be recalled technologies and live advisors to unlock button is pressed and all as you unlock and enter the vehicle. provide a wide range of safety, doors will unlock when the button is security, navigation, diagnostics, Press the MENU / SELECT knob pressed a second time. When set to and calling services. All Doors, all of the doors will unlock when Remote Recall is highlighted. at the first press of the unlock Turn the knob to select On or Off. Automatic Crash Response button. Press the knob to confirm Press the knob to confirm and go In a crash, built in sensors can and go back to the last menu. back to the last menu. automatically alert an OnStar Return to Factory Settings advisor who is immediately Remote Vehicle Start connected to the vehicle to see This allows the Remote Vehicle Select Return to Factory Settings if you need help. Start to be turned on or off, if the to return all of the vehicle vehicle has this feature. personalization to the default How OnStar Service Works settings. Turn the knob to select Yes Q : This blue button connects you or No. Press the knob to confirm to a specially trained OnStar advisor and go back to the last menu. to verify your account information and to answer questions. 4-44 Instruments and Controls

] : Push this red emergency For a full description of OnStar The OnStar system can record and button to get priority help from services and system limitations, see transmit vehicle information. This specially trained OnStar emergency the OnStar Owner's Guide in the information is automatically sent to advisors. glove box. an OnStar call center when Q is X : Push this button for hands‐free, OnStar service is subject to the pressed, ] is pressed, or if the voice‐activated calling and to give OnStar terms and conditions airbags or ACR system deploy. voice commands for turn‐by‐turn included in the OnStar Subscriber This information usually includes navigation. Information. the vehicle's GPS location and, in the event of a crash, additional Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle OnStar service cannot work unless information regarding the crash that Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics, the vehicle is in a place where the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the Remote Door Unlock, Roadside OnStar has an agreement with a direction from which the vehicle was Assistance, Turn by Turn Navigation wireless service provider for service ‐ ‐ hit). When the virtual advisor feature and Hands Free Calling are in that area. OnStar service also ‐ of OnStar hands-free calling is available on most vehicles. Not all cannot work unless the vehicle is in used, the vehicle also sends OnStar OnStar services are available on a place where the wireless service the vehicle's GPS location so they all vehicles. For more information provider OnStar has hired for that can provide services where it is see the OnStar Owner's Guide or area has coverage, network located. visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) or capacity and reception when the www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact service is needed, and technology Location information about the OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR that is compatible with the OnStar vehicle is only available if the GPS (1‐888‐466‐7827) or service. Not all services are satellite signals are unobstructed TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or available everywhere, particularly in and available. press Q to speak with an remote or enclosed areas, or at all times. OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Instruments and Controls 4-45

The vehicle must have a working On some vehicles, the mute button Universal Remote electrical system, including can be used to dial numbers into adequate battery power, for the voice mail systems, or to dial phone System OnStar equipment to operate. There extensions. See the OnStar Owner's See Radio Frequency Statement on are other problems OnStar cannot Guide for more information. page 12 17 for information control that may prevent OnStar ‑ regarding Part 15 of the Federal from providing OnStar service at Your Responsibility Communications Commission (FCC) any particular time or place. Some Increase the volume of the radio if Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry examples are damage to important the OnStar advisor cannot be heard. Canada. parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills, If the light next to the OnStar tall buildings, tunnels, weather or buttons is red, the system may wireless phone network congestion. not be functioning properly. OnStar Steering Wheel Press Q and request a vehicle Controls diagnostic. If the light appears clear This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute (no light is appearing), your OnStar button that can be used to interact subscription has expired and all with OnStar hands-free calling. services have been deactivated. See Steering Wheel Controls on Press Q to confirm that the OnStar page 4‑6 for more information. equipment is active. 4-46 Instruments and Controls

Universal Remote System Do not use the Universal Home When programming a garage door, Remote with any garage door park outside of the garage. Park Programming opener that does not have the stop directly in line with and facing the and reverse feature. This includes garage door opener motor-head or any garage door opener model gate motor-head. Be sure that manufactured before April 1, 1982. people and objects are clear of the Read the instructions completely garage door or gate that is being before attempting to program the programmed. Universal Home Remote. Because It is recommended that a new of the steps involved, it may be battery be installed in your helpful to have another person hand-held transmitter for quicker available to assist you with and more accurate transmission of programming the Universal Home the radio-frequency signal. Remote. Programming the Universal Keep the original hand-held Home Remote System If the vehicle has this feature, you transmitter for use in other vehicles will see these buttons with one as well as for future Universal Home For questions or help programming square Light Emitting Diode (LED) Remote programming. It is also the Universal Home Remote indicator light next to them in the recommended that upon the sale System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go headliner. of the vehicle, the programmed to www.homelink.com. Universal Home Remote buttons This system provides a way to Programming a garage door opener should be erased for security replace up to three remote control involves time-sensitive actions, so purposes. See Erasing Universal transmitters used to activate “ read the entire procedure before Home Remote Buttons later in this devices such as garage door ” starting. Otherwise, the device will section. openers, security systems, and time out and the procedure will have home automation devices. to be repeated. Instruments and Controls 4-47

To program up to three devices: Some entry gates and garage . If the Universal Home Remote indicator light 1. Hold the end of your hand-held door openers may require substitution of Step 2 with the blinks rapidly for transmitter about 3 to 8 cm two seconds, then turns to (1 to 3 inches) away from the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian a constant light and the Universal Home Remote buttons garage door does not while keeping the indicator Programming” later in this section. move, continue with the light in view. The hand-held programming Steps 4 transmitter was supplied by the 3. Press and hold for five seconds through 6. manufacturer of your garage the newly-trained Universal door opener receiver Home Remote button (selected It may be helpful to have (motor-head unit). button from Step 2) while another person to assist observing the indicator light with the remaining Steps 4 2. At the same time, press and through 6. hold both the hand-held and garage door activation. transmitter button and one of the . If the indicator light stays three Universal Home Remote on continuously or the buttons to be used to operate garage door starts to move the garage door. Do not release when the Universal Home the Universal Home Remote Remote button is pressed button or the hand-held and released, then the transmitter button until the programming is complete. indicator light changes from a There is no need to slow to a rapidly flashing light. continue programming You now may release both Steps 4 through 6. buttons. 4-48 Instruments and Controls

6. Immediately return to the Gate Operator and Canadian vehicle. Firmly press and hold Programming for two seconds the Universal Home Remote button, selected If you have questions or need in Step 2 to control the garage help programming the Universal door, and then release it. If the Home Remote System, call garage door does not move or 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to the lamp on the garage door www.homelink.com. opener receiver (motor-head Canadian radio-frequency laws unit) does not flash, press require transmitter signals to time and hold the same button a out or quit after several seconds second time for two seconds, of transmission. This may not be and then release it. Again, if long enough for Universal Home “Learn” or “Smart” Buttons the door does not move or the Remote to pick up the signal during 4. After Steps 1 through 3 have garage door lamp does not programming. Similarly, some U.S. been completed, locate the flash, press and hold the gate operators are manufactured to “Learn” or “Smart” button inside same button a third time for time out in the same manner. the garage on the garage door two seconds, and then release. opener receiver (motor-head unit). The name and color of the The Universal Home Remote should button may vary by now activate the garage door. manufacturer. To program the remaining 5. Firmly press and release the two Universal Home Remote buttons, begin with Step 1 of “Learn” or “Smart” button. After you press this button, you will “Programming the Universal have 30 seconds to complete Home Remote System”. Step 6. Instruments and Controls 4-49

If you live in Canada, or you are Universal Remote System Reprogramming a Single having difficulty programming a gate Operation Universal Home Remote operator or garage door opener by Button using the “Programming Universal Using Universal Home Remote Home Remote” procedures, To reprogram any of the three regardless of where you live, Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote buttons: replace Step 2 under “Programming Universal Home Remote button 1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home Remote” with the for at least half of a second. The Universal Home Remote button. following: indicator light will come on while Do not release the button. the signal is being transmitted. 2. Continue to press and hold 2. The indicator light will begin to the Universal Home Remote Erasing Universal Home flash after 20 seconds. Without button while you press and release Remote Buttons releasing the button, proceed every two seconds (cycle) the All programmed buttons should be with Step 1 of the section hand-held transmitter button until erased when the vehicle is sold or “Programming Universal Home the frequency signal has been the lease ends. Remote”. successfully accepted by the Universal Home Remote. The To erase all programmed buttons on If you have questions or need Universal Home Remote indicator the Universal Home Remote device: help programming the Universal Home Remote System, call light will flash slowly at first and then 1. Press and hold down the rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to two outside buttons until the www.homelink.com. You may also “Programming Universal Home indicator light begins to flash, call the customer assistance phone Remote” to complete. after 10 seconds. number under Customer Assistance 2. Release both buttons. Offices on page 12‑3. 4-50 Instruments and Controls

2 NOTES Lighting 5-1

Interior Lighting Exterior Lighting Lighting Instrument Panel Illumination Control ...... 5-5 Exterior Lamp Controls Exterior Lighting Dome Lamps ...... 5-5 Reading Lamps ...... 5-5 Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 5-1 Sun Visor Lamps ...... 5-5 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder ...... 5-2 Lighting Features Headlamp High/Low-Beam Entry Lighting ...... 5-5 Changer ...... 5-2 Exit Lighting ...... 5-6 Flash-to-Pass ...... 5-2 Battery Load Management . . . . 5-6 Daytime Running Battery Power Protection ...... 5-7 Lamps (DRL) ...... 5-2 Automatic Headlamp System ...... 5-3 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) ...... 5-3 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 5-3 Turn and Lane-Change The exterior lamp control is located Signals ...... 5-4 on the instrument panel on the Fog Lamps ...... 5-4 outboard side of the steering wheel. Turn the control to the following positions: O (Off): Turns off the exterior lamps. The knob returns to the AUTO position after it is released. Turn to off again to reactivate the AUTO mode. 5-2 Lighting

AUTO (Automatic): Automatically Exterior Lamps Off Flash-to-Pass turns the exterior lamps on and off, depending on outside lighting. Reminder To flash the high beams, pull the A warning chime sounds, if the turn signal/lane change lever The current status of the AUTO towards you, and release. system is displayed in the Driver driver door is opened while the ignition is off and the exterior lamps Information Center (DIC) uplevel Daytime Running display. See Driver Information are on. Center (DIC) on page 4 25. Lamps (DRL) ‑ Headlamp High/ ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can parking lamps together with the Low-Beam Changer make it easier for others to see the following: 2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam front of your vehicle during the day. Fully functional daytime running . Sidemarker Lamps Changer: Push the turn signal/lane change lever away from you and lamps are required on all vehicles . Taillamps release, to turn the high beams on. first sold in Canada. . License Plate Lamps To return to low beams, push the The DRL system turns on the lever again or pull it towards you low-beam headlamps at a reduced . Instrument Panel Lights and release. brightness or for vehicles with 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps together with the headlamps, the dedicated DRL following: lights will come on when the . Sidemarker Lamps following conditions are met: . Taillamps . The engine is running, . License Plate Lamps . The exterior lamp band is in This indicator light turns on in the AUTO, and . Instrument Panel Lights instrument panel cluster when the . The light sensor determines it is . Parking Lamps high beam headlamps are on. daytime. Lighting 5-3

When the DRL are on, the When it is bright enough outside AFL is not immediately operable low-beam headlamps will be on. the headlamps will turn off or may after starting the vehicle; driving a The taillamps, sidemarker, change to daytime running short distance is required to instrument panel lights and other lamps (DRL). calibrate the AFL. See Exterior lamps will not be on. The automatic headlamp system Lamp Controls on page 5‑1. The DRL turn off when the turns off when the exterior lamp Hazard Warning Flashers headlamps are turned to O or the control is turned to O or the ignition ignition is off. is off. | Hazard Warning Flasher: Press this button located on the Automatic Headlamp Adaptive Forward instrument panel below the climate control system, to make the front System Lighting (AFL) and rear turn signal lamps flash on When the exterior lamp control is The Adaptive Forward Lighting and off. Press again to turn the set to AUTO and it is dark enough System (AFL) pivots the headlamps flashers off. outside, the headlamps come on horizontally to provide greater road The hazard warning flashers turn on automatically. illumination while turning. To enable automatically if the airbags deploy. There is a light sensor located on AFL, set the exterior lamp switch top of the instrument panel. Do not to the AUTO position. Moving the cover the sensor or the headlamps switch out of the AUTO position will come on when they are not deactivates the system. AFL needed. operates when the vehicle speed is greater than 3 km/h (2 mph). The system may also turn on the AFL does not operate when the headlamps when driving through a transmission is in R (Reverse). parking garage or tunnel. 5-4 Lighting

Turn and Lane-Change Raise or lower the lever until the Fog Lamps arrow starts to flash to signal a lane Signals change. Hold it there until the lane For vehicles with fog lamps, the change is completed. If the lever is button is located on the exterior briefly pressed and released, the lamp control, on the outboard side turn signal flashes three times. of the steering wheel. The turn and lane‐change signal To turn on the fog lamps, the ignition can be turned off manually by and the headlamps or parking lamps moving the lever back to its original must be on. position. If the fog lamps are turned on while If after signaling a turn or lane the exterior lamp switch is in the change the arrow flashes rapidly or AUTO position, the headlamps does not come on, a signal bulb come on automatically. might be burned out. # : Press to turn on or off. An Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb indicator light on the instrument Move the lever all the way up or is not burned out, check the fuse. panel cluster comes on when the down to signal a turn. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on fog lamps are on. An arrow on the instrument panel page 9‑40. Some localities have laws that cluster flashes in the direction of the require the headlamps to be on turn or lane change. along with the fog lamps. Lighting 5-5

Interior Lighting Reading Lamps Lighting Features There are front and rear reading Instrument Panel lamps. Entry Lighting Illumination Control The front reading lamps are located The headlamps, taillamps, license The brightness of the instrument in the overhead console. plate lamps, reverse lamps, dome panel lighting and steering wheel lamps, and most of the interior lights controls can be adjusted. Use the turn on briefly, when the Remote thumbwheel located next to the Keyless Entry (RKE) K is pressed, exterior lamps control on the or when the door handle is pulled on outboard side of the steering wheel. a Keyless Access Vehicle. See D : Move the thumbwheel up or Ignition Positions (Keyless Access) down to brighten or dim the lights. on page 8‑18 or Ignition Positions (Key Access) on page 8‑19. After about 30 seconds the exterior lamps Dome Lamps turn off, and then the dome and The interior lamps control located in remaining interior lights will dim to the overhead console controls both off. Entry lighting can be disabled the front and rear interior lamps. manually by changing the ignition # $ : Press to turn each lamp on out of the OFF position, or by To operate, press the following or off. pressing the Remote Keyless buttons: Entry (RKE) Q button. * (Off): Turns the lamp off. Sun Visor Lamps 1 Door: Turns the lamp on when This lamp turns on when the cover any door is opened. is opened. + ON: Keeps the lamp on all the time. 5-6 Lighting

This feature can be activated or For a vehicle with Keyless Access, Battery Load deactivated in the menu SETTINGS the exterior lights and dome lamps in the Info Display. Press CONFIG automatically turn on when a door is Management on the infotainment system to call opened after the ignition is turned The vehicle has Electric Power up the menu. See Vehicle off. See Ignition Positions (Keyless Management (EPM) that estimates Personalization on page 4‑38. Access) on page 8‑18 or Ignition the battery's temperature and state Positions (Key Access) on of charge. It then adjusts the voltage Exit Lighting page 8‑19. for best performance and extended life of the battery. The headlamps, taillamps, parking The exterior lights turn off lamps, reverse lamps, and license immediately by turning the exterior When the battery's state of charge plate lamps come on at night, or in lamps control to OFF. is low, the voltage is raised slightly areas with limited lighting, when the The exit lighting feature can be to quickly bring the charge back up. key is removed from the ignition. activated, deactivated, or the When the state of charge is high, The dome lamps also come on timeframe for the lighting can be the voltage is lowered slightly to when the key is removed from the changed in the menu Settings in the prevent overcharging. If the vehicle ignition. The exterior lights and Info. Display. Press CONFIG on the has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage dome lamps remain on after the Infotainment system to access the display on the Driver Information door is closed for a set amount of menu. See Vehicle Personalization Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down. This is time, then automatically turn off. on page 4‑38. normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed. Lighting 5-7

The battery can be discharged at EPM works to prevent excessive If one of these messages displays, idle if the electrical loads are very discharge of the battery. It does this it is recommended that the driver high. This is true for all vehicles. by balancing the generator's output reduce the electrical loads as much This is because the generator and the vehicle's electrical needs. as possible. See Driver Information (alternator) may not be spinning fast It can increase engine idle speed to Center (DIC) on page 4‑25. enough at idle to produce all the generate more power, whenever power that is needed for very high needed. It can temporarily reduce Battery Power Protection electrical loads. the power demands of some accessories. The battery saver feature is A high electrical load occurs when designed to protect the vehicle's several of the following are on, such Normally, these actions occur in battery. as: headlamps, high beams, fog steps or levels, without being lamps, rear window defogger, noticeable. In rare cases at the If the exterior lamps or any interior climate control fan at high speed, highest levels of corrective action, light is left on and the ignition is heated seats, engine cooling fans, this action may be noticeable to the turned off, the battery rundown trailer loads, and loads plugged into driver. If so, a Driver Information protection system automatically accessory power outlets. Center (DIC) message might be turns the lamp off after about displayed, such as BATTERY 10 minutes. SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. 5-8 Lighting

2 NOTES Infotainment System 6-1

Audio Players Introduction Infotainment CD Player ...... 6-20 System CD/DVD Player ...... 6-22 Read the following pages to Mass Storage become familiar with the audio Media (MEM) ...... 6-25 system's features. Introduction Auxiliary Devices (Radio Introduction ...... 6-1 with CD) ...... 6-29 { WARNING Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 6-2 Auxiliary Devices (Radio with Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 6-3 CD/DVD and MEM) ...... 6-32 Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause Overview (Radio with CD/DVD Rear Seat Infotainment and MEM) ...... 6-5 a crash resulting in injury or Rear Seat Entertainment Operation ...... 6-7 death to you or others. Do not (RSE) System ...... 6-34 give extended attention to Radio Phone entertainment tasks while driving. AM-FM Radio ...... 6-12 Bluetooth (Overview) ...... 6-42 Satellite Radio ...... 6-15 Bluetooth (Infotainment This system provides access to Radio Reception ...... 6-18 Controls) ...... 6-43 many audio and non audio listings. Backglass Antenna ...... 6-19 Bluetooth (Voice Satellite Radio Antenna ...... 6-19 To minimize taking your eyes off the Recognition) ...... 6-46 road while driving, do the following Bluetooth (Navigation) ...... 6-58 while the vehicle is parked: . Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system. . Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations. 6-2 Infotainment System

For more information, see Defensive The vehicle has Retained Theft-Deterrent Feature Driving on page 8‑3. Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, The theft-deterrent feature works Notice: Contact your dealer/ the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off. by learning a portion of the Vehicle retailer before adding any Identification Number (VIN) to equipment. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 8‑20 for more the infotainment system. The Adding audio or communication information. infotainment system does not equipment could interfere with operate if it is stolen or moved to a the operation of the vehicle's Navigation/Radio System different vehicle. engine, radio, or other systems, For vehicles with a navigation radio and could damage them. Follow system, see the separate Navigation federal rules covering mobile System manual. radio and telephone equipment. Infotainment System 6-3

Overview (Radio with CD) A. VOL/ O . Turns the system on or off and adjusts the volume. B. FAV . Radio: Opens the favorites list. C. Buttons 1 to 6 . Radio: Saves and selects favorite stations. D. INFO . Radio: Shows available information about the current station. . CD: Shows available information about the current track. E. TUNE . Radio: Manually selects radio stations. . CD: Selects tracks. 6-4 Infotainment System

F. CD/AUX J. RADIO/BAND N. 0 BACK . . Selects the CD player or an Changes the band while . Menu: Moves external audio source. listening to the radio. one level back. . G. g Selects the radio when . Character Input: Deletes listening to a different audio the last character. . Radio: Seeks the previous source. station. O. H K. Menu Knob . CD: Select the previous . Opens the clock menu. track or rewinds within a . Opens menus, highlights track. menu items, or sets P. TONE numeric values while in . Opens the tone menu. H. Z CD Eject a menu. 5 . Removes a disc from the L. SELECT Q. CD slot. . Selects menu items. . Opens the phone main menu. I. l M. CONFIG . Mutes the audio system. . Radio: Seeks the next . Opens the settings menu. station. . CD: Select the next track or fast forwards within a track. Infotainment System 6-5

Overview (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) A. VOL/ O . Turns the system on or off and adjusts the volume. B. FAV . Radio: Opens the favorites list. . MEM: Opens the favorites list. C. Buttons 1 to 6 . Radio: Saves and selects favorite stations. . MEM: Saves and selects favorite tracks and playlists. D. INFO . Radio: Shows available information about the current station. . CD: Shows available information about the current track. 6-6 Infotainment System

E. TUNE/ k H. Z CD Eject L. SELECT . . Manually selects radio . Removes a disc from the Selects menu items. stations and pauses time CD slot. M. Menu Knob shifted content. I. REC O . Opens menus, highlights . CD/DVD: Select tracks, menu items, or sets . pauses playback, and stops AUX: Records content from numeric values while in playback. audio CDs, MP3/WMA a menu. CDs, and USB mass . MEM: Select tracks and storage devices. N. 0 BACK pauses playback. J. DEL . Menu: Moves one F. RADIO/BAND . MEM: Deletes the current level back. . Changes the band while track from MEM. . Character Input: Deletes listening to the radio. l the last character. . K. Selects the radio when O. TONE listening to a different audio . Radio: Seeks the next source. station. . Opens the tone menu. G. g . CD: Selects the next track P. H or fast forwards within a . . Radio: Seeks the previous track. Opens the clock menu. station. Q. CONFIG . MEM: Selects the next . CD: Selects the previous track or fast forwards within . Opens the settings menu. track or rewinds within a a track. track. . MEM: Selects the previous track or rewinds within a track. Infotainment System 6-7

R. 5 Turning the System On or Off Menu System . Opens the phone VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press to Controls main menu. turn the system on and off. The Menu knob, SELECT button, . Mutes the audio system. Automatic Switch‐Off and the 0 BACK button are used to S. MEM/DVD/AUX If the infotainment system has navigate the menu system. . Selects MEM, CD/DVD, been turned on after the ignition is Menu Knob: Turn to: turned off, the system will turn off USB, or a connected front . Enter the menu system. or rear auxillary audio automatically after ten minutes. . Highlight a menu option. source. Volume Control . Select a value. O Operation VOL/ (Volume/Power): Turn to SELECT: Press to: adjust the volume. Controls . Select or activate the highlighted 5 (Phone/Mute): For vehicles The infotainment system is operated menu option. with OnStar®, press and hold 5 to by using the pushbuttons, . Confirm a set value. multifunction knobs, menus that are mute the infotainment system. . Turn a system setting on or off. shown on the display, and steering Press and hold 5 again, or turn wheel controls, if equipped. the VOL/ O knob to cancel mute. 0 BACK: Press to: For vehicles without OnStar®, . Exit a menu. press 5 to mute the infotainment . Return from a submenu screen system. Press 5 again, or turn to the previous menu screen. the VOL/ O knob to cancel mute. . Delete the last character in a sequence. 6-8 Infotainment System

Selecting a Menu Option Activating a Setting Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the Menu knob to move the 1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight 1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight highlighted bar. the setting. the function. 2. Press the SELECT button to 2. Press the SELECT button to 2. Press the SELECT button to turn select the highlighted option. activate the setting. the function on or off. Submenus Setting a Value Entering a Character Sequence

An arrow on the right‐hand edge of 1. Turn the Menu knob to change 1. Turn the Menu knob to highlight the menu indicates that it has a the current value of the setting. the character. submenu with other options. 2. Press the SELECT button to 2. Press the SELECT button to confirm the setting. select the character. Infotainment System 6-9

Press the 0 BACK button to delete Adjusting the Treble, Midrange, Adjusting the Fader and Balance the last character in the sequence and Bass or press and hold to delete the entire character sequence. Audio Settings The audio settings can be set for each radio band and each audio player source. 1. Press the TONE button. 1. Press the TONE button. To quickly reset an audio setting 2. Select Fader or Balance. value to 0: 2. Select Treble, Midrange, 3. Select the value. or Bass. 1. Press the TONE button. 0 3. Select the value. Press the BACK button to go 2. Select the audio setting. back to the Tone Settings menu. Press the 0 BACK button to go 3. Press and hold the SELECT back to the Tone Settings menu. button until the value changes to 0. Press the 0 BACK button to go back to the Tone Settings menu. 6-10 Infotainment System

Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer) DSP (Digital Signal Processing) The DSP settings for the Radio with For vehicles that have an equalizer: Settings CD/DVD and MEM are: For vehicles with DSP, it is used to . 2.0 normal ‐ Select this setting provide a choice of different to adjust the audio for stereo listening experiences. mode. This provides the best The DSP settings for the Radio with sound quality for the drivers seat CD are: first, with the front passenger second. . normal ‐ Select this setting to . hk surround ‐ Select to enable 1. Press the TONE button. adjust the audio for stereo mode. This provides the best hk surround. This produces a 2. Select EQ. sound quality for the drivers seat true 6.1 matrix surround from any two channel digital source. 3. Select the setting. first, with the front passenger second. This feature is not available in Press the 0 BACK button to go AM/FM radio mode. . back to the Tone Settings menu. hk surround ‐ Select to enable hk surround. This produces a To adjust the DSP settings: true 6.1 matrix surround from 1. Press the TONE button. any two channel digital source. 2. Select DSP. This feature is not available in AM/FM radio mode. 3. Select the setting. Press the 0 BACK button to go back to the Tone Settings menu. Infotainment System 6-11

System Settings Auto Volume Maximum Startup Volume Configuring the Number of The auto volume feature The maximum volume played when Favorite Pages automatically adjusts the radio the Radio with CD is first turned on volume to compensate for road and can be set. wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down, so that the volume level is consistent. The level of volume compensation can be selected, or the auto volume feature can be turned off. To configure the number of available favorite pages: 1. Press the CONFIG button. 1. Press the CONFIG button. 2. Select Radio Settings. 2. Select Radio Settings. 3. Select Maximum Startup Volume. 3. Select Radio Favorites. 4. Select the setting. 4. Select the number of available 1. Press the CONFIG button. favorite pages. 5. Press the 0 BACK button 0 2. Select Radio Settings. to go back to the System 5. Press the BACK button Configuration menu. to go back to the System 3. Select Auto Volume. Configuration menu. 4. Select the setting. 5. Press the 0 BACK button to go back to the System Configuration menu. 6-12 Infotainment System

Radio RDS (Radio Data System) Selecting a Station The radio may have RDS. The RDS Seek Tuning (Radio with CD) AM-FM Radio feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS If the radio station is not known: Control Buttons information. This feature only works Briefly press g or l. To The buttons used to control the when the information from the radio automatically search for the next radio are: station is available. In rare cases, available station. If a station is not a radio station could broadcast found, the radio switches to a more RADIO / BAND: Press to turn the incorrect information that causes the radio on and choose between AM, sensitive search level. If a station radio features to work improperly. still is not found, the frequency that FM, and XM™, if equipped. If this happens, contact the radio was last active begins to play. Menu Knob: Turn to navigate the station. If the radio station is known: available menus. While the radio is tuned to an TUNE: Turn to search for stations. FM-RDS station, the station name Press and hold g or l until the or call letters display. station on the display is reached, INFO: Press to display additional then release the button. information that may be available for Radio Menus the current song. Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVD Radio menus are available for AM and MEM) g / l : Press to search for and FM. stations. Turn the menu knob to open the Briefly press g or l, to FAV: Press to open the favorites main radio menu for that band. automatically search for the next list and select the favorites page. available station. If a station is not Selecting a Band found, the radio switches to a more 1 to 6: Press to select preset sensitive search level. If a station stations. Press the RADIO/BAND button to choose AM, FM, or XM™, still is not found, the frequency that k (Play/Pause): Press to pause if equipped. The last station that was last active begins to play. time shifted content, if equipped. was playing starts playing again. Infotainment System 6-13

Manual Tuning Category Lists Updating Station & Category Lists Turn the TUNE knob to select the Most stations that broadcast an If stations stored in the station list frequency on the display. RDS program type code specify the can no longer be received. type of programming transmitted. 1. Turn the menu knob. Favorites List Some stations change the program 1. Turn the menu knob. type code depending on the 2. Select Update AM or FM Station List, if the stations stored in 2. Select Favorites List. content. The system stores the RDS stations sorted by program the station list are no longer 3. Select the station. type in the FM category list. received. A station search will be completed and the first station in Station Lists To search for a programming type the updated list will play. 1. Turn the menu knob. determined by station: To cancel the station search, press 2. Select AM or FM Station List. All 1. Turn the menu knob. the SELECT button. receivable stations in the current 2. Select FM category list. A list of reception area are displayed. If a all programming types available Storing a Station as a Favorite station list has not been created, displays. Stations from all bands can be an automatic station search 3. Select the programming type. stored in any order in the favorite is done. A list of stations that transmit pages. 3. Select the station. programming of the selected Up to six stations can be stored in type displays. each favorite page and the number 4. Select the station. of available favorite pages can be set. The category lists are updated when the station lists are updated. 6-14 Infotainment System

Storing Stations Press the k button to pause the When the radio station is To store the station to a position in radio. The radio displays the time changed, the buffer is cleared the list, press the corresponding shift status bar. The status bar and automatically restarted for button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard. shows the amount of content that is the current station. Content from a stored in the buffer and the current previously tuned station is no longer Retrieving Stations pause point. available. Press the FAV button to open a To resume playback from the The time shift feature is not favorite page or to switch to another current pause point, press available while recording or with favorite page. Briefly press one of other sources of playback. the k button again. The radio the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the station. is no longer live, but played from Pausing AM/FM with the Vehicle the time shift buffer. A status bar Turned Off Time Shifting (Radio with displays below the station number. If AM/FM is paused when the CD/DVD and MEM) Press and hold the l or vehicle is turned off, the radio The radio with MEM time shift g buttons to fast forward or continues to buffer the current radio feature can rewind 20 minutes of rewind through the time shift station for up to 20 minutes. If the vehicle is turned back on within FM/AM content. While listening to buffer. Hold l until the end of the radio, the content from the 20 minutes, the radio resumes the recorded buffer resumes live playback from the paused point. current station is always being playback. buffered. Press and release the l or g buttons to jump forward or back 30 seconds in the time shift buffer. Infotainment System 6-15

Satellite Radio Control Buttons XM Categories Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite The buttons used to control the XM XM channels are organized in Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite radio are: categories. Radio subscription can receive XM RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the Removing or Adding Categories programming. radio on and choose between AM, Channels in a category that have FM, and XM™, if equipped. XM Satellite Radio Service been removed can still be accessed g l XM is a satellite radio service / : Press to go to the by using the g or l buttons, previous or next channel. that is based in the 48 contiguous or the TUNE knob. United States and 10 Canadian FAV: Press to open the To add or remove categories: provinces. XM Satellite Radio has favorites list. 1. Press the CONFIG button. a wide variety of programming 1 to 6: Press to select a favorite. and commercial-free music, 2. Select Radio Settings. coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality TUNE: Turn to select channel. 3. Select XM Categories. sound. A service fee is required INFO: Press to display additional to receive the XM service. For information that may be available 4. Turn the Menu knob to highlight more information, contact XM about the current song. the category. at www.xmradio.com or call 5. Press the SELECT button to 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. k (Play/Pause): Press to pause remove or add the category. and www.xmradio.ca or call time shifted content, if equipped. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. Selecting the XM Band Selecting an XM Channel Press the RADIO/BAND button to XM channels can be selected by choose between the AM, FM and using g , l, the TUNE knob, XM bands. The last channel played or the menu system. in that band begins to play when that band is selected. 6-16 Infotainment System

Selecting a Channel Using To select a channel using the menu: Storing a Channel as a Favorite g or l (Radio with CD) 1. Turn the menu knob and select To store the channel to a position Channel List. in the list, press and hold the . Press and release g or l to 2. Select the desired channel. corresponding 1to 6 button until the go to the previous or next channel can be heard again. channel. Selecting a Channel Using the Retrieving Channels . Press and hold g or l to Menu System scroll through the previous or 1. Turn the menu knob. Press the FAV button to open a favorite page or to change to next channel until the channel is 2. Select XM Category List. reached. another favorite page. Briefly press 3. Select the category. one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve Selecting a Channel Using the channel. 4. Select the channel. g or l (Radio with CD/DVD Time Shifting (Radio with and MEM) Storing an XM Channel as a CD/DVD and MEM) Favorite Press and release g or l to go to The radio with MEM time shift the previous or next channel. Channels from all bands can be feature can rewind 20 minutes of stored in any order in the favorite XM content. While listening to the Selecting a Channel Using the pages. TUNE Knob radio, the content from the current Up to six channels can be stored in channel is always being buffered. To select an XM channel using the each favorite page and the number Press the k button to pause the TUNE knob: of available favorite pages can radio. The radio displays the time Turn the TUNE knob to highlight an be set. shift status bar. The status bar XM channel, the channel is selected shows the amount of content that is after a short delay. stored in the buffer and the current pause point. Infotainment System 6-17

To resume playback from the Pausing XM with the Vehicle Channel Unauth: This channel is current pause point, press the Turned Off blocked or cannot be received with k button again. The radio is no If XM is paused when the vehicle is your XM Subscription package. longer live, but played from the time turned off, the radio continues to Channel Unavailable: This shift buffer. A status bar displays buffer the current radio station for previously assigned channel is no below the channel number. up to 20 minutes. If the vehicle is longer assigned. Tune to another Press and hold the l or turned back on within 20 minutes, station. g buttons to fast forward or the radio resumes playback from the No Artist Info: The system is rewind through the time shift paused point. working properly. No artist buffer. Hold l until the end of XM Messages information is available at this the recorded buffer resumes live time on this channel. XL (Explicit Language playback. Channels): These channels, or any No Title Info: The system is Press and release the l or others, can be blocked by request, working properly. No song title information is available at this time g buttons to go to the next or by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). on this channel. previous song in the time shift XM Updating: The encryption code buffer. in the receiver is being updated, no No CAT Info: The system is working properly. No category When the channel is changed, the action is required. This process information is available at this time buffer is cleared and automatically should take no longer than on this channel. restarted for the current channel. 30 seconds. Content from a previously tuned Loading XM: The audio system is No Information: The system is station is no longer available. acquiring and processing audio and working properly. No text or informational messages are The time shift feature is not text data, no action is needed. This available at this time on this available while recording or with message should disappear shortly. channel. other sources of playback. Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to another channel. 6-18 Infotainment System

No XM Signal: The system is Check Antenna: If this message FM working properly. The vehicle may does not clear within a short period FM signals only reach about be in a location that where the XM of time, the receiver could have a 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles). signal is being blocked. When the fault. Consult with your dealer/ Although the radio has a built-in vehicle is moved into an open area, retailer. electronic circuit that automatically the signal should return. XM Not Available: If this message works to reduce interference, some CAT Not Found: The system is does not clear within a short period static can occur, especially around working properly. There are no of time, the receiver could have a tall buildings or hills, causing the channels available for the selected fault. Consult with your dealer/ sound to fade in and out. category. retailer. AM XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the Radio Reception The range for most AM stations is XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This Frequency interference and static greater than for FM, especially at label is needed to activate the can occur during normal radio night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere service. reception if items such as cell phone with each other. For better radio Unknown: If this message is chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external electronic reception, most AM radio stations received when tuned to channel 0, boost the power levels during the devices are plugged into the there could be a receiver fault. day, and then reduce these levels Consult with your dealer/retailer. accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the during the night. Static can also item from the accessory power occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio outlet. reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio. Infotainment System 6-19

XM™ Satellite Radio Service Backglass Antenna Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside XM Satellite Radio Service gives The AM-FM antenna is integrated rear window can damage the rear digital radio reception from with the rear window defogger, window antenna and/or the rear coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous located in the rear window. Make window defogger. Repairs would United States, and in Canada. Just sure that the inside surface of the not be covered by the vehicle as with FM, tall buildings or hills can rear window is not scratched and warranty. Do not clear the inside interfere with satellite radio signals, that the lines on the glass are not rear window with sharp objects. causing the sound to fade in and damaged. If the inside surface is out. In addition, traveling or standing damaged, it could interfere with Notice: Do not apply aftermarket under heavy foliage, bridges, radio reception. For proper radio glass tinting with metallic film. garages, or tunnels may cause loss reception, the antenna connector The metallic film in some tinting of the XM signal for a period of time. needs to be properly attached to the materials will interfere with or post on the glass. distort the incoming radio Cellular Phone Usage reception. Any damage caused to If a cellular telephone antenna Cellular phone usage may cause your backglass antenna due to needs to be attached to the glass, interference with the vehicle's radio. metallic tinting materials will not make sure that the grid lines for the This interference may occur when be covered by the vehicle AM-FM antenna are not damaged. making or receiving phone calls, warranty. There is enough space between charging the phone's battery, the grid lines to attach a cellular or simply having the phone on. This Satellite Radio Antenna telephone antenna without interference can cause an increased interfering with radio reception. For vehicles with XM™ satellite level of static while listening to the radio service, the antenna is located radio. If static is received while on the roof of the vehicle. Keep the listening to the radio, unplug the antenna clear of obstructions for cellular phone and turn it off. clear radio reception. 6-20 Infotainment System

Audio Players If the bottom surface of a disc is While using the CD player, use dirty, take a soft lint free cloth, only CDs in good condition or dampen a clean soft cloth in a without any label, load one CD at CD Player mild neutral detergent solution a time, and keep the CD player The CD player can play audio CDs mixed with water, and clean it. and the loading slot free of and MP3 CDs. Wipe the disc from the center to foreign materials, liquids, and the outer edge. debris. The CD player will not play 8 cm (3 in.) CDs. Care of the CD Player Control Buttons Care of CDs Do not add a label to a disc, as The buttons used to control the CD it could get caught in the CD player are: Sound quality can be reduced due player. If a label is needed, label CD / AUX: Press to use the CD to disc quality, recording method, the top of the recorded disc with player. quality of the music recorded, and a marking pen. how the disc has been handled. l / g : Press to select tracks or Do not use disc lens cleaners Handle discs carefully and store to fast forward or rewind within a because they could contaminate the them in their original cases or other track. protective cases away from direct lens of the disc optics and damage sunlight and dust. If the bottom the CD player. INFO: Press to display additional information about the current track surface of a disc is damaged, the Notice: If a label is added to a that may be available. disc may not play properly or at all. CD, or more than one CD is Do not touch the bottom surface of inserted into the slot at a time, TUNE: Turn to select tracks. a disc while handling it; this could or an attempt is made to play damage the surface. Pick up discs Menu Knob: Turn to enter scratched or damaged CDs, the the menu. by grasping the outer edges or the CD player could be damaged. edge of the hole and the outer edge. Infotainment System 6-21

SELECT: Press to select an item. Information about the disc and Fast Forward and Rewind Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc. current track is shown on the l g display depending on the data Press and hold or to fast Inserting a CD stored. forward or rewind within the current track. With the printed side facing up, Selecting a CD Track insert a disc into the CD slot until it Selecting an MP3 Track Using the control buttons: is drawn in. Using the control buttons: . Press the g or l button to Removing a CD . g l select the previous or next track. Press the or button to select the previous or next track. Press the Z button. . Turn the TUNE knob. . Turn the TUNE knob. The disc is pushed out of the Using the CD Menu: CD slot. Using the CD Menu: 1. Turn the menu knob. If the disc is not removed after it is 1. Turn the menu knob. 2. Select Tracks list. ejected, it is pulled back in after a 2. Select Playlists / Folders. few seconds. 3. Select the track. 3. Select the playlist or folder. Playing a CD or MP3 CD Playing Tracks in Random Order 4. Select the track. Press the CD/AUX button if there is Turn the menu knob and then set a disc in the player, it begins Shuffle Songs to On. playing. 6-22 Infotainment System

Searching for MP3 Tracks CD/DVD Player mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe The search feature may take some the disc from the center to the The CD/DVD player can play outer edge. time to display the information after CDs, DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs, reading the disc due to the amount MP3/WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs. Care of the CD/DVD Player of information stored on the disc. FM automatically plays while the The CD/DVD player will not play Do not add a label to a disc, as it disc is being read. 8 cm (3 in.) discs. could get caught in the CD/DVD player. If a label is needed, label the Tracks can be searched by: Care of CDs and DVDs top of the recorded disc with a . Playlists Sound quality can be reduced due marking pen. to disc quality, recording method, . Artists Do not use disc lens cleaners quality of the music recorded, and because they could contaminate the . Albums how the disc has been handled. lens of the disc optics and damage Handle discs carefully and store . Song Titles the CD/DVD player. them in their original cases or other . Genres protective cases away from direct Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one CD is . Folder View sunlight and dust. If the bottom surface of a disc is damaged, the inserted into the slot at a time, To search for tracks: disc may not play properly or at all. or an attempt is made to play 1. Turn the menu knob. Do not touch the bottom surface of scratched or damaged CDs, the a disc while handling it; this could CD player could be damaged. 2. Select Search. damage the surface. Pick up discs While using the CD player, use 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, by grasping the outer edges or the only CDs in good condition Albums, Song Titles, Genres, edge of the hole and the outer edge. without any label, load one CD at or Folder View. a time, and keep the CD player If the bottom surface of a disc is and the loading slot free of 4. Select the track. dirty, take a soft lint free cloth, foreign materials, liquids, and or dampen a clean soft cloth in a debris. mild neutral detergent solution Infotainment System 6-23

Control Buttons Inserting a CD or DVD Selecting CD or DVD‐A Tracks The buttons used to control the With the printed side facing up, Using the control buttons: CD/DVD player are: insert a disc into the slot until it is . g l drawn in. Press the or button to MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choose select the previous or next track. between the MEM, CD/DVD, Removing a CD or DVD . and AUX. Turn the TUNE knob. Press the Z button. l / g : Press to select tracks or Using the menu: to fast forward or rewind within a The disc is pushed out of the 1. Turn the menu knob. track. CD/DVD slot. 2. Select Tracks List. INFO: Press to display additional If the disc is not removed after it is 3. Select the track. information about the disc that may ejected, it is pulled back in after a be available. few seconds. Pausing a CD or DVD‐A Track TUNE: Turn to select tracks. Playing a CD or DVD‐A Disc Press the k button to pause a CD Menu Knob: Turn to enter Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button or DVD‐A track. Press the k button the menu. if there is a disc in the player, it again to continue playing the track. SELECT: Press to select an item. begins playing. Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks in Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc. Information about the disc and Random Order k current track is shown on the : Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A, display depending on the data Turn the menu knob and then set or DVD‐V, press again to resume stored. Shuffle Songs to On. playback. Press and hold to stop a Fast Forward and Rewind DVD‐V disc. Press and hold l or g to fast forward or rewind within the current track. 6-24 Infotainment System

Playing an MP3 CD or DVD Searching for MP3s on a CD To search for tracks: or DVD Files that are not stored in 1. Turn the menu knob. folders are displayed in the root It is normal for the search feature 2. Select Search. directory (disc). to take some time to display the information after reading the disc 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, The search rate increases if the due to the amount of information Song Titles, or Genres. menu knob is continuously turned stored on the disc. The infotainment while searching in a list. 4. Select the track. The search rate system automatically switches to increases if the menu knob is Selecting an MP3 Track FM while the disc is being read. continuously turned while Using the control buttons: Files that do not have any meta searching in a list. data stored in the ID3 tag display Playing MP3 Tracks in Random . Press g or l to select the as Unknown. previous or next track. Order Tracks can be searched for by: Turn the menu knob and then set . Turn the TUNE knob. . Playlists Shuffle Songs to On. Using the CD or DVD Menu: . Artists Recording an Audio or MP3 1. Turn the menu knob. . Albums CD to MEM 2. Select Folder List. . Song Titles See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on 3. Select the folder. page 6‑25 for more information. . Genres 4. Select the track. The number of objects in each Playing a DVD‐V category is shown in parentheses See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) after the category. System on page 6‑34 for information about how to control a Video DVD using the wireless remote control. Infotainment System 6-25

Selecting a Chapter Pausing a DVD . DVD/AUX Using the control buttons: 1. Turn the menu knob. . AUX/DVD . AUX/AUX . Press g or l to select the 2. Select Pause, to pause the previous or next chapter. disc. Select unpause to start To navigate the menu: playback. . Turn the TUNE knob. 1. Turn the menu knob. Navigating the DVD V Disc Menu Using DVD Menu: ‐ 2. Select the action. Use the following actions to 1. Turn the menu knob. navigate the title menu on a Mass Storage 2. Select Chapter List. DVD‐V Disc. Media (MEM) 3. Select the chapter. . Select / Enter Infotainment systems with MEM Selecting a Title . Cursor UP storage are able to record up to 1. Turn the menu knob. . Cursor DOWN 1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music from Audio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs, 2. Select Title List. . Cursor RIGHT and USB storage devices. The MEM 3. Select the title. . Cursor LEFT player can also time shift audio from AM, FM, and XM™ radio. Changing the Audio Stream . Up Menu Music or content that is stored in Use the following actions to 1. Turn the menu knob. MEM that you did not create, navigate the menu on a DVD V ‐ or have the right to distribute, must 2. Select Audio Stream. Disc while playing chapters. be deleted before the sale or end of 3. Select Change Audio Stream. . Pause (Play) the lease of the vehicle. 4. Press SELECT to change the . Chapter List selection. . Title List Select Cancel to exit the menu. . DVD/DVD 6-26 Infotainment System

Control Buttons Recording From Audio CDs Re-recording a Previously Recorded Disc The buttons used to control the The infotainment system can record MEM player are: the current song playing or all songs If the disc or track has already been recorded to MEM, the message MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to select from an audio CD to MEM. A status The Song(s) is Already Recorded the MEM player. bar appears on the top of the display when the recording process displays. l / g : Press to select tracks or starts and disappears when the Stopping the Recording to fast forward or rewind within a process has ended. Copy protected track. CDs cannot be recorded to MEM. Press the O REC button while INFO: Press to display additional Recording to MEM recording from an audio CD to information about the MEM track display the stop recording option. that may be available. Press O REC, then select Record Select Stop Recording Song to MEM. k /TUNE : Press to pause the Current Song or Record All Songs track currently playing, press again on Disc. If the track has started Renaming Recorded Discs playing, the system will restart the to resume playback. Turn to select Discs that have been recorded to tracks. track and begin recording from the beginning of the track. When the MEM can be renamed. O REC: Press to record music song recording is completed, the 1. Turn the menu knob. from a CD or USB drive. message Song Recorded to MEM 2. Select Rename Recorded Discs. DEL: Press to delete the current displays, and there may be a slight track from MEM. pause. 3. Select the disc. FAV (Favorites): Press to display Songs recorded to MEM are stored 4. Select Album or Artist to rename MEM favorites. as the current date, disc and track either one. number. 1 to 6: Press to select a track or 5. Use the menu knob to enter playlist stored in that numeric the character sequence. See position. Operation on page 6‑7 for more information. Infotainment System 6-27

Recording From MP3/WMA Re-recording a Previously Playing From MEM Discs or USB Storage Devices Recorded Disc Playing Back a Previously USB Host Support If the disc or track has already been Recorded CD recorded to MEM, the message The USB connector uses the USB The Song(s) is Already Recorded Turn the TUNE knob to select a standards, 1.1 and 2.0. displays. track if MEM is already playing from the previously recorded disc. USB Supported Devices Stopping the Recording 1. Select Recorded Disc List. . USB Flash Drives Press the O REC button while 2. Select the disc. . Portable USB Hard Drives recording from an MP3/WMA CD or USB storage device to display the 3. Select the track. Recording to MEM stop recording option. Select Stop Searching For a Track Press O REC, then select Record Recording Song to MEM. Tracks can be searched for by: Current Song or Record Current Deleting Tracks From MEM Folder. . Playlists Individual tracks and all tracks can The information stored by MEM is . Artists be deleted from MEM. titled according to the ID3 tag . Albums associated with it. To delete individual tracks, press and release the DEL button while . Song Titles the track is playing. . Genres To delete all tracks from MEM, The number of objects in each press and hold the DEL button while category is shown in parentheses a track is playing. after the category. 6-28 Infotainment System

To search for tracks: To remove MEM favorites Album: Saves the album 1. Turn the menu knob. categories: associated with the currently playing 1. Press the CONFIG button. track in the indicated favorites 2. Select Search. position. 2. Select Radio Settings. 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, Genre: Saves the genre associated Song Titles, or Genres. 3. Select MEM Favorites. with the currently playing track in 4. Select the track. The search rate 4. Remove the check mark from the indicated favorites position. increases if the menu knob is the box to remove that MEM Creating Playlists continuously turned while favorites category. searching in a list. To create a playlist using tracks Replace the check mark to re-add stored in MEM: Shuffle Songs the removed category. 1. Select Playlist from the MEM Select the Shuffle Songs option Saving MEM Tracks as favorites. from the MEM menu to randomly Favorites play back tracks stored in MEM. 2. Select the track to be stored in Favorites can be saved by the playlist. Configuring MEM Favorites pressing and holding one of 3. Press and hold one of the the 1 to 6 buttons. Favorites During MEM playback, press the 1 to 6 buttons until the track can can be stored according to the FAV button to change between be heard again to store the following list: favorite categories. The favorite track. categories are: Playlist: Adds currently playing 4. Repeat steps 1 though 3 to store track to the playlist selected. . Playlists additional tracks in the playlist. Artist: Saves the artist associated . Artists with the currently playing track in . Albums the indicated favorites position. . Genres Infotainment System 6-29

Auxiliary Devices 3.5 mm Jack Not all iPod's, PFD's, USB Drives, and Zune's are compatible with the Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to (Radio with CD) infotainment system. the auxiliary input jack to use a The optional AUX input allows portable audio player. portable devices to connect to the Connecting and Controlling vehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Playback of an audio device that is an iPod™ input jack or the USB port. connected to the 3.5 mm jack can Not all iPod's can be controlled by only be controlled using the controls Portable devices are controlled by the infotainment system. on the device. using the menu system described in Connecting an iPod Operation on page 6‑7. Adjusting the Volume Connect the iPod to the USB port. Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the Searching For a Track volume of the infotainment system after the volume level has been set Tracks can be searched for by: on the portable audio device. . Playlists USB Port . Artists For vehicles with a USB port, the . Albums following devices may be connected . Song Titles and controlled by the infotainment system. . Podcasts . iPod's . Genres . PlaysForSure Devices (PFD) . Audiobooks The AUX input is located in the center console. . USB Drives . Composers . Zune's 6-30 Infotainment System

To search for tracks: On: Repeats the current track. To search for tracks: 1. Turn the menu knob. Off: Playback starts from the 1. Turn the menu knob. 2. Select Search. beginning of the current track after 2. Select Search. the last track finishes. 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres, Connecting and Controlling a Song Titles, Podcasts, Audiobooks, or Composers. PlaysForSure Device (PFD) or Genres. 4. Select the track. or Zune™ 4. Select the track. Shuffle Connecting a PFD or Zune Shuffle Functionality Turn the menu knob and set Shuffle Connect the PFD or Zune to the Turn the menu knob and set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On or Off, then USB port. Songs (Random) to On or Off. press the 0 BACK button to return Searching For a Track On: Plays current tracks in random the main screen. Tracks can be searched for by: order. On: Plays tracks in the current . Playlists Off: Plays current tracks in folder in random order. sequential order. . Artists Off: Plays tracks in the current Repeat Functionality folder in sequential order. . Albums Turn the menu knob and set Repeat . Song Titles Repeat to On or Off. . Podcasts Turn the menu knob and set Repeat On: Repeats the current Repeat to On or Off, then press . Genres track. 0 the BACK button to return the Repeat Off: Playback starts from main screen. the beginning of the current track after the last track finishes. Infotainment System 6-31

Connecting and Controlling a Files that do not have any meta Shuffle Functionality USB Drive data stored in the ID3 tag display as Turn the menu knob and set Shuffle Unknown. The infotainment system can only Songs (Random) to On or Off. play back .mp3 and .wma files from Tracks can be searched for by: On: Plays current tracks in random a USB drive. . Playlists* order. Only the first 2,500 songs are . Artists Off: Plays current tracks in recognized on the device. sequential order. . Albums When a device is not supported, the . Song Titles Repeat Functionality message “No supported data found. You can safely disconnect the . Genres Turn the menu knob and set Repeat device appears. to On or Off. ” . Folder View Connecting a USB Drive Repeat On: Repeats the current *This only displays if a playlist is track. Connect the USB drive to the found on the device. USB port. Repeat Off: Playback starts from To search for tracks: the beginning of the current track Searching For a Track 1. Turn the menu knob. after the last track finishes. It is normal for the search feature 2. Select Search. to take some time to display the information after reading the device 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, due to the amount of information Albums, Song Titles, Genres, stored. or Folder View. 4. Select the track. 6-32 Infotainment System

Auxiliary Devices (Radio 3.5 mm Jack Connecting and Controlling with CD/DVD and MEM) Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in.) cable to an iPod™ the auxiliary input jack to use a The optional AUX input allows Not all iPod's can be controlled by portable audio player. portable devices to be connected the infotainment system. using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in.) input jack Playback of an audio device that is Connecting an iPod or the USB port. connected to the 3.5 mm jack can only be controlled using the controls Connect the iPod to the USB port. Portable devices are controlled by on the device. using the menu system described in Selecting a Track Operation on page 6‑7. Adjusting the Volume Using the control buttons:

Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the . Press g SEEK or l SEEK to volume of the infotainment system select the previous or next track. after the volume level has been set . Turn the TUNE knob to select a on the portable audio device. track in the current sub menu. USB Port The track will start to play. The following devices may be Playing Tracks in Random Order connected to the USB port and Turn the menu knob and set Shuffle controlled by the infotainment Songs to On or Off. system. Shuffle On: Plays current tracks in . iPod's random order. . USB Mass Storage Devices The AUX input is located in the Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks in center console. Not all iPod's or USB Mass Storage sequential order. Devices are compatible with the infotainment system. Infotainment System 6-33

Searching For a Track Connecting and Controlling a Selecting a Track Tracks can be searched for by: USB Drive Using the control buttons:

. Files that are not stored in Playlists . Press g or l to select the folders are displayed in the root . previous or next track. Artists directory (USB). . Albums . Turn the TUNE knob to select a Connecting a USB Drive track in the current sub menu. . Song Titles Connect the USB drive to the The track will start to play. . Genres USB port. Selecting a track in a different . Composers Disconnecting a USB Drive folder: . Audiobooks A USB drive should be ejected from 1. Turn the menu knob. The number of objects in each the USB port before disconnecting 2. Select Folder List. it. To eject a USB drive: category is shown in parentheses 3. Select the folder. after the category. 1. Turn the menu knob. 4. Select the track. To search for tracks: 2. Select USB Eject. Searching for Tracks 1. Turn the menu knob. Playing Tracks in Random Order 2. Select Search. It is normal for the search feature Turn the menu knob and then set to take some time to display the 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, Shuffle Songs to On. information after reading the device Song Titles, Genres, due to the amount of information Composers, or Audiobooks. stored. 4. Select the track. The search rate Files that do not have any meta increases if the menu knob is data stored in the ID3 tag display as continuously turned while Unknown. searching in a list. 6-34 Infotainment System

Tracks can be searched by: Rear Seat In severe or extreme weather conditions, the RSE system may not . Playlists Infotainment work until the temperature is within . Artists the operating range. The operating . Albums Rear Seat Entertainment range is above −20°C (−4°F) and below 60°C (140°F). If the . Song Titles (RSE) System temperature is outside of this range, . Genres The vehicle may have a DVD Rear heat or cool the vehicle until it is Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. within the operating range. The number of objects in each The RSE system works with the category is shown in parentheses vehicle's infotainment system. The Global Off after the category. DVD player is part of the front radio. Depending on the infotainment To search for tracks: The RSE system includes a radio system, the RSE system may have 1. Turn the menu knob. with a DVD player, two rear seat a Global Off feature. The Global Off video display screens, audio/video feature disables all RSE system 2. Select Search. jacks, two wireless headphones, features. Press and hold the radio 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, and a remote control. See CD/DVD power button for more than Song Titles, or Genres. Player on page 6‑22 or the three seconds for Global Off to separate navigation system manual disable the RSE features. On some 4. Select the track. The search rate for more information on the vehicle's infotainment systems, the Global increases if the menu knob is DVD system. Off feature can be turned off by continuously turned while performing one of the following: searching in a list. Before Driving . Press and hold the radio power Recording Tracks to MEM The RSE is for rear seat button for more than passengers only. The driver cannot three seconds. See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on safely view the video screen while page 6‑25 for more information. driving. . Insert or eject any disc. . Insert a DVD video disc. Infotainment System 6-35

. Press the Remote Control power Push the On/Off button to turn on For best audio performance, the button. the headphones. A light on the headphones must be worn correctly, . Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button headphones comes on. If the light with the headband over the top of or the k button when a DVD does not come on, check the the head. L (Left) and R (Right) batteries. Intermittent sound or static are above the ear pads and video disc is in the player. can also indicate weak batteries. are indicators as to how the . Press the SRC button on the See “Battery Replacement” later in headphones should be placed on steering wheel when a DVD this section for more information. the head. video disc is in the player. Infrared transmitters are on the top Notice: Do not store the . Cycle the ignition. of the left seatback video screen. headphones in heat or direct The headphones shut off sunlight. This could damage the Headphones automatically to save the battery headphones and repairs will not RSE includes two 2-channel power if the RSE system is shut off be covered by the warranty. wireless headphones. Channel 1 is or if the headphones are out of Storage in extreme cold can dedicated to the DVD player, and range of the transmitters for more weaken the batteries. Keep the Channel 2 is dedicated to any than three minutes. Moving too far headphones stored in a cool, dry external auxiliary device connected forward or stepping out of the place. to the A/V jacks. The headphones vehicle, can cause the headphones If the foam ear pads become worn are used to listen to various to lose the signal or have static. or damaged, they can be replaced multi‐media. The wireless The headphones may automatically separately from the headphones. headphones have an On/Off button, turn off after four hours of See your dealer/retailer for more channel 1/2 switch, and a volume continuous use. information. control. Turn the headphones off when not in use. To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the volume control. 6-36 Infotainment System

Battery Replacement Power for auxiliary devices is not 3. Press the AUX button a third To change the batteries: supplied by the radio system. time to change the left video screen source to the auxiliary 1. Loosen the screw to the battery To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system: device and the right video door located on the left side of screen to the DVD player. the headphones. 1. Connect the auxiliary device cables to the A/V jacks. 4. Press the AUX button a fourth 2. Slide the battery door open. time to change the source of 3. Replace the two AAA batteries. 2. Power on both the auxiliary both video screens to the DVD device and the RSE video player. 4. Replace the battery door and screen. tighten the screw. How to Change the RSE Video Changing the Source on the Video Screen Settings Remove the batteries if the Display Screens headphones are not going to be The screen display mode, used for a long period of time. The image from the auxiliary device brightness, and language can be can be switched between the video changed from the setup menu using Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks display screens. the remote control. To change a If available, the A/V jacks are To change the display: setting: located on the rear of the floor 1. Press the AUX button on the 1. Press z. console. They allow audio or video remote control to change the cables to be connected from an n q p o r source of both video screens 2. Use , , , and to auxiliary device such as a from the DVD player to the select the settings. camcorder or a video game system. auxiliary device. 3. Press z again to exit the The A/V jacks are color coded: 2. Press the AUX button a second setup menu. . Yellow for video input. time to change the left video . White for left audio input. screen source to the DVD player and the right video screen to the . Red for right audio input. auxiliary device. Infotainment System 6-37

Audio Output Video Screens Only the left RSE seatback console contains the infrared transmitters for Audio from the DVD player or The video screens are located in the wireless headphones, they may auxiliary inputs can be heard the back of the driver and front be visible as eight illuminated LEDs. through the following: passenger seats. These LEDs are not on the right . Wireless Headphones video screen. Both seatback . Vehicle Speakers consoles contain an infrared receiver for the remote control. The RSE system transmits the They are located at the top of each audio signal to the wireless console. headphones if an audio signal is Notice: Avoid directly touching available. See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more information. the video screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video The front seat passengers are Screen” later in this section for able to listen to playback from more information. the A/V jacks through the vehicle speakers by selecting Rear A/V as Video Screen Input Jack the source on the radio. To use the video screen: Each video screen is equipped with a video input jack to allow 1. Push the release button located video cables to be connected from on the seatback console. an auxiliary device such as a 2. Move the screen to the desired camcorder or a video game system. viewing position. This signal will override any video provided by the RSE system; either Push the video screen down into its the DVD or Auxiliary A/V jack locked position when it is not in use, source. The RSE system must be the screen turns off automatically. on for this input to operate. 6-38 Infotainment System

Remote Control Notice: Storing the remote n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation control in a hot area or in direct To use the remote control, aim it at Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to sunlight can damage it, and the the transmitter window at either navigate through a menu. repairs will not be covered by the seatback console and press the r warranty. Storage in extreme cold (Enter): Press to select the button. Direct sunlight or very bright can weaken the batteries. Keep highlighted choice in any menu. light could affect the ability of the the remote control stored in a z RSE transmitter to receive signals (Display Menu): Press to cool, dry place. from the remote control. Check adjust the brightness, screen display mode, and display the the batteries if the remote control Remote Control Buttons does not seem to be working. See language menu. O (Power): Press to turn the Battery Replacement later in this q (Return): Press to exit the “ ” video screens on and off. section. Objects blocking the line of current active menu and return to sight could also affect the function P (Illumination): Press to turn the the previous menu. This button of the remote control. remote control backlight on. The operates only when the display backlight times out after several If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in the menu or a DVD menu is active. seconds if no other button is Radio DVD slot, the remote control c (Stop): Press to stop playing, pressed. O button can be used to turn on the rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. video screen display and start the v (Title): Press to return to the Press twice to return to the disc. The infotainment system can main menu of the DVD. This beginning of the DVD. function could vary for each disc. also turn on the video screen s (Play/Pause): Press to start display. See CD/DVD Player on y (Main Menu): Press to access playing a DVD. Press to pause a page 6‑22 or the separate the DVD menu. The DVD menu is DVD while it is playing. Press again navigation system manual for more different on every DVD. Use the to continue playing. information. navigation arrows to move the cursor. After making a selection press the enter button. This button only operates when using a DVD. Infotainment System 6-39

Depending on the infotainment r (Fast Reverse): Press to AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch system in the vehicle, DVD quickly reverse the DVD or CD. the video display between the DVD playback may be slowed down by To stop fast reversing a DVD video, player and an auxiliary source. pressing s then [. Reverse slow press s. To stop fast reversing a d (Camera): Press to change the play by pressing s then r. Press DVD audio or CD, release r. This camera angle on DVDs that have s again to cancel slow play. button might not work when the this feature when the DVD is playing. t (Previous Track/Chapter): DVD is playing the copyright Press to go to the start of the information or the previews. \ (Clear) (If Available): Press this current track or chapter. Press [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast button within three seconds after again to go to the previous track or forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast inputting a numeric selection, to clear all numeric inputs. chapter. This button may not work forwarding a DVD video, press s. when the DVD is playing the To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio } 10 (Double Digit Entries) copyright information or the (If Available): Press this button to or CD, release [. This button might previews. select chapter or track numbers not work when the DVD is playing u (Next Track/Chapter): Press greater than 9. Press this button the copyright information or the before inputting the number. to go to the beginning of the next previews. chapter or track. This button might e 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): not work when the DVD is playing (Audio): Press to change audio The numbered keypad provides the the copyright information or the tracks on DVDs that have this capability of direct chapter or track previews. feature when the DVD is playing. number selection. { (Subtitles): Press to turn ON/OFF subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing. 6-40 Infotainment System

Replacing the Remote Control Tips and Troubleshooting Chart If the remote control becomes lost Problem Recommended Action or damaged, a new universal remote control can be purchased. No power. The ignition might not be turned to Use a Toshiba® code set for ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY. replacement universal remote The picture does not fill the screen. Check the display mode settings in controls. There are black borders on the top the setup menu by pressing the Battery Replacement and bottom or on both sides or it display menu button on the remote looks stretched out. control. To change the remote control batteries: In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input or scrolls. connections at both devices. 1. Slide back the rear cover on the remote control. The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote 2. Replace the two batteries in the control and the transmitter window. compartment. Check the batteries to make sure 3. Replace the battery cover. they are not dead or installed incorrectly. Remove the batteries from the remote control if unused for an After stopping the player, I push If the stop button was pressed extended period of time. Play but sometimes the DVD starts one time, the DVD player resumes where I left off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD was beginning. stopped. If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD. Infotainment System 6-41

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd) DVD Display Error Messages Problem Recommended Action The DVD display error message depends on which radio the vehicle The auxiliary source is running but Check that the RSE video screen has. The video screen may display there is no picture or sound. is in the auxiliary source mode by one of the following: pressing the AUX button on the remote control. Disc Load/Eject Error or Check the auxiliary input Mechanical Error: There are disc connections at both devices. load or eject problems. Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, low Disc Format Error or Unknown audio cuts out or buzzes. batteries, reception range, and Format: The disc is inserted with interference from cellular telephone the disc label wrong side up, or if towers or by using a cellular the disc is damaged. telephone in the vehicle. Disc Region Error or Disc Error: Check that the headphones are The disc is not from a correct on correctly using the L (left) and region. R (right) on the headphones. Check that the headphones are No Disc Inserted: No disc is positioned properly with the present when the Z EJECT or headband across the top of MEM/DVD/AUX button is pressed the head. on the radio. I lost the remote and/or the See your dealer/retailer for headphones. assistance. The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen picture or sound. is sourced to the DVD player by pressing the AUX button on the remote control. 6-42 Infotainment System

DVD Distortion Phone Steering Wheel Controls Video distortion can occur when b / g (Push To Talk): Press to operating cellular phones, scanners, Bluetooth (Overview) answer incoming calls, to confirm CB radios, Global Position Systems system information, and to start (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, Vehicles with a Bluetooth system voice recognition. or walkie talkies. can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to $ / c (Mute/End Call): Press to It might be necessary to turn off the make and receive phone calls. The end a call, reject a call, or to cancel DVD player when operating one of infotainment system and voice an operation. these devices in or near the vehicle. recognition are used to control the Infotainment System Controls *Excludes the OnStar® System. system. The system can be used while the ignition is in ON/RUN or For information about how to Cleaning the RSE Seatback ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of navigate the menu system using the Console the Bluetooth system can be up to infotainment controls, see Operation 9.1 m (30 ft.). Not all phones support on page 6‑7. Use only a clean cloth dampened 5 with clean water to clean the RSE all functions and not all phones work (Phone): Press to enter the seatback console surface. with the Bluetooth system. See Phone main menu. www.gm.com/bluetooth for more Cleaning the Video Screen information about compatible Voice Recognition phones. Use only a clean cloth dampened The voice recognition system uses with clean water. Use care when Bluetooth Controls commands to control the system touching or cleaning the screen as and dial phone numbers. Use the buttons located on the damage could result. Noise: The system may not infotainment system and the recognize voice commands if there steering wheel to operate the is too much background noise. Bluetooth system. Infotainment System 6-43

When to Speak: A tone sounds to Bluetooth (Infotainment Pairing Information: indicate that the system is ready for Controls) . Up to five cell phones can be a voice command. Wait for the tone paired to the Bluetooth system. and then speak. For information about how to navigate the menu system using the . The pairing process is disabled How to Speak: Speak clearly in a when the vehicle is moving. calm and natural voice. infotainment controls, see Operation on page 6‑7. . The Bluetooth system links with Audio System Pairing the first available paired cell When using the Bluetooth system, phone in the order the phone sound comes through the vehicle's A Bluetooth enabled cell phone was paired. must be paired to the Bluetooth front audio system speakers and . system first and then connected to Only one paired cell phone can overrides the audio system. Use be connected to the Bluetooth O the vehicle before it can be used. the VOL/ knob during a call to See the cell phone manufacturer system at a time. change the volume level. The user guide for Bluetooth functions . Pairing should only need to be adjusted volume level remains in before pairing the cell phone. If a completed once, unless changes memory for later calls. The system Bluetooth phone is not connected, to the pairing information have maintains a minimum volume level. calls will be made using OnStar® been made or the phone is Other Information Hands‐Free Calling, if available. deleted. Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guide ® To link to a different paired phone, The Bluetooth word mark and for more information. logos are owned by the Bluetooth® see “Linking to a Different Phone” SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks The pairing process can be started later in this section. by using the voice recognition by General Motors is under license. Pairing a Phone Other trademarks and trade names system or the controls on the are those of their respective owners. infotainment system. 1. Press the CONFIG button. See Radio Frequency Statement on 2. Select Phone Settings. page 12‑17 for FCC information. 3. Select Bluetooth. 6-44 Infotainment System

4. Select Pair Device (Phone). Listing All Paired and Connected 3. Select Bluetooth. A four digit PIN number appears Phones 4. Select Device List. on the display. 1. Press the CONFIG button. 5. Select the new phone to link to 5. Start the pairing process on the 2. Select Phone Settings. and follow the on screen cell phone that will be paired to prompts. the vehicle. Reference the cell 3. Select Bluetooth. phone manufacturers user guide 4. Select Device List. If delete is selected, the for information on this process. highlighted phone will be Deleting a Paired Phone deleted. Locate the device named “General Motors” in the list on 1. Press the CONFIG button. Making a Call the cell phone and follow the 2. Select Phone Settings. instructions on the cell phone to Radio with CD 3. Select Bluetooth. enter the four digit PIN number 1. Press the 5 button twice. provided by the system. 4. Select Device List. 2. Enter the character sequence. 6. The system prompts for a name 5. Select the phone to delete and See “Entering a Character for the phone and confirms the follow the on screen prompts. Sequence” in Operation on name provided. This name is page 6‑7 for more information. used to indicate which phone is Linking to a Different Phone connected. To link to a different phone, the new 3. Select Call to start dialing the number. 7. The system responds with phone must be in the vehicle and “ has been available to be connected to the successfully paired” after the bluetooth system before the process pairing process is complete. is started. 8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pair 1. Press the CONFIG button. additional phones. 2. Select Phone Settings. Infotainment System 6-45

Radio with CD/DVD and MEM Call Waiting Conference Calling 1. Press the 5 button. Call waiting must be supported on Conference calling and three way the bluetooth phone and enabled by calling must be supported on the 2. Select Enter number. the wireless service carrier to work. bluetooth phone and enabled by the 3. Enter the character sequence. wireless service carrier to work. Accepting a Call See “Entering a Character To start a conference while in a Sequence” in Operation on Turn the menu knob to Answer and current call: page 6‑7 for more information. press the SELECT button. 1. Turn the menu knob. 4. Select Call to start dialing the Declining a Call number. 2. Select Enter Number. Turn the menu knob to Decline and Accepting or Declining a Call press the SELECT button. 3. Enter the character sequence then select call. See “Entering When a call is received, the Switching Between Calls a Character Sequence” in infotainment system mutes and a (Call Waiting Calls Only) Operation on page 6‑7 for ring tone is heard in the vehicle. To switch between calls: more information. Accepting a Call 1. Turn the menu knob. 4. After the call has been placed, Turn the menu knob to Answer and turn the menu knob button and 2. Select Switch Call from choose Merge Calls. press the SELECT button. the menu. 5. To add more callers to the Declining a Call conference call, repeat Turn the menu knob to Decline and steps 1 through 4. The amount press the SELECT button. of callers that can be added are limited by your wireless service carrier. 6-46 Infotainment System

Ending a Call Bluetooth Pairing Information: Turn the menu knob and select (Voice Recognition) . Up to five cell phones can be Hang Up. paired to the Bluetooth system. Pairing Muting a Call . The pairing process is disabled A Bluetooth cell phone must be when the vehicle is moving. paired to the Bluetooth system and To Mute a Call . then connected to the vehicle before The Bluetooth system links with Turn the menu knob and select it can be used. See the cell phone the first available paired cell Mute Call. manufacturers user guide for phone in the order the phone was paired. To Cancel Mute Bluetooth functions before pairing . Only one paired cell phone can Turn the menu knob and select the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone be connected to the Bluetooth Mute Call. is not connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling, system at a time. if available. Refer to the OnStar Dual Tone Multi-Frequency . Pairing only needs to be (DTMF) Tones owner's guide for more information. completed once, unless the The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can The pairing process can be started pairing information changes or send numbers during a call. This is by using the voice recognition the phone is deleted. used when calling a menu driven system or the controls on the To link to a different paired phone, phone system. infotainment system. see Linking to a Different Phone 1. Turn the menu knob and select later in this section. Enter Number. 2. Enter the character sequence, see “Entering a Character Sequence” in Operation on page 6‑7 for more information. Infotainment System 6-47

Pairing a Phone 4. Start the pairing process on the Listing All Paired and Connected cell phone that will be paired to Phones 1. Press b / g. the vehicle. Reference the cell 1. Press / g. . For vehicles without a phone manufacturers user guide b navigation system, the for information on this process. . For vehicles without a system responds “Ready”, Locate the device named navigation system, the followed by a tone. “General Motors” in the list on system responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. . For vehicles with a the cell phone and follow the navigation system, the instructions on the cell phone to . For vehicles with a system responds with a enter the four‐digit PIN number navigation system, the tone. After the tone say that was provided in Step 3. system responds with a “Hands Free”. The system 5. The system prompts for a name tone. After the tone say responds “Ready”, followed for the phone. This name will be “Hands Free”. The system by a tone. used to indicate which phone is responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system connected. The system confirms responds “Bluetooth ready”, the name. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system followed by a tone. 6. The system responds with responds “Bluetooth ready”, followed by a tone. 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds “ has been with instructions and a four‐digit successfully paired” after the 3. Say “List”. The system lists all PIN number. The PIN number pairing process is complete. the paired Bluetooth devices. will be used in Step 4. 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for The system will respond “is additional phones to be paired. connected” if a phone is connected to the vehicle. 6-48 Infotainment System

Deleting a Paired Phone 4. Say the name of the phone to 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system be deleted. If the phone name responds “Bluetooth ready”, 1. Press / . b g is unknown, use the “List” followed by a tone. . command for a list of all paired For vehicles without a 3. Say “Change phone”. The phones. The system responds navigation system, the system responds “Please wait Would you like to delete system responds “Ready”, “ while I search for other phones”. followed by a tone. ? Yes or No”, followed by a tone. . If another phone is found, . For vehicles with a the response will be 5. Say Yes to delete the phone. navigation system, the “ ” “ is now The system responds OK, system responds with a “ connected”. tone. After the tone say deleting ”. . If another phone is not “Hands Free”. The system Linking to a Different Phone responds “Ready”, followed found, the original phone by a tone. 1. Press b / g. remains connected. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system . For vehicles without a Storing Name Tags responds “Bluetooth ready”, navigation system, the The system can store up to followed by a tone. system responds “Ready”, thirty phone numbers as name 3. Say “Delete”. The system asks followed by a tone. tags that are shared between the which phone to delete followed . For vehicles with a Bluetooth and OnStar systems. by a tone. navigation system, the The system uses the following system responds with a commands to store and retrieve tone. After the tone say phone numbers: “Hands Free”. The system . responds “Ready”, followed Store by a tone. . Digit Store . Directory Infotainment System 6-49

Using the Store Command 3. Say the complete phone number 5. Say a name tag for the phone The store command allows a phone to be stored at once with no number. The name tag is number to be stored without pauses. recorded and the system responds About to store entering the digits individually. . If the system recognizes “ the number, the response is . Does that sound OK? . 1. Press b / g. “OK, Storing”. ” . . If the name tag does not For vehicles without a . If the system does not navigation system, the recognize the phone sound correct, say “No” and system responds “Ready”, number, the response is repeat Step 5. followed by a tone. “Store ”. . If the name tag sounds . For vehicles with a “Please say yes or no”. correct, say “Yes” and the navigation system, the If the number is correct, say name tag is stored. After system responds with a “Yes”. If the number is not the number is stored the tone. After the tone say correct, say “No”. The system returns to the “Hands Free”. The system system will ask for the main menu. responds “Ready”, followed number again. by a tone. 4. After the system stores the 2. Say “Store”. The system phone number, it responds responds “Store, number “Please say the name tag”, please”, followed by a tone. followed by a tone. 6-50 Infotainment System

Using the Digit Store Command 3. Say the first digit to be stored. 5. Say a name tag for the phone The digit store command allows a The system will repeat back the number. The name tag is phone number to be stored by digit it heard followed by a tone. recorded and the system entering the digits individually. Continue entering digits until the responds “About to store number to be stored is complete. . Does that sound OK? . 1. Press b / g. . If an unwanted number is ” . For vehicles without a recognized by the system, . If the name tag does not navigation system, the say “Clear” at any time to sound correct, say “No” and system responds “Ready”, clear the last number. repeat Step 5. followed by a tone. . To hear all of the numbers . If the name tag sounds . For vehicles with a recognized by the system, correct, say “Yes” and the navigation system, the say “Verify” at any time. name tag is stored. After system responds with a 4. After the complete number has the number is stored the system returns to the tone. After the tone say been entered, say “Store”. The main menu. “Hands Free”. The system system responds “Please say responds “Ready”, followed the name tag”, followed by by a tone. a tone. 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with “Please say the first digit to store”, followed by a tone. Infotainment System 6-51

Using the Directory Command Deleting Name Tags 2. Say “Delete”. The system responds Delete, please say The directory command lists all of The system uses the following “ the name tag , followed by the name tags stored by the system. commands to delete name tags: ” To use the directory command: a tone. . Delete 3. Say the name tag to be deleted. 1. Press b / g. . Delete all name tags The system responds “Would . you like to delete, ? For vehicles without a Using the Delete Command navigation system, the Please say yes or no”. The delete command is used to system responds “Ready”, . If the name tag is correct, delete specific name tags. followed by a tone. say “Yes” to delete the . For vehicles with a To delete name tags: name tag. The system responds with “OK, deleting navigation system, the 1. Press / g. system responds with a b , returning to tone. After the tone say . For vehicles without a the main menu.” “Hands Free”. The system navigation system, the . If the name tag is incorrect, responds “Ready”, followed system responds “Ready”, say “No”. The system by a tone. followed by a tone. responds with “No. OK, let's 2. Say “Directory”. The system . For vehicles with a try again, please say the responds “Directory” and lists all navigation system, the name tag.” stored name tags. The system system responds with a returns to the main menu when tone. After the tone say the list is complete. “Hands Free”. The system responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. 6-52 Infotainment System

Using the Delete All Name Tags 2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The Using the Dial Command Command system responds “You are about 1. Press b / g. The Delete All Name Tags to delete all name tags stored in command deletes all stored phone your phone directory and your . For vehicles without a book name tags and route name route destination directory. Are navigation system, the tags for OnStar, if stored. you sure you want to do this? system responds “Ready”, Please say yes or no.” followed by a tone. To delete all name tags: . Say “Yes” to delete all . For vehicles with a 1. Press b / g. name tags. navigation system, the system responds with a . For vehicles without a . Say “No” to cancel the navigation system, the function and return to the tone. After the tone say Hands Free . The system system responds “Ready”, main menu. “ ” followed by a tone. responds “Ready”, followed Making a Call by a tone. . For vehicles with a Calls can be made using the navigation system, the 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds following commands: system responds with a “Dial using . tone. After the tone say . Dial “Number please”, followed by a tone. “Hands Free”. The system . Digit Dial responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. . Call . Re‐dial Infotainment System 6-53

3. Say the entire number without Using the Digit Dial Command 3. Say the digits to be dialed one at pausing. a time. The system repeats back 1. Press b / g. the digit it heard followed by . If the system recognizes the number, it responds . For vehicles without a a tone. with “OK, Dialing” and dials navigation system, the 4. Continue entering digits until the the number. system responds “Ready”, number to be dialed is complete. followed by a tone. After the whole number has . If the system does not recognize the number, it . For vehicles with a been entered, say “Dial”. The confirms the numbers navigation system, the system responds “OK, Dialing” followed by a tone. If the system responds with a and dials the number. number is correct, say tone. After the tone say . If an unwanted number is “Yes”. The system responds “Hands Free”. The system recognized by the system, “OK, Dialing” and dials the responds “Ready”, followed say “Clear” at any time to number. If the number is by a tone. clear the last number. not correct, say No . The “ ” 2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system . To hear all of the numbers system will ask for the responds “Digit dial using recognized by the system, number again. , please say the say “Verify” at any time. first digit to dial”, followed by a tone. 6-54 Infotainment System

Using the Call Command 3. Say the name tag of the person Using the Re‐dial Command to call. 1. Press b / g. 1. Press b / g. . If the system recognizes . For vehicles without a the name tag it responds . For vehicles without a navigation system, the “OK, calling, ” navigation system, the system responds “Ready”, and dials the number. system responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. followed by a tone. . If the system does not . For vehicles with a recognize the name tag, it . For vehicles with a navigation system, the confirms the name tag navigation system, the system responds with a followed by a tone. If the system responds with a tone. After the tone say name tag is correct, say tone. After the tone say “Hands Free”. The system “Yes”. The system responds “Hands Free”. The system responds “Ready”, followed with “OK, calling, ” and dials the number. followed by a tone. 2. Say “Call”. The system responds If the name tag is not 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The “Call using . correct, say “No”. The system responds “Re‐dial using Please say the name tag”, system will ask for the ” and dials the followed by a tone. name tag again. last number called from the Once connected, the person called connected Bluetooth phone. will be heard through the audio Once connected, the person called speakers. will be heard through the audio speakers. Infotainment System 6-55

Receiving a Call Three‐Way Calling Muting a Call When an incoming call is received, Three‐way calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the Bluetooth phone the vehicle can be muted so that the tone is heard in the vehicle. and enabled by the wireless service person on the other end of the call carrier. cannot hear them. . Press b g to answer the call. 1. While on a call, press b g. The To Mute a call . Press c / $ to ignore a call. system responds with Ready , “ ” 1. Press . The system followed by a tone. b g Call Waiting responds “Ready”, followed by Call waiting must be supported on 2. Say “Three‐way call”. a tone. The system responds with the Bluetooth phone and enabled by 2. Say Mute Call . The system “Three‐way call, please “ ” the wireless service carrier. responds Call muted . say dial or call”. “ ” . Press b g to answer an 3. Use the dial or call command to To Cancel Mute incoming call when another call dial the number of the third party 1. Press b g. The system is active. The original call is to be called. placed on hold. responds “Ready”, followed by 4. Once the call is connected, a tone. . Press b g again to return to the press b g to link all the callers 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. original call. together. The system responds . To ignore the incoming call, no Ending a Call “Resuming call”. action is required. Press / to end a call. . Press c / $ to disconnect the c $ current call and switch to the call on hold. 6-56 Infotainment System

Transferring a Call For vehicles without a navigation To access contacts stored in the cell phone: Audio can be transferred between system, press b g during a call the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system and with the audio on the cell phone, the 1. Press b / g. the cell phone. audio transfers to the vehicle. . For vehicles without a To Transfer Audio to the Cell For vehicles with a navigation navigation system, the Phone system, press b g during a call system responds “Ready”, with the audio on the cell phone. During a call with the audio in the followed by a tone. If the audio does not transfer to the vehicle: . For vehicles with a vehicle, use the audio transfer navigation system, the feature on the cell phone. See the 1. Press b g. The system system responds with a responds “Ready”, followed by cell phone manufacturers user guide for more information. tone. After the tone say a tone. “Hands Free”. The system 2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system Voice Pass-Thru responds “Ready”, followed responds Transferring call and by a tone. “ ” Voice pass thru allows access to the the audio transfers to the cell ‐ voice recognition commands on the 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system phone. cell phone. See the cell phone responds “Bluetooth ready”, To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle manufacturers user guide to see if followed by a tone. Bluetooth System the cell phone supports this feature. 3. Say “Voice”. The system The cell phone must be paired responds “OK, accessing and connected with the Bluetooth ”. system before a call can be . The cell phone's normal transferred. The connection process prompt messages will go can take up to two minutes after the through its cycle according ignition is turned to ON/RUN or to the phone's operating ACC/ACCESSORY. instructions. Infotainment System 6-57

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency . If the system does not . If the system does not (DTMF) Tones recognize the number, it recognize the name tag, it responds “Dial Number, responds “Dial , The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can please say yes or no?”, please say yes or no?”, send numbers and the numbers followed by a tone. If the followed by a tone. If the stored as name tags during a call. number is correct, say name tag is correct, say Use this feature when calling a “Yes”. The system responds “Yes”. The system responds menu driven phone system. Account “OK, Sending Number” and with “OK, Sending ” and the dial tones are Sending a Number During a Call the call continues. sent and the call continues. Sending a Stored Name Tag 1. Press . The system Clearing the System b g During a Call responds “Ready”, followed by Unless information is deleted out of a tone. 1. Press b g. The system the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This 2. Say Dial . The system responds responds “Ready”, followed by “ ” includes all saved name tags in the Say a number to send tones , a tone. “ ” phone book and phone pairing followed by a tone. 2. Say “Send name tag.” The information. For information on how 3. Say the number to send. system responds “Say a name to delete this information, see the tag to send tones”, followed by previous sections on Deleting a . If the system recognizes a tone. the number, it responds Paired Phone and Deleting “OK, Sending Number” and 3. Say the name tag to send. Name Tags. the dial tones are sent and . If the system recognizes the call continues. the number, it responds “OK, Sending ” and the dial tones are sent and the call continues. 6-58 Infotainment System

Bluetooth (Navigation) The pairing process can be started Pairing a Phone by using the voice recognition For information about how to 1. Press the CONFIG hard key system or the controls on the repeatedly until the Phone menu navigate the menu system using infotainment system. the infotainment controls, see is shown or touch the Phone tab “Overview” under Introduction, in Pairing Information: on the screen. the Navigation supplement. . Up to five cell phones can be Bluetooth Pairing paired to the Bluetooth system. . The pairing process is disabled To make calls with a Bluetooth cell when the vehicle is moving. phone through your vehicle, it must be paired to the vehicle's Bluetooth . The Bluetooth system system first and then connected automatically links with the to the vehicle before it can be paired cell phone in the order used. Refer to the cell phone the phones were paired. manufacturer's user guide for . Only one paired cell phone can Bluetooth pairing instructions. be connected to the vehicle's If a Bluetooth phone is off or not Bluetooth system at a time. connected, calls will automatically be made using the OnStar® . Pairing should only need to be 2. Select the Bluetooth submenu. Hands‐Free Calling feature, completed once. if available. Refer to the OnStar owner's guide for more information about OnStar Hands-Free Calling. Infotainment System 6-59

5. The system responds with “phone name has been successfully paired” after the pairing process is complete. Listing All Paired and Connected Phones 1. Press the CONFIG hard key repeatedly until the Phone menu is shown or touch the Phone tab displayed on the screen.

3. Select “Add New Phone”, the On the cell phone, locate the pairing process will begin device named “General Motors”. searching for Bluetooth devices Follow the instructions given on on your cellular pone. See the the cell phone or follow the voice cell phone manufacturer's user prompts, to enter the four digit guide for information on this PIN number that has been process. provided. 4. The system voice prompt requests that you say the name you want used for the phone that is being paired. Use a name that best describes the phone. The system voice prompt then 2. Select the Bluetooth submenu. repeats the name you provided for confirmation, say “Yes”. 6-60 Infotainment System

Deleting a Paired Phone 1. Press the CONFIG hard key repeatedly until the Phone menu is shown or touch the Phone tab on the screen.

3. Select the Device List submenu. A list of all previously paired phones will be displayed. If there is a currently paired phone, a check mark will appear on the right side of the Phone name.

2. Select the Bluetooth submenu. Infotainment System 6-61

3. Select the “Device List 4. Select the phone to be deleted 5. Once a phone has been deleted, submenu. and then follow the on screen the only way to connect back to prompts to delete the device that phone is to pair the phone from the system. again. See “Bluetooth Pairing” earlier before the process is started. 6-62 Infotainment System

Pairing a Phone in the Device List In order to pair to another phone, the new phone in the Device List, make sure the phone you would like to pair is in the vehicle and available to be connected to the Bluetooth system before the process is started. 1. Press the CONFIG hard key repeatedly until the Phone menu is shown or touch the Phone tab on the screen. 3. Select the Device List submenu. 4. Select the phone to be paired and then follow the on screen prompts.

2. Select the Bluetooth submenu. Infotainment System 6-63

Accepting a Call Call Waiting Press b g on the steering wheel Call waiting must be supported on control to answer the incoming call, the Bluetooth phone and enabled by or touch the Answer option to the wireless service carrier to work. answer the call. Switching Calls (Only Available with Call Waiting) This features allows you to switch between calls making one call active and placing the other on hold.

5. The Phone menu will be displayed with the name of the phone paired. Accepting or Declining an Incoming Call

When an incoming call is received, Declining a Call the infotainment system mutes any audio being played and sounds a Press the c / $ on the steering ring tone. wheel controls or select the Decline option to decline the call. 6-64 Infotainment System

Conference Calling Ending a Call Conference and three way calling must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work. To start a conference while in a current call: 1. Press the 5 hard key on the faceplate until the Phone main screen is shown with the current active call. 3. Make another call. The first call will be placed on hold while the second call is dialing and There are a few ways that a call can connected. be ended: 4. To make a conference call, 1. Press the 5 hard key. select the “Merge” option which will merge both calls into one 2. Select Hang Up. conference call. 5. To add more callers to the conference call, repeat Steps 2 and 4. The amount of callers that can be added are limited by your wireless service 2. Select the “Enter Number” carrier. option. Infotainment System 6-65

Mute or UnMute a Call 1. Press the 5 hard key. 2. Select the Mute call option to mute the call. 3. Select the Mute call option again to unmute the call. Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Tones The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers during a call for “Dial 1 or 2”, for phone number extensions, or voice mailboxes. 1. Press the 5 hard key. 2. Select “Enter Number” option and enter the number sequence. 6-66 Infotainment System

2 NOTES Climate Controls 7-1

Climate Controls Climate Control Systems Automatic Climate Control System Climate Control Systems The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with Automatic Climate Control this system. System ...... 7-1 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...... 7-4 Air Vents Air Vents ...... 7-8 Maintenance Air Intake ...... 7-8 Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...... 7-8

A. Power F. AUTO B. Temperature Control G. Defrost C. Fan Control H. Air Conditioning D. Air Delivery Mode Control I. Rear Window Defogger E. Recirculation 7-2 Climate Controls

Automatic Operation Manual Operation \ (Bi-Level): Air is divided The system automatically controls O (Power): Press to turn the fan between the instrument panel the fan speed, air delivery, air on or off. outlets and the floor outlets. conditioning and recirculation in DC (Fan Control): Press to C (Tri‐Level): Air is divided order to heat or cool the vehicle to increase or decrease the fan speed. between the windshield, instrument the desired temperature. The fan speed setting appears on panel, and floor outlets. When the AUTO indicator light is the main display. Pressing either [ (Floor): Air is directed to the on, the system is in full automatic button cancels automatic fan control floor outlets. operation. If the air delivery mode, and the fan can be controlled fan speed, recirculation or air manually. Press AUTO to return to - (Defog): Clears the windows of conditioning setting is adjusted, the automatic operation. fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield and floor outlets. AUTO indicator turns off and the e * (Air Delivery Mode selected settings will appear on the Control): Press to change the 0 (Defrost): Clears the display. direction of the airflow. The current windshield of fog or frost more To place the system in automatic mode appears in the display screen. quickly. Air is directed to the mode do the following: Pressing either button cancels windshield. Selecting defrost will disable automatic control. 1. Press AUTO. automatic air delivery control and the direction of the airflow can be For best results, clear all snow 2. Set the temperature. Allow the controlled manually. Press AUTO to and ice from windshield before system time to stabilize. Adjust return to automatic operation. defrosting. the temperature as needed for best comfort. To change the current mode, select # (Air Conditioning): Press to Q R one of the following: turn the air conditioning system on / (Temperature Control): Y or off. If the fan is turned off or the Press to increase or decrease the (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets. outside temperature falls below temperature. freezing, the air conditioning system will not run. Climate Controls 7-3

Pressing this button cancels Rear Window Defogger For vehicles with heated outside automatic air conditioning and turns rearview mirrors, they turn on when (Rear Window Defogger): off the air conditioner. Press AUTO = the rear window defogger button is Press to turn the rear window to return to automatic operation on and helps to clear fog or frost defogger on or off. and the air conditioner runs from the surface of the mirror. See automatically as needed. When The rear window defogger turns Heated Mirrors on page 1‑16. off automatically after about the indicator light is on, the air Notice: Do not try to clear frost 10 minutes. If turned on again it conditioner runs automatically to or other material from the inside runs for about 5 minutes before cool the air inside the vehicle or to of the front windshield and rear turning off. The defogger can also dry the air needed to defog the window with a razor blade or be turned off by turning the ignition windshield faster. anything else that is sharp. This to ACC/ACCESSORY or (Recirculation): Press to may damage the rear window > LOCK/OFF. alternate between recirculating air defogger grid and affect your inside the vehicle or pulling in The rear window defogger can be radio's ability to pick up stations outside air. When the indicator light set to automatic operation, see clearly. The repairs wouldn't be is on, air is being recirculated inside Climate and Air Quality under covered by your warranty. Vehicle Personalization on the vehicle. This helps to quickly Remote Start Climate Control page 4 38. When auto rear defog cool the air inside the vehicle or ‑ Operation: For vehicles with the is selected, the rear window prevent outside air and odors from remote vehicle start feature, the defogger turns on automatically entering. climate control system may run when the interior temperature is Pressing this button cancels when the vehicle is started remotely. cold and the outside temperature is automatic recirculation. Press AUTO The system uses the driver's about 40°F and below. The auto to return to automatic operation and previous settings to heat or cool the rear defogger turns off automatically recirculation runs automatically as inside of the vehicle. See Remote after about 10 minutes, or after needed. Vehicle Start on page 1 8. 5 minutes if the outside temperature ‑ is not as cold. The rear window defogger turns on if it is cold outside. 7-4 Climate Controls

Sensors Dual Automatic Climate Control System The solar sensor located on top of The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with the instrument panel near the this system. windshield monitors the solar heat. The climate control system uses the sensor information to adjust the temperature, fan speed, recirculation, and air delivery mode for best comfort. Do not cover the sensors or the automatic climate control system may not work properly.

A. Power G. Passenger Temperature Control B. Driver Temperature Control H. AUTO C. Defrost I. Rear Window Defogger D. Fan Control J. Heated Steering Wheel E. Air Delivery Mode Control K. Air Conditioning F. Recirculation / Automatic L. ZONE Recirculation Climate Controls 7-5

Automatic Operation Q / R (Driver and Passenger e * (Air Delivery Mode The system automatically controls Temperature Control): The Control): Press to change the the fan speed, air delivery, air temperature can be adjusted direction of the airflow. The current conditioning and recirculation in separately for the driver and the mode appears in the display screen. order to heat or cool the vehicle to passenger. Press to increase or Pressing either button cancels the desired temperature. decrease the temperature. automatic air delivery control and the direction of the airflow is When the AUTO indicator light is ZONE: Press to link all climate zone settings to the driver's controlled manually. Press AUTO to on, the system is in full automatic return to automatic operation. operation. If the air delivery mode, settings. The ZONE indicator light fan speed, recirculation or air will turn off. When the passenger To change the current mode, select conditioning setting is adjusted, the settings are adjusted, the ZONE one of the following: AUTO indicator turns off and the indicator light is on. Y (Vent): Air is directed to the selected settings will appear on the Manual Operation instrument panel outlets. display. O (Power): Press to turn the fan \ (Bi-Level): Air is divided To place the system in automatic off or on. between the instrument panel mode do the following: outlets and the floor outlets. DC (Fan Control): Press to 1. Press AUTO. increase or decrease the fan speed. C (Tri‐Level): Air is divided 2. Set the temperature. Allow the The fan speed setting appears on between the windshield, instrument system time to stabilize. Adjust the main display. Pressing either panel, and floor outlets. the temperature as needed for button cancels automatic fan control [ (Floor): Air is directed to the best comfort. and the fan is controlled manually. floor outlets. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation. - (Defog): Clears the windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield and floor outlets. 7-6 Climate Controls

0 (Defrost): Clears the > // (Recirculation/Auto Auto Defog: The climate control windshield of fog or frost more Recirculation): Press to change to system may have a sensor to quickly. Air is directed to the automatic control of air recirculation automatically detect high humidity windshield. inside the vehicle. When the auto inside the vehicle. When high humidity is detected, the climate For best results, clear all snow recirculation indicator light is on, the air is automatically recirculated as control system may adjust to and ice from windshield before outside air supply and turn on the defrosting. needed to help quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. air conditioner. The fan speed may # (Air Conditioning): Press to slightly increase to help prevent turn the air conditioning system on In auto recirculation control, the Air fogging. If the climate control or off. If the fan is turned off or the Quality Control system may operate system does not detect possible outside temperature falls below when pollution is detected. To adjust window fogging, it returns to normal freezing, the air conditioner will the sensitivity of the Air Quality operation. To turn Auto Defog off or not run. Control, see Climate and Air Quality on, see Climate and Air Quality under Vehicle Personalization on under Vehicle Personalization on Pressing this button cancels page 4‑38. page 4 38. automatic air conditioning and turns ‑ off the air conditioner. Press AUTO When the > indicator light is on, air to return to automatic operation is recirculated inside the vehicle. and the air conditioner runs If both indicator lights are off, automatically as needed. When outside air will flow into the vehicle. the indicator light is on, the air Press AUTO or / to return to conditioner runs automatically to automatic operation. cool the air inside the vehicle or to dry the air needed to defog the windshield faster. Climate Controls 7-7

Rear Window Defogger For vehicles with heated outside Remote Start Climate Control rearview mirrors, they turn on when Operation: For vehicles with the (Rear Window Defogger): = the rear window defogger button is remote vehicle start feature, the Press to turn the rear window on and helps to clear fog or frost climate control system may run defogger on or off. from the surface of the mirror. See when the vehicle is started remotely. The rear window defogger turns Heated Mirrors on page 1‑16. The system uses the driver's off automatically after about Notice: Do not try to clear frost previous settings to heat or cool the 10 minutes. If turned on again it or other material from the inside inside of the vehicle. See Remote runs for about 5 minutes before of the front windshield and rear Vehicle Start on page 1‑8. turning off. The defogger can also window with a razor blade or The rear window defogger turns on be turned off by turning the ignition anything else that is sharp. This if it is cold outside. to ACC/ACCESSORY or may damage the rear window LOCK/OFF. defogger grid and affect your Sensors The rear window defogger can be radio's ability to pick up stations The solar sensor, located on top set to automatic operation, see clearly. The repairs wouldn't be of the instrument panel near the Climate and Air Quality under covered by your warranty. windshield monitors the solar heat. Vehicle Personalization on ( (Heated Steering Wheel): For page 4 38. When auto rear defog is The climate control system uses ‑ vehicles with this feature, press to selected, the rear window defogger the sensor information to adjust turn on or off. See Heated Steering turns on automatically when the the temperature, fan speed, Wheel on page 4 7. interior temperature is cold and the ‑ recirculation, and air delivery mode outside temperature is about 40°F for best comfort. and below. The auto rear defogger Do not cover the sensors or the turns off automatically after about automatic climate control system 10 minutes, or after 5 minutes if the may not work properly. outside temperature is not as cold. 7-8 Climate Controls

Air Vents Maintenance The passenger compartment air filter can be accessed by removing Use the louvers located on the air the entire glove box. vents to change the direction of the Air Intake 1. Open the passenger side door. airflow. Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves Remove the end cover located To open the vent, move the from the air intake at the base of the on the side of the instrument thumbwheel to R . To close the vent, windshield that can block the flow of panel in the top right corner. air into the vehicle. Remove the screw affixed to the move the thumbwheel to (. side of the glove box. Passenger Compartment Operation Tips 2. Open the glove box door and . Keep all outlets open whenever Air Filter remove the attached screws possible for best system The filter removes dust, pollen, and from around the glove box. performance. other airborne irritants from outside 3. Lower the loosened glove box . Keep the path under all seats air that is pulled into the vehicle. housing. clear of objects to help circulate The filter should be replaced as part 4. Unplug both wire cables and the air inside the vehicle more of routine scheduled maintenance. remove the glove box. effectively. See Scheduled Maintenance on 5. Pull the three tabs to release . page 10‑2 for replacement Use of non-GM approved hood and open the filter door. deflectors can adversely affect intervals. To find out what type of the performance of the system. filter to use, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 10‑9. Climate Controls 7-9

6. Remove the old air filter. 7. Install the new air filter. 8. Reinstall the air filter door. Re‐install the glove box. See your dealer/retailer if additional assistance is needed. 7-10 Climate Controls

2 NOTES Driving and Operating 8-1

Starting and Operating Brakes Driving and New Vehicle Break-In ...... 8-17 Antilock Brake Operating Ignition Positions System (ABS) ...... 8-31 (Keyless Access) ...... 8-18 Parking Brake ...... 8-32 Ignition Positions Brake Assist ...... 8-34 (Key Access) ...... 8-19 Driving Information Ride Control Systems Driving for Better Fuel Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...... 8-20 Traction Control Economy ...... 8-2 System (TCS) ...... 8-34 Defensive Driving ...... 8-3 Starting the Engine ...... 8-20 Engine Heater ...... 8-23 Electronic Stability Drunk Driving ...... 8-3 Control (ESC) ...... 8-35 Control of a Vehicle ...... 8-4 Shifting Into Park ...... 8-24 Shifting Out of Park ...... 8-25 Limited-Slip Differential ...... 8-36 Braking ...... 8-4 Selective Ride Control ...... 8-36 Steering ...... 8-5 Parking Over Things Off-Road Recovery ...... 8-6 That Burn ...... 8-25 Cruise Control Loss of Control ...... 8-7 Engine Exhaust Cruise Control ...... 8-37 Driving on Wet Roads ...... 8-8 Engine Exhaust ...... 8-26 Highway Hypnosis ...... 8-8 Object Detection Systems Running the Vehicle While Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 8-40 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 8-9 Parked ...... 8-26 Winter Driving ...... 8-9 Side Blind Zone If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 8-12 Automatic Transmission Alert (SBZA) ...... 8-42 Vehicle Load Limits ...... 8-12 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 8-27 Rear Vision Manual Mode ...... 8-29 Camera (RVC) ...... 8-45 Drive Systems All-Wheel Drive ...... 8-30 8-2 Driving and Operating

Fuel Driving Information . Always follow posted speed Fuel ...... 8-48 limits or drive more slowly when conditions require. Recommended Fuel ...... 8-49 Driving for Better Fuel Gasoline Specifications ...... 8-49 . Keep vehicle tires properly California Fuel Economy inflated. Requirements ...... 8-50 Driving habits can affect fuel . Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 8-50 Combine several trips into a mileage. Here are some driving tips single trip. Fuel Additives ...... 8-50 to get the best fuel economy Filling the Tank ...... 8-52 . possible. Replace the vehicle's tires with Filling a Portable Fuel the same TPC Spec number Container ...... 8-53 . Avoid fast starts and accelerate molded into the tire's sidewall smoothly. near the size. Towing General Towing . Brake gradually and avoid . Follow recommended scheduled Information ...... 8-53 abrupt stops. maintenance. Driving Characteristics and . Avoid idling the engine for long Towing Tips ...... 8-54 periods of time. Trailer Towing . (2.4L L4 Engine) ...... 8-58 When road and weather Trailer Towing conditions are appropriate, use (3.0L and 3.6L cruise control, if equipped. V6 Engines) ...... 8-58 Towing Equipment ...... 8-59 Conversions and Add-Ons Add-On Electrical Equipment ...... 8-60 Driving and Operating 8-3

Defensive Driving Drunk Driving Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor Defensive driving means “always vehicle-related deaths involve expect the unexpected.” The first { WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these step in driving defensively is to wear Drinking and then driving is very deaths are the result of someone your safety belt, see Safety Belts on who was drinking and driving. dangerous. Your reflexes, page 2‑10. In recent years, more than perceptions, attentiveness, and 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related { WARNING judgment can be affected by even deaths have been associated with a small amount of alcohol. You the use of alcohol, with about Assume that other road users can have a serious — or even 250,000 people injured. (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other fatal — collision if you drive after For persons under 21, it is against drivers) are going to be careless drinking. Do not drink and drive or the law in every U.S. state to drink and make mistakes. Anticipate ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if alcohol. There are good medical, what they might do and be ready. psychological, and developmental you are with a group, designate a In addition: reasons for these laws. driver who will not drink. . Allow enough following The obvious way to eliminate the distance between you and Death and injury associated with leading highway safety problem is the driver in front of you. drinking and driving is a global for people never to drink alcohol . Focus on the task of driving. tragedy. and then drive. Driver distraction can cause Alcohol affects four things that collisions resulting in injury or anyone needs to drive a vehicle: possible death. These simple judgment, muscular coordination, defensive driving techniques vision, and attentiveness. could save your life. 8-4 Driving and Operating

Medical research shows that Braking And, of course, actual stopping alcohol in a person's system can distances vary greatly with the make crash injuries worse, See Brake System Warning Light surface of the road, whether it is especially injuries to the brain, on page 4‑19. pavement or gravel; the condition of spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking action involves perception the road, whether it is wet, dry, that when anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding to or icy; tire tread; the condition of the drinking — driver or passenger — is push the brake pedal is perception brakes; the weight of the vehicle; in a crash, that person's chance of time. Actually doing it is and the amount of brake force being killed or permanently disabled reaction time. applied. is higher than if the person had not Avoid needless heavy been drinking. Average reaction time is about three‐fourths of a second. But that is braking. Some people drive in only an average. It might be less spurts — heavy acceleration Control of a Vehicle with one driver and as long as two followed by heavy braking — rather The following three systems or three seconds or more with than keeping pace with traffic. This help to control the vehicle while another. Age, physical condition, is a mistake. The brakes might not driving — brakes, steering, and alertness, coordination, and have time to cool between hard accelerator. At times, as when eyesight all play a part. So do stops. The brakes will wear out driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But much faster with a lot of heavy ask more of those control systems even in three‐fourths of a second, a braking. Keeping pace with the than the tires and road can provide. vehicle moving at 100 km/h traffic and allowing realistic following Meaning, you can lose control of the (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That distances eliminates a lot of vehicle. See Traction Control could be a lot of distance in an unnecessary braking. That means System (TCS) on page 8‑34. emergency, so keeping enough better braking and longer brake life. space between the vehicle and Adding non dealer/non retailer ‐ ‐ others is important. accessories can affect vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 9‑3. Driving and Operating 8-5

If the engine ever stops while the Speed Variable Assist Steering Steering Tips vehicle is being driven, brake The vehicle has a steering system It is important to take curves at a normally but do not pump the that varies the amount of effort reasonable speed. brakes. If the brakes are pumped, required to steer the vehicle in the pedal could get harder to push Traction in a curve depends on the relation to the speed of the vehicle. down. If the engine stops, there will condition of the tires and the road still be some power brake assist but The amount of steering effort surface, the angle at which the it will be used when the brake is required is less at slower curve is banked, and vehicle speed. applied. Once the power assist is speeds to make the vehicle more While in a curve, speed is the one used up, it can take longer to stop maneuverable and easier to park. factor that can be controlled. and the brake pedal will be harder At faster speeds, the steering effort If there is a need to reduce speed, to push. increases to provide a sport-like feel do it before entering the curve, while to the steering. This provides Adding non dealer/non retailer the front wheels are straight. ‐ ‐ maximum control and stability. accessories can affect vehicle Try to adjust the speed so you can performance. See Accessories and If the vehicle seems harder to steer drive through the curve. Maintain a Modifications on page 9‑3. than normal when parking or driving reasonable, steady speed. Wait to slowly, there may be a problem with accelerate until out of the curve, and Steering the system. You will still have power then accelerate gently into the steering, but steering will be stiffer straightaway. than normal at slow speeds. See If power steering assist is lost your dealer/retailer for service. because the engine stops or the power steering system is not functioning, the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort. 8-6 Driving and Operating

Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery There are times when steering can The vehicle's right wheels can drop be more effective than braking. For off the edge of a road onto the example, you come over a hill and shoulder while driving. find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked and stops right in front of you. These problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room. That is the time for An emergency like this requires evasive action — steering around close attention and a quick decision. the problem. If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock The vehicle can perform very well in positions, it can be turned a full emergencies like these. First apply 180 degrees very quickly without the brakes. See Braking on removing either hand. But you have If the level of the shoulder is only page 8‑4. It is better to remove as to act fast, steer quickly, and just as slightly below the pavement, much speed as possible from a quickly straighten the wheel once recovery should be fairly easy. collision. Then steer around the you have avoided the object. Ease off the accelerator and then, problem, to the left or right if there is nothing in the way, steer depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency so that the vehicle straddles the situations are always possible is a edge of the pavement. good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. Driving and Operating 8-7

Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when (3 to 5 inches), about one-eighth water, snow, ice, gravel, or other In a skid, a driver can lose control of turn, until the right front tire contacts material is on the road. For safety, the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid the pavement edge. Then turn the slow down and adjust your driving to most skids by taking reasonable steering wheel to go straight down these conditions. It is important to care suited to existing conditions, the roadway. slow down on slippery surfaces and by not overdriving those because stopping distance is longer conditions. But skids are always and vehicle control more limited. Loss of Control possible. While driving on a surface with Let us review what driving experts The three types of skids correspond reduced traction, try your best to say about what happens when the to the vehicle's three control avoid sudden steering, acceleration, three control systems — brakes, systems. In the braking skid, the or braking, including reducing steering, and acceleration — do not wheels are not rolling. In the vehicle speed by shifting to a lower have enough friction where the tires steering or cornering skid, too much gear. Any sudden changes could meet the road to do what the driver speed or steering in a curve causes cause the tires to slide. You might has asked. tires to slip and lose cornering force. not realize the surface is slippery And in the acceleration skid, too In any emergency, do not give up. until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to much causes the driving Keep trying to steer and constantly recognize warning clues such as wheels to spin. — seek an escape route or area of enough water, ice, or packed snow less danger. If the vehicle starts to slide, ease on the road to make a mirrored your foot off the accelerator pedal surface — and slow down when you and quickly steer the way you want have any doubt. the vehicle to go. If you start Remember: Antilock brakes help steering quickly enough, the vehicle avoid only the braking skid. may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. 8-8 Driving and Operating

Driving on Wet Roads Other Rainy Weather Tips WARNING (Continued) Rain and wet roads can reduce Besides slowing down, other wet vehicle traction and affect your Flowing or rushing water creates weather driving tips include: ability to stop and accelerate. strong forces. Driving through . Allow extra following distance. Always drive slower in these types flowing water could cause your . Pass with caution. of driving conditions and avoid vehicle to be carried away. If this driving through large puddles and happens, you and other vehicle . Keep windshield wiping deep‐standing or flowing water. occupants could drown. Do not equipment in good shape. ignore police warnings and be . Keep the windshield washer fluid { WARNING very cautious about trying to drive reservoir filled. through flowing water. Wet brakes can cause crashes. . Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires on They might not work as well in a Hydroplaning quick stop and could cause page 9‑48. pulling to one side. You could Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water . Turn off cruise control. lose control of the vehicle. can build up under your vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the Highway Hypnosis After driving through a large water. This can happen if the road is puddle of water or a car/vehicle wet enough and you are going fast Always be alert and pay attention to wash, lightly apply the brake enough. When your vehicle is your surroundings while driving. pedal until the brakes work hydroplaning, it has little or no If you become tired or sleepy, find a normally. contact with the road. safe place to park your vehicle and rest. (Continued) There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet. Driving and Operating 8-9

Other driving tips include: . Stay in your own lane. Do not { WARNING swing wide or cut across the . Keep the vehicle well ventilated. center of the road. Drive at . Keep interior temperature cool. If you do not shift down, the speeds that let you stay in your brakes could get so hot that they . own lane. Keep your eyes moving — scan would not work well. You would the road ahead and to the sides. . Top of hills: Be alert — then have poor braking or even something could be in your . Check the rearview mirror and none going down a hill. You could lane (stalled car, accident). vehicle instruments often. crash. Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep . Pay attention to special road Hill and Mountain Roads downhill slope. signs (falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or Driving on steep hills or through no-passing zones) and take mountains is different than driving appropriate action. on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for { WARNING driving in these conditions include: Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) Winter Driving . Keep the vehicle serviced and in or with the ignition off is Driving on Snow or Ice good shape. dangerous. The brakes will have . Check all fluid levels and brakes, to do all the work of slowing down Drive carefully when there is snow tires, cooling system, and and they could get so hot that or ice between the tires and the transmission. they would not work well. You road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice can occur at about . Going down steep or long hills, would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain shift to a lower gear. begins to fall, resulting in even less could crash. Always have the traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or engine running and the vehicle in in freezing rain until roads can be gear when going downhill. treated with salt or sand. 8-10 Driving and Operating

Drive with caution, whatever the curve or an overpass can remain icy condition. Accelerate gently so when the surrounding roads are { WARNING traction is not lost. Accelerating too clear. Avoid sudden steering quickly causes the wheels to spin maneuvers and braking while Snow can trap engine exhaust and makes the surface under the on ice. under the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get tires slick, so there is even less Turn off cruise control, if equipped, traction. inside. Engine exhaust contains on slippery surfaces. carbon monoxide (CO) which Try not to break the fragile traction. cannot be seen or smelled. It can If you accelerate too fast, the drive Blizzard Conditions cause unconsciousness and even wheels will spin and polish the Being stuck in snow can be in a death. surface under the tires even more. serious situation. Stay with the The Antilock Brake System (ABS) vehicle unless there is help nearby. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: on page 8‑31 improves vehicle If possible, use the Roadside . Clear away snow from around stability during hard stops on Assistance Program on page 12‑6. the base of your vehicle, slippery roads, but apply the brakes To get help and keep everyone in especially any that is blocking sooner than when on dry pavement. the vehicle safe: the exhaust pipe. . Allow greater following distance on Turn on the hazard warning . Check again from time to any slippery road and watch for flashers. time to be sure snow does slippery spots. Icy patches can . Tie a red cloth to an outside not collect there. occur on otherwise clear roads in mirror. . Open a window about 5 cm shaded areas. The surface of a (two inches) on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air. (Continued) Driving and Operating 8-11

To save fuel, run the engine for only WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine . Fully open the air outlets on Snow can trap exhaust gases off and close the window most of or under the instrument under your vehicle. This can the way to save heat. Repeat this panel. cause deadly CO (carbon until help arrives but only when you . Adjust the Climate Control monoxide) gas to get inside. CO feel really uncomfortable from the system to a setting that could overcome you and kill you. cold. Moving about to keep warm circulates the air inside the You cannot see it or smell it, so also helps. vehicle and set the fan speed you might not know it is in your If it takes some time for help to to the highest setting. See vehicle. Clear away snow from arrive, now and then when you run Climate Control System in the around the base of your vehicle, the engine, push the accelerator Index. especially any that is blocking the pedal slightly so the engine runs For more information about exhaust. faster than the idle speed. This carbon monoxide, see Engine keeps the battery charged to restart Exhaust on page 8‑26. Run the engine for short periods the vehicle and to signal for help only as needed to keep warm, but (Continued) with the headlamps. Do this as little be careful. as possible to save fuel. 8-12 Driving and Operating

If the Vehicle is Stuck Rocking the Vehicle to Get Vehicle Load Limits it Out Slowly and cautiously spin the It is very important to know how wheels to free the vehicle when Turn the steering wheel left and much weight the vehicle can stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. right to clear the area around the carry. This weight is called the front wheels. Turn off any traction If stuck too severely for the traction vehicle capacity weight and system. Shift back and forth system to free the vehicle, turn the between R (Reverse) and a forward includes the weight of all traction system off and use the gear, spinning the wheels as little as occupants, cargo and all rocking method. possible. To prevent transmission nonfactory‐installed options. wear, wait until the wheels stop Two labels on the vehicle show { WARNING spinning before shifting gears. how much weight it may Release the accelerator pedal while properly carry, the Tire and If the vehicle's tires spin at high shifting, and press lightly on the Loading Information label and speed, they can explode, and you accelerator pedal when the the Certification label. or others could be injured. The transmission is in gear. Slowly vehicle can overheat, causing an spinning the wheels in the forward engine compartment fire or other and reverse directions causes a damage. Spin the wheels as little rocking motion that could free the as possible and avoid going vehicle. If that does not get the above 55 km/h (35 mph) as vehicle out after a few tries, it might shown on the speedometer. need to be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see For information about using tire Towing the Vehicle on page 9‑81. chains on the vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 9‑70. Driving and Operating 8-13

Tire and Loading Information number of occupant seating { WARNING Label positions (A), and the maximum Do not load the vehicle any vehicle capacity weight (B) in heavier than the Gross kilograms and pounds. Vehicle Weight Rating The Tire and Loading (GVWR), or either the Information label also shows maximum front or rear Gross the tire size of the original Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). equipment tires (C) and the If you do, parts on the vehicle recommended cold tire inflation can break, and it can change pressures (D). For more the way the vehicle handles. information on tires and inflation These could cause you to lose see Tires on page 9‑48 and Tire control and crash. Also, Pressure on page 9‑56. overloading can shorten the Label Example There is also important loading life of the vehicle. A vehicle specific Tire and information on the Certification Loading Information label is label. It tells you the Gross attached to the vehicle's center Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's and the Gross Axle Weight door open, you will find the label Rating (GAWR) for the front and attached below the door lock rear axle. See “Certification post. The Tire and Loading Label” later in this section. Information label shows the 8-14 Driving and Operating

Steps for Determining Correct the amount of available cargo important information on towing Load Limit and luggage load capacity a trailer, towing safety rules and 1. Locate the statement is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 trailering tips. (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should 5. Determine the combined never exceed XXX kg or weight of luggage and cargo XXX lbs” on your vehicle's being loaded on the vehicle. placard. That weight may not safely 2. Determine the combined exceed the available cargo weight of the driver and and luggage load capacity passengers that will be calculated in Step 4. riding in your vehicle. 6. If your vehicle will be towing 3. Subtract the combined a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to weight of the driver and Example 1 passengers from XXX kg your vehicle. Consult this or XXX lbs. manual to determine how this A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for reduces the available cargo Example 1 = 453 kg 4. The resulting figure equals and luggage load capacity of (1,000 lbs). the available amount of cargo your vehicle. and luggage load capacity. B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ See Trailer Towing (2.4L L4 For example, if the “XXX” 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg amount equals 1400 lbs and Engine) on page 8‑58 or Trailer (300 lbs). Towing (3.0L and 3.6L there will be five 150 lb C. Available Occupant and V6 Engines) on page 8 58 for passengers in your vehicle, ‑ Cargo Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs). Driving and Operating 8-15

seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed the vehicle's capacity weight. Certification Label

Example 2 Example 3 A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs). B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example (750 lbs). (1,000 lbs). A vehicle specific Certification C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight = label is attached to the driver 113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). side center pillar. The label tells Refer to the vehicle's Tire and the gross weight capacity of the Loading Information label for vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle specific information about the Weight Rating (GVWR). vehicle's capacity weight and 8-16 Driving and Operating

The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, WARNING (Continued) { WARNING fuel, and cargo. Never exceed If you do, parts on the vehicle Things you put inside the the GVWR for the vehicle, or the vehicle can strike and injure Gross Axle Weight Rating can break, and it can change the way the vehicle handles. people in a sudden stop or (GAWR) for either the front or turn, or in a crash. rear axle. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, . Put things in the cargo And, if there is a heavy load, it overloading can shorten the area of the vehicle. In the should be spread out. See life of the vehicle. cargo area, put them as “Steps for Determining Correct far forward as you can. Load Limit” earlier in this If you put things inside the Try to spread the weight section. vehicle — like suitcases, tools, evenly. packages, or anything . { WARNING else — they will go as fast as the Never stack heavier vehicle goes. If you have to stop things, like suitcases, Do not load the vehicle any or turn quickly, or if there is a inside the vehicle so that heavier than the Gross crash, they will keep going. some of them are above Vehicle Weight Rating the tops of the seats. (GVWR), or either the (Continued) maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). (Continued) Driving and Operating 8-17

Starting and can be used. Vehicle speeds WARNING (Continued) above 110 km/h (68 mph) Operating should be limited to . Do not leave an five minutes per use. unsecured child restraint New Vehicle Break-In . in the vehicle. Avoid making hard stops for Notice: The vehicle does not the first 322 km (200 miles) or . When you carry something need an elaborate break-in. But it so. During this time the new inside the vehicle, secure will perform better in the long run brake linings are not yet it whenever you can. if you follow these guidelines: broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean . Do not leave a seat folded . Do not drive at any one premature wear and earlier down unless you need to. constant speed, fast or slow, replacement. Follow this for the first 805 km breaking-in guideline every (500 miles). Do not make time you get new brake full-throttle starts. Avoid linings. downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle. . Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Driving . During the first 1 000 km Characteristics and Towing (600 miles), avoid using more Tips on page 8‑54 for the than moderate acceleration trailer towing capabilities of in lower gears and avoid your vehicle and more vehicle speeds above information. 110 km/h (68 mph). Following break‐in, engine speed . Between the first 1 000 km and load can be gradually (600 miles) and 5 000 km increased. (3,000 miles), heavy acceleration in lower gears 8-18 Driving and Operating

Ignition Positions The transmitter must be in the If the vehicle is not in P (Park), the vehicle for the system to operate. ignition will return to ACC/ (Keyless Access) If the push-button start is not ACCESSORY and display the working, the vehicle may be near a message SHIFT TO PARK in the strong radio antenna signal causing Driver Information Center (DIC). interference to the keyless access See Driver Information Center (DIC) system. See Remote Keyless Entry on page 4‑25 for more information. (RKE) System Operation (Key When the vehicle is shifted into Access) on page 1‑4 or Remote P (Park), the ignition system will Keyless Entry (RKE) System switch to OFF. Operation (Keyless Access) on ACC/ACCESSORY: This position page 1‑5 for more information. allows you to use some electrical To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle accessories when the engine is off. must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or With the ignition off, pressing the ON/RUN and the brake pedal must button one time without the brake be applied. The vehicle has an electronic pedal applied, will place the ignition keyless ignition with push‐button OFF: When this button is pressed system in ACC/ACCESSORY. start. with the engine running, the engine The ignition will switch from will be turned off. Pressing the button cycles it through ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF after three positions, ACC/ACCESSORY, If the vehicle is in P (Park), the five minutes to prevent battery ON/RUN/START and OFF. ignition will turn off, and Retained run down. Accessory Power (RAP) will remain active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 8‑20 for more information. Driving and Operating 8-19

ON/RUN/START: This position is Ignition Positions (Key To shift out of P (Park), turn the for driving and starting. With the ignition to ON/RUN and apply the ignition off, and the brake pedal Access) brake pedal. applied, pressing the button once A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only will place the ignition system in ON/ position from which the key can be RUN/START. Once engine cranking removed. This locks the ignition and begins, release the button. Engine automatic transmission. cranking will continue until the engine starts. See Starting the The shift lever must be in P (Park) Engine on page 8‑20 for more to turn the ignition switch to the information. The ignition will then LOCK/OFF position. remain in ON/RUN. The ignition switch can bind in the To place the ignition in ON/RUN/ LOCK/OFF position with the wheels START from OFF without starting turned off center. If this happens, the engine, press the button two move the steering wheel from right times without your foot on the brake to left while turning the key to ACC/ The ignition switch has four different pedal. ACCESSORY. If this does not work, positions. then the vehicle needs service. The battery could be drained if you Notice: Using a tool to force the leave the ignition in the ON/RUN/ B (ACC/ACCESSORY) : This key to turn in the ignition could START position with the engine off. position provides power to some of cause damage to the switch or You may not be able to start the the electrical accessories. It unlocks break the key. Use the correct vehicle if the battery is allowed to the ignition. The transmission is key, make sure it is all the way in, drain for an extended period of time. also unlocked in this position on and turn it only with your hand. automatic transmission vehicles. If the key cannot be turned by To move the key from ACC/ hand, see your dealer/retailer. ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF, the shift lever must be in P (Park). 8-20 Driving and Operating

C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch Retained Accessory Starting the Engine stays in this position when the engine is running. This position can Power (RAP) Move the shift lever to P (Park) or be used to operate the electrical These vehicle accessories can be N (Neutral). The engine will not start accessories, including the used for up to 10 minutes after the in any other position. To restart the ventilation fan and 12 volt power engine is turned off: engine when the vehicle is already outlet, as well as to display some moving, use N (Neutral) only. . Audio System warning and indicator lights. Notice: Do not try to shift to . Power Windows The battery could be drained if the P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY . Sunroof (if equipped) If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to P (Park) or ON/RUN position with the engine . Auxiliary Power Outlet off. The vehicle might not restart if only when the vehicle is stopped. the battery is allowed to drain for an Power to the audio system will Notice: The engine is designed extended period of time. continue to operate for up to to work with the electronics in 10 minutes or until the driver door is the vehicle. If you add electrical D (START) : This position starts opened. the engine. When the engine starts, parts or accessories, you could release the key. The ignition switch Power to the power windows and change the way the engine will return to ON/RUN for normal sunroof will continue to operate for operates. Before adding electrical driving. up to 10 minutes or until any door is equipment, check with your opened. dealer/retailer. If you do not, A warning tone sounds when the the engine might not perform All these features will work when driver door is opened when the properly. Any resulting damage ignition is still in ACC/ACCESSORY the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY. would not be covered by the and the key is in the ignition. vehicle warranty. Driving and Operating 8-21

Starting Procedure (Key Access) not start and the key is held in 2. If the engine does not start after 1. With your foot off the accelerator START for many seconds, 5‐10 seconds, especially in very pedal, turn the ignition key to cranking will be stopped after cold weather (below −18°C or START. When the engine starts, 15 seconds to prevent cranking 0°F), it could be flooded with too let go of the ignition. motor damage. To prevent gear much gasoline. Try pushing the damage, this system also accelerator pedal all the way to The idle speed will go down as prevents cranking if the engine the floor and holding it there as your engine gets warm. Do not is already running. Engine you hold the key in START, race the engine immediately cranking can be stopped by or press the START button, for after starting it. Operate the turning the ignition switch to up to a maximum of 15 seconds. engine and transmission gently ACC/ACCESSORY or Wait at least 15 seconds to allow the oil to warm up and LOCK/OFF. between each try, to allow the lubricate all moving parts. Notice: Cranking the engine for cranking motor to cool down. The vehicle has a long periods of time, by returning When the engine starts, let go of Computer-Controlled Cranking the key to the START position the key or button, and the System. This feature assists in immediately after cranking has accelerator. If the vehicle starts starting the engine and protects ended, can overheat and damage briefly but then stops again, do components. If the ignition key is the cranking motor, and drain the the same thing. This clears the turned to the START position, battery. Wait at least 15 seconds extra gasoline from the engine. and then released when the between each try, to let the Do not race the engine engine begins cranking, the cranking motor cool down. immediately after starting it. engine will continue cranking for Operate the engine and a few seconds or until the transmission gently until the oil vehicle starts. If the engine does warms up and lubricates all moving parts. 8-22 Driving and Operating

Starting Procedure If the battery in the keyless be stopped after 15 seconds to (Keyless Access) access transmitter needs prevent cranking motor damage. 1. If the vehicle has the keyless replacing, the DIC displays To prevent gear damage, this access system, the transmitter REPLACE BATTERY IN system also prevents cranking if must be in the vehicle. Put your REMOTE KEY. The vehicle can the engine is already running. foot on the brake pedal and still be driven. See Starting the Engine cranking can be stopped push the START button. When Vehicle with a Low Transmitter by pressing the START button a the engine begins cranking, let Battery in Remote Keyless Entry second time. go of the button. (RKE) System Operation (Key Notice: Cranking the engine for Access) on page 1‑4 or The idle speed will go down as long periods of time, by returning Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the key to the START position your engine gets warm. Do not System Operation (Keyless race the engine immediately immediately after cranking has Access) on page 1‑5 for more ended, can overheat and damage after starting it. Operate the information. engine and transmission gently the cranking motor, and drain the to allow the oil to warm up and The vehicle has a battery. Wait at least 15 seconds lubricate all moving parts. Computer-Controlled Cranking between each try, to let the System. This feature assists in cranking motor cool down. If the transmitter is not in the starting the engine and protects 2. If the engine does not start after vehicle or something is components. If the START interfering with the transmitter, 5‐10 seconds, especially in very button is pressed, and then cold weather (below −18°C or the Driver Information Center released when the engine (DIC) will display NO REMOTE 0°F), it could be flooded with too begins cranking, the engine will much gasoline. Try pushing the DETECTED. See Driver continue cranking for a few Information Center (DIC) on accelerator pedal all the way to seconds or until the vehicle the floor and holding it there as page 4‑25 for more information. starts. If the engine does not you hold the key in START, start and the button is pressed or press the START button, for for many seconds, cranking will up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Driving and Operating 8-23

Wait at least 15 seconds To Use The Engine Coolant between each try, to allow the Heater { WARNING cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of 1. Turn off the engine. Plugging the cord into an the key or button, and the 2. Open the hood and unwrap the ungrounded outlet could cause an accelerator. If the vehicle starts electrical cord. electrical shock. Also, the wrong briefly but then stops again, do kind of extension cord could the same thing. This clears the overheat and cause a fire. You extra gasoline from the engine. could be seriously injured. Plug Do not race the engine the cord into a properly grounded immediately after starting it. three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. Operate the engine and If the cord will not reach, use a transmission gently until the heavy-duty three-prong extension oil warms up and lubricates all cord rated for at least 15 amps. moving parts. 4. Before starting the engine, be Engine Heater sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it The engine coolant heater, away from moving engine parts. if available, can help in cold weather conditions at or below −18°C (0°F) The electrical cord is located on The length of time the heater should for easier starting and better fuel the driver side of the engine remain plugged in depends on economy during engine warm-up. compartment, between the several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer Plug in the coolant heater at least fender and the engine in the area where you will be four hours before starting the compartment fuse block. parking the vehicle for the best vehicle. An internal thermostat in 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded advice on this. the plug-end of the cord will prevent 110-volt AC outlet. engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above −18°C (0°F). 8-24 Driving and Operating

Shifting Into Park Leaving the Vehicle With the See if you can move the shift lever Engine Running away from P (Park) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it { WARNING { WARNING means that the shift lever was not It can be dangerous to get out of fully locked into P (Park). the vehicle if the shift lever is not It can be dangerous to leave the Torque Lock fully in P (Park) with the parking vehicle with the engine running. Torque lock is when the weight brake firmly set. The vehicle can The vehicle could move suddenly of the vehicle puts too much roll. If you have left the engine if the shift lever is not fully in force on the parking pawl in the running, the vehicle can move P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the transmission. This happens when suddenly. You or others could be parking on a hill and shifting the vehicle with the engine running, it injured. To be sure the vehicle will transmission into P (Park) is not could overheat and even catch not move, even when you are on done properly and then it is difficult fairly level ground, use the steps fire. You or others could be to shift out of P (Park). To prevent that follow. injured. Do not leave the vehicle torque lock, set the parking brake with the engine running. and then shift into P (Park). To find 1. Hold the brake pedal down and out how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)" set the parking brake. If you have to leave the vehicle with listed previously. the engine running, be sure the See Parking Brake on vehicle is in P (Park) and the If torque lock does occur, your page 8 32 for more information. ‑ parking brake is firmly set before vehicle may need to be pushed 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) you leave it. After you have moved uphill by another vehicle to relieve by pushing the lever all the way the shift lever into P (Park), hold the parking pawl pressure, so you toward the front of the vehicle. down the regular brake pedal. can shift out of P (Park). 3. Turn the ignition off. Driving and Operating 8-25

Shifting Out of Park If the vehicle has an uncharged 4. Press the shift lever button battery or a battery with low voltage, Automatic Transmission 5. Then, move the shift lever into try charging or jump starting the the desired gear. Shift Lock battery. See Jump Starting on page 9‑77. If you still cannot move the shift The vehicle has an electronic shift lever from P (Park), consult your lock release system. The shift lock If the console shift lever cannot be dealer/retailer or a professional release is designed to: moved out of P (Park): towing service. . Prevent ignition key removal 1. Apply and maintain the regular unless the shift lever is in brakes. Parking Over Things P (Park). 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN That Burn . Prevent movement of the shift position. See Ignition Positions lever out of P (Park), unless the (Keyless Access) on page 8‑18 { WARNING ignition is in ON/RUN and the or Ignition Positions (Key brake pedal is applied. Access) on page 8‑19 for more Things that can burn could touch information. The shift lock is always functional hot exhaust parts under the except in the case of a an 3. Let up on the shift lever and vehicle and ignite. Do not park uncharged or low voltage (less make sure the shift lever is over papers, leaves, dry grass, than 9 volt) battery. pushed all the way into P (Park). or other things that can burn. 8-26 Driving and Operating

Running the Vehicle Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued) While Parked { WARNING . The vehicle’s exhaust system It is better not to park with the has been modified, damaged engine running. But if you ever have Engine exhaust contains Carbon or improperly repaired. to, here are some things to know. Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO . There are holes or openings can cause unconsciousness and in the vehicle body from { WARNING even death. damage or after-market modifications that are not Idling a vehicle in an enclosed Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: completely sealed. area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may . The vehicle idles in areas If unusual fumes are detected or with poor ventilation (parking enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust if it is suspected that exhaust is contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) garages, tunnels, deep snow coming into the vehicle: that may block underbody which cannot be seen or smelled. airflow or tail pipes). . Drive it only with the windows It can cause unconsciousness completely down. and even death. Never run the . The exhaust smells or engine in an enclosed area that sounds strange or different. . Have the vehicle repaired immediately. has no fresh air ventilation. For . The exhaust system leaks more information, see Engine due to corrosion or damage. Never park the vehicle with the Exhaust on page 8‑26. engine running in an enclosed (Continued) area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation. Driving and Operating 8-27

{ WARNING Automatic { WARNING Transmission It can be dangerous to get out of It is dangerous to get out of the the vehicle if the automatic The automatic transmission has a vehicle if the shift lever is not fully transmission shift lever is not fully shift lever located on the console in P (Park) with the parking brake in P (Park) with the parking brake between the seats. firmly set. The vehicle can roll. firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do Do not leave the vehicle when the not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park on page 8 24. If you are pulling a Follow the proper steps to be sure ‑ P (Park): This position locks the trailer, see Driving Characteristics the vehicle will not move. See front wheels. It is the best position and Towing Tips on page 8‑54. Shifting Into Park on page 8‑24. to use when starting the engine If parking on a hill and pulling a because the vehicle cannot move Make sure the shift lever is trailer, see Driving Characteristics easily. fully in P (Park) before starting and Towing Tips on page 8‑54. the engine. The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system. 8-28 Driving and Operating

The regular brake must be fully To rock the vehicle back and forth to Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or applied first and then the shift lever get out of snow, ice or sand without N (Neutral) with the engine button pressed before shifting from damaging the transmission, see If running at high speed may P (Park) when the ignition key is in the Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑12. damage the transmission. The ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of N (Neutral): In this position, the repairs would not be covered by P (Park), ease pressure on the shift engine does not connect with the the vehicle warranty. Be sure the lever, then push the shift lever all wheels. To restart the engine when engine is not running at high the way into P (Park) as you the vehicle is already moving, use speed when shifting the vehicle. maintain brake application. Then N (Neutral) only. Also, use D (Drive): This position is for press the shift lever button and N (Neutral) when the vehicle is normal driving. It provides the best move the shift lever into another being towed. fuel economy. If more power is gear. See Shifting Out of Park on needed for passing, and the page 8‑25. { WARNING vehicle is: R (Reverse): Use this gear to . Going less than 35 mph back up. Shifting into a drive gear while the (56 km/h), push the accelerator Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) engine is running at high speed is pedal about halfway down. while the vehicle is moving dangerous. Unless your foot is . Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or forward could damage the firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. more, push the accelerator all transmission. The repairs would the way down. not be covered by the vehicle You could lose control and hit warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only people or objects. Do not shift after the vehicle is stopped. into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed. Driving and Operating 8-29

Notice: If the vehicle seems to Manual Mode shift automatically, but chassis accelerate slowly or not shift tuning is modified. See Selective gears when you go faster, and Driver Shift Control (DSC) Ride Control on page 8‑36. you continue to drive the vehicle Notice: If you drive the vehicle at If you move the shift lever that way, you could damage the high RPMs without upshifting forward or rearward, the transmission. Have the vehicle while using Driver Shift Control transmission will enter Manual serviced right away. You can (DSC), you could damage the Mode, and the DIC gear drive in L (Low) when you are vehicle. Always upshift when indicator will change to an M driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph) necessary while using DSC. followed by a number and D (Drive) for higher speeds representing the gear the vehicle until then. Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows is currently in. you to shift an automatic Manual Mode: This position is transmission similar to a manual 2. In Manual Mode, press the shift shown on the shifter as a +/−. transmission. To use the DSC lever forward to upshift or It allows the driver to select the feature: rearward to downshift. gears appropriate for current driving conditions. See Manual Mode on With Selective Ride Control Without Selective Ride Control page 8‑29 for more information. 1. Move the shift lever to the left 1. Move the shift lever to the left from D (Drive). from D (Drive). The vehicle will be in Sport The transmission will enter Mode. The gear indicator in the Manual Mode. The DIC gear DIC will still display a D for indicator will change to an M Drive, and the Sport Mode On followed by a number message will be displayed representing the gear the momentarily. See Driver vehicle is currently in. Information Center (DIC) on 2. In Manual Mode, press the shift page 4‑25. When you are in lever forward to upshift or Sport Mode, the vehicle will still rearward to downshift. 8-30 Driving and Operating

The transmission will only allow Drive Systems you to shift into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The All-Wheel Drive transmission will not automatically With this feature, engine power is shift to the next lower gear if the always sent to all four wheels. It is engine RPM is too high, nor to the fully automatic, and adjusts itself as next higher gear when the maximum needed for road conditions. engine RPM is reached. When using a compact spare tire While in the DSC mode, the on an AWD vehicle, the system transmission will automatically automatically detects the compact downshift when the vehicle comes spare and disables AWD. To restore Uplevel Display Shown, Base to a stop. This will allow for more AWD operation and prevent Model Similar power during take-off. excessive wear on system, replace The display on the instrument panel When accelerating the vehicle from the compact spare with a full-size cluster will show which gear the a stop in snowy and icy conditions, tire as soon as possible. See vehicle is in. The number indicates you may want to shift into second Compact Spare Tire on page 9‑76 the requested gear range when gear. A higher gear allows you to for more information. moving the shift lever forward or gain more traction on slippery rearward. surfaces. Driving and Operating 8-31

Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it there will not be enough time to becomes necessary to slam on the apply the brakes if that vehicle brakes and continue braking to suddenly slows or stops. Always Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a leave enough room up ahead to System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels stop, even with ABS. are slowing down. If one of the This vehicle has the Antilock Brake wheels is about to stop rolling, the Using ABS System (ABS), an advanced computer will separately work the electronic braking system that helps Do not pump the brakes. Just hold brakes at each wheel. prevent a braking skid. the brake pedal down firmly and let ABS can change the brake pressure ABS work. The ABS pump or motor When the engine is started and the to each wheel, as required, faster might be heard operating, and the vehicle begins to drive away, ABS than any driver could. This can help brake pedal might be felt to pulsate, checks itself. A momentary motor or the driver steer around the obstacle but this is normal. clicking noise might be heard while while braking hard. this test is going on, and it might Braking in Emergencies even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the ABS allows the driver to steer and pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates brake at the same time. In many on wheel speed and controls emergencies, steering can help braking pressure accordingly. more than even the very best Remember: ABS does not change braking. the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 4‑21. 8-32 Driving and Operating

Parking Brake There are also three Driver If the EPB is applied while the Information Center (DIC) messages. vehicle is in motion, a chime will See Brake System Messages on sound, and the DIC message page 4‑33 for more information. In RELEASE PARK BRAKE SWITCH case of insufficient electrical power, will be displayed. The vehicle will the EPB cannot be applied or decelerate as long as the switch is released. held in the up position. Releasing Before leaving the vehicle, check the EPB switch during the the park brake status lamp to insure deceleration will release the parking the park brake is applied. brake. If the switch is held in the up position until the vehicle comes to a EPB Apply stop, the EPB will remain applied. The EPB can be applied any time If the park brake status light flashes the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is continuously, the EPB is only The vehicle has an Electric Parking applied by momentarily lifting up on partially applied or released, Brake (EPB). The switch for the the EPB switch. Once fully applied, or there is a problem with the EPB. EPB is in the center console. The the park brake status light will be The DIC message SERVICE PARK EPB can always be activated, even on. While the brake is being applied, BRAKE will be displayed. If this light if the ignition is OFF. To prevent the status lamp will flash until full flashes continuously, release the draining the battery, avoid repeated apply is reached. If the light does EPB, and attempt to apply it again. cycles of the EPB system when the not come on, or remains flashing, If this light continues to flash, do not engine is not running. you need to have the vehicle drive the vehicle. See your dealer/ serviced. Do not drive the vehicle if retailer. The system has a Park Brake the park brake status light is Status light and a Park Brake flashing. See your dealer/retailer. Warning light. See Electric Parking See Electric Parking Brake Light on Brake Light on page 4 20. ‑ page 4‑20 for more information. Driving and Operating 8-33

If the park brake warning light is on, EPB Release Notice: Driving with the parking the EPB has detected an error in brake on can overheat the brake To release the EPB, place the another system and is operating system and cause premature ignition in the ON/RUN position, with reduced functionality. To apply wear or damage to brake system apply and hold the brake pedal, and the EPB when this light is on, lift up parts. Make sure that the parking push down momentarily on the EPB on the EPB switch and hold it in the brake is fully released and the switch. If you attempt to release the up position. Full application of the brake warning light is off before EPB without the brake pedal parking brake by the EPB system driving. applied, a chime will sound, and the may take a longer period of time DIC message PRESS BRAKE than normal when this light is on. Automatic EPB Release PEDAL TO RELEASE PARK Continue to hold the switch until the BRAKE will be displayed. The EPB The EPB will automatically release if park brake status light remains on. is released when the park brake the vehicle is running, placed into If the park brake warning light is on, status light is off. gear and an attempt is made to see your dealer/retailer. drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration If the park brake warning light is on, If the EPB fails to apply, the rear when the EPB is applied, to the EPB has detected an error in wheels should be blocked to preserve park brake lining life. another system and is operating prevent vehicle movement. with reduced functionality. To For maximum EPB force when release the EPB when this light is towing a trailer or parking on a hill, on, push down on the EPB switch pull the EPB switch twice. If you are and hold it in the down position. towing a trailer and parking on a hill, EPB release may take a longer see Driving Characteristics and period of time than normal when this Towing Tips on page 8‑54 for more light is on. Continue to hold the information. switch until the park brake status light is off. If the light is on, see your dealer/retailer. 8-34 Driving and Operating

Brake Assist Ride Control Systems This vehicle has a brake assist feature designed to assist the driver Traction Control in stopping or decreasing vehicle System (TCS) speed in emergency driving The vehicle has a traction control conditions. This feature uses the The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light stability system hydraulic brake system that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road flashes to indicate that the traction control module to supplement the control system is active. power brake system under conditions. On a front-wheel-drive conditions where the driver has vehicle, the system operates if it This warning light comes on if there quickly and forcefully applied the senses that one or both of the front is a problem with the traction control brake pedal in an attempt to quickly wheels are spinning or beginning to system. stop or slow down the vehicle. The lose traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive See Traction Off Light on (AWD) vehicle, the system will stability system hydraulic brake page 4‑21. When this warning control module increases brake operate if it senses that any of the light is on, the system does not pressure at each corner of the wheels are spinning or beginning to limit wheel spin. Adjust your vehicle until the ABS activates. lose traction. When this happens, driving accordingly. Minor brake pedal pulsations or the system brakes the spinning pedal movement during this time is wheel(s) and/or reduces engine TCS automatically comes on normal and the driver should power to limit wheel spin. whenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel spin, especially in continue to apply the brake pedal The system may be heard or felt as the driving situation dictates. slippery road conditions, the system while it is working, but this is should always be left on. But, TCS The brake assist feature will normal. automatically disengage when the can be turned off if needed. brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased. Driving and Operating 8-35

Notice: Do not repeatedly brake Driving on page 8‑9 for Electronic Stability or accelerate heavily when TCS is information on using TCS when off. The vehicle's driveline could driving in snowy or icy conditions. Control (ESC) be damaged. The vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer controlled system that assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. StabiliTrak activates when the To turn the system off, press g computer senses a difference The TCS off light comes on to located on the console to the right between the intended path and the indicate that the traction control of the shifter. direction the vehicle is actually system has been turned off. traveling. StabiliTrak selectively Press and release and the traction When TCS is switched off on AWD g applies braking pressure at any one vehicles, the system may still make control system turns off and the of the vehicle's brakes to help steer noise. This is normal and necessary traction control system warning light the vehicle in the intended direction. with the AWD hardware on the comes on. Press g again to turn the vehicle. system back on. For information on turning StabiliTrak off and on, see It might be necessary to turn the StabiliTrak System following in this system off if the vehicle gets stuck section. in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See If the Adding non‐GM accessories can Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑12 for affect the vehicle's performance. more information. See also Winter See Accessories and Modifications When the stability control system on page 9‑3 for more information. activates, the Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light flashes on the instrument panel. 8-36 Driving and Operating

This also occurs when traction Limited-Slip Differential control is activated. A noise might be heard or vibration might be felt in Vehicles with a limited-slip the brake pedal. This is normal. differential can give more traction on Continue to steer the vehicle in the snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. intended direction. It works like a standard differential StabiliTrak can be turned off if most of the time, but when traction If there is a problem detected with is low, this feature allows the drive needed by pressing and holding StabiliTrak, the TCS/StabiliTrak light g wheel with the most traction to comes on and the system is not until the StabiliTrak Off light comes move the vehicle. operational. See Electronic Stability on the instrument panel. For Control (ESC)/Traction Control information on turning TCS off and Selective Ride Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning on, see Traction Control System Light on page 4‑22. Driving should (TCS) in this section. The vehicle may have a ride control be adjusted accordingly. If cruise control is being used when system called Selective Ride Control. The system provides the StabiliTrak comes on automatically StabiliTrak activates, the cruise following performance benefits: whenever the vehicle is started. To control automatically disengages. assist with directional control of the Press the cruise control button to . Reduced Impact Harshness reengage when road conditions vehicle, the system should always . Improved Road Isolation be left on. allow. See Cruise Control on page 8‑37 for more information. . Improved High-Speed Stability . Improved Handling Response . Better Control of Body Ride Motions To switch from TOUR to SPORT mode, move the shift lever to the left while the transmission is in D (Drive). Driving and Operating 8-37

TOUR: Use for normal city and Cruise Control highway driving. This setting { WARNING provides a smooth, soft ride. With cruise control, the vehicle can maintain a speed of about 40 km/h Cruise control can be dangerous SPORT: Use where road conditions (25 mph) or more without keeping where you cannot drive safely at or personal preference demand your foot on the accelerator. Cruise a steady speed. So, do not use more control. This setting provides control does not work at speeds the cruise control on winding more feel , or response to road “ ” below 40 km/h (25 mph). roads or in heavy traffic. conditions through increased steering effort and suspension On vehicles with the Traction Cruise control can be dangerous tuning. Control System (TCS) or Electronic on slippery roads. On such roads, Stability Control (ESC), the system fast changes in tire traction can The setting can be changed at any may begin to limit wheel spin while time. Based on road conditions, cause excessive wheel slip, and you are using cruise control. If this steering wheel angle and the you could lose control. Do not use happens, the cruise control will vehicle speed, the system cruise control on slippery roads. automatically disengage. See automatically adjusts to provide the Traction Control System (TCS) on best handling while providing a page 8 34 or Electronic Stability smooth ride. The Tour and Sport ‑ Control (ESC) on page 8 35. modes will feel similar on a ‑ smooth road. 8-38 Driving and Operating

Setting Cruise Control 5 (On/Off): Press to turn the 3. Move the thumbwheel down cruise control system on and off. toward SET/− and release it. { WARNING An indicator light will turn on or off in The desired set speed briefly the instrument panel cluster. appears in the instrument panel If you leave your cruise control on cluster. (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise when you are not using cruise, \ control without erasing the set 4. Take your foot off the accelerator you might hit a button and go into speed from memory. pedal. cruise when you do not want to. You could be startled and even RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move the When the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off. lose control. Keep the cruise thumbwheel up to resume a set control switch off until you want to speed or to accelerate to a higher Resuming a Set Speed speed. use cruise control. If the brakes are applied or the SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the Cancel button is pressed while the thumbwheel down to set a speed or cruise control is at a set speed, the to decrease the speed. cruise control disengages without To set a speed: erasing the set speed from memory. 1. Press 5 to turn the cruise Once the vehicle reaches about control system on. The indicator 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move the light in the instrument panel thumbwheel up toward RES/+ cluster comes on. briefly . The vehicle returns to the speed selected previously and stays 2. Get to the speed desired. there.

The cruise control buttons are located on the steering wheel. Driving and Operating 8-39

Increasing Speed While Using . To slow down in very small Ending Cruise Control Cruise Control amounts, move the thumbwheel toward SET/− briefly and then There are three ways to disengage If the cruise control system is release it. Each time this is the cruise control: already engaged, done, the vehicle goes about . Step lightly on the brake pedal . Move the thumbwheel up toward 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower. or ; when cruise control RES/+ and hold it until the disengages, the indicator light Passing Another Vehicle While vehicle accelerates to the will not be lit. Using Cruise Control desired speed, and then release it. Use the accelerator pedal to . Press \ . increase the vehicle's speed. When . To increase the speed in small . Press 5 to turn the cruise you take your foot off the pedal, the amounts, move the thumbwheel vehicle will slow down to the control system off completely. up toward RES/+ briefly and previously set cruise control speed. The cruise control cannot be then release it. Each time this is resumed. done, the vehicle goes about Using Cruise Control on Hills 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. Erasing Speed Memory How well the cruise control works The cruise control set speed Reducing Speed While Using on hills depends upon the vehicle's memory is erased when the cruise Cruise Control speed, load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, control or the ignition is turned off. If the cruise control system is you might have to step on the already engaged, accelerator pedal to maintain the . Move the thumbwheel toward vehicle's speed. When going SET/− and hold until the desired downhill, you might have to brake or lower speed is reached, then shift to a lower gear to maintain the release it. vehicle's speed. When the brakes are applied the cruise control shuts off. 8-40 Driving and Operating

How the System Works Object Detection { WARNING Systems URPA comes on automatically The Ultrasonic Rear Parking when the shift lever is moved into Ultrasonic Parking Assist Assist (URPA) system does not R (Reverse). A single tone sounds replace driver vision. It cannot to indicate the system is working. For vehicles with the Ultrasonic detect: URPA operates only at speeds less Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, . Objects that are below the than 8 km/h (5 mph). it assists the driver with parking bumper, underneath the and avoiding objects while in An obstacle is indicated by audible vehicle, or if they are too R (Reverse). URPA operates at beeps. The interval between the close or far from the vehicle speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph), beeps becomes shorter as the and the sensors on the rear bumper . Children, pedestrians, vehicle gets closer to the obstacle. detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft.) bicyclists, or pets. When the distance is less than behind the vehicle, and at least 30 cm (12 in.) the beeps are If you do not use proper care continuous. 20 cm (8 in.) off the ground. before and while backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could To be detected, objects must be at occur. Even with URPA, always least 20 cm (8 in.) off the ground and below trunk level. Objects must check behind the vehicle before also be within 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the backing up. While backing, be rear bumper. The distance objects sure to look for objects and check can be detected may be less during the vehicle's mirrors. warmer or humid weather. PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to indicate that URPA is off. The message disappears after a short period of time. Driving and Operating 8-41

Turning the System On and Off When the System Does Not . An object was hanging out of the Seem to Work Properly trunk during the last drive cycle. The URPA system can be turned on Once the object is removed, and off using the park assist button SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this URPA will return to normal located next to the shift lever. message occurs, take the vehicle to operation. your dealer/retailer to repair the . system. The vehicle's bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle to PARK ASSIST OFF: If the URPA your dealer/retailer to repair the system does not activate due to a system. temporary condition, the message . displays on the DIC, see Driver Other conditions may affect Information Center (DIC) on system performance, such as The park assist button lights up page 4 25 for more information. vibrations from a jackhammer or when the system is on and turns off ‑ This can occur under the following the compression of air brakes on when it has been disabled. conditions: a very large truck. URPA defaults to the on setting If the system is still disabled, after . The driver has disabled the each time the vehicle is started. system. driving forward at least 40 km/h (25 mph), take the vehicle to your . The ultrasonic sensors are not dealer/retailer. clean. Keep the vehicle's rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see Exterior Care on page 9‑84. 8-42 Driving and Operating

Side Blind Zone SBZA Detection Zones WARNING (Continued) Alert (SBZA) The SBZA sensor covers a zone of approximately one lane over from Failure to use proper care when The vehicle may have a Side Blind both sides of the vehicle, changing lanes may result in Zone Alert (SBZA) system. Read 3.5 m (11 ft.). This zone starts at this entire section before using the damage to the vehicle, injury, each side mirror and goes back system. or death. Always check the approximately 5.0 m (16 ft.). The outside and rearview mirrors, height of the zone is approximately { WARNING glance over your shoulder, and between 0.5 m (1.5 ft.) and use the turn signal before 2.0 m (6 ft.) off the ground. SBZA is only a lane changing aid changing lanes. and does not replace driver The SBZA detection zones do not vision. SBZA does not detect: When the system detects a vehicle change if the vehicle is towing a in the side blind zone, amber SBZA trailer. So be extra careful when . Vehicles outside the side displays will light up in the side changing lanes while towing a blind zones which may be mirrors. This indicates that it may be trailer. rapidly approaching. unsafe to change lanes. Before . Pedestrians, bicyclists, making a lane change, always or animals. check the SBZA display, check the (Continued) outside and rearview mirrors, look over your shoulder for vehicles and hazards, and use the turn signal. Driving and Operating 8-43

How the System Works SBZA displays do not come on When the System Does Not Seem while the vehicle is approaching or To Work Properly passing other vehicles. At speeds Occasional missed alerts can occur greater than 32 km/h (20 mph), under normal circumstances and will SBZA displays may come on when increase in wet conditions. The a vehicle you have passed remains system does not need to be in or drops back into the serviced due to an occasional Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror detection zone. missed alert. The number of missed Display Display SBZA can be disabled through alerts will increase with increased Vehicle Personalization. See rainfall or road spray. When the vehicle is started, both Vehicle Personalization on outside mirror displays will briefly If the SBZA displays do not light up page 4 38 for more information. come on to indicate that the system ‑ when the system is on and vehicles If the SBZA is disabled by the is operating. While driving forward, are in the blind zone, the system driver, the SBZA mirror displays will the left or right side mirror SBZA may need service. Take the vehicle not light up during normal driving. display will light up if a vehicle is to your dealer/retailer. detected in that blind zone. If you SBZA is designed to ignore activate a turn signal and a vehicle stationary objects; however, the has been detected on the same system may occasionally light up side, the SBZA display will flash to due to guard rails, signs, trees, give you extra warning not to shrubs, and other stationary objects. change lanes. This is normal system operation, the vehicle does not need service. 8-44 Driving and Operating

SBZA does not operate when the When SBZA is disabled for any SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS. left or right corners of the rear reason other than the driver turning UNAVAILABLE: This message bumper are covered with mud, dirt, it off, the driver will not be able to indicates that the SBZA system is snow, ice, slush, or in heavy turn SBZA back on using Vehicle disabled because the sensor is rainstorms. For cleaning Personalization. The SIDE BLIND blocked and cannot detect vehicles instructions, see Exterior Care on ZONE ALERT ON option will not be in the blind zone. The sensor may page 9‑84. If the infotainment selectable if the conditions for be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, display still shows the SIDE BLIND normal system operation are not slush, or even heavy rainstorms. ZONE SYS. UNAVAILABLE met. Until normal operating This message may also activate message after cleaning the bumper, conditions for SBZA are met, you during heavy rain or due to road see your dealer/retailer. should not rely upon SBZA while spray. The vehicle does not need The SBZA displays may remain on driving. service. For cleaning, see Exterior Care on page 9‑84. if a trailer is attached to the vehicle, SBZA Error Messages or a bicycle or object is extending SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE out to either side of the vehicle. The following messages may ALERT SYSTEM: If this message appear on the infotainment display: appears, both SBZA displays will SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT remain on indicating there is a SYSTEM OFF: This message problem with the SBZA system. indicates that the driver has turned If these displays remain on after the system off. continued driving, the system needs service. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer. Driving and Operating 8-45

FCC Information { WARNING WARNING (Continued) See Radio Frequency Statement on page 12‑17 for FCC information. The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) Even though the vehicle has the system does not replace driver RVC system, always check Rear Vision vision. RVC does not: carefully before backing up by Camera (RVC) . Detect objects that are checking behind and around the vehicle. This vehicle may have an RVC outside the camera's field of system. Read this entire section view, below the bumper, or underneath the vehicle. An image appears on the navigation before using it. screen with the message Check The RVC system can assist the . Detect children, pedestrians, Surroundings for Safety when the driver when backing up by bicyclists, or pets. vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). displaying a view of the area behind Do not back the vehicle by only The navigation screen goes to the the vehicle. looking at the RVC screen, or use previous screen after approximately the screen during longer, higher 10 seconds once the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse). speed backing maneuvers or where there could be cross-traffic. To cancel the delay, do one of the Your judged distances using the following: screen will differ from actual . Pressing a hard key on the distances. navigation system. So if you do not use proper care . Shifting in to P (Park). before backing up, you could hit a . Reach a vehicle speed of vehicle, child, pedestrian, 8 km/h (5 mph). bicyclist, or pet, resulting in vehicle damage, injury, or death. (Continued) 8-46 Driving and Operating

Turning the Rear Vision Camera Symbols To turn the symbols on or off: System On or Off The navigation system may have a 1. Shift into P (Park). To turn the RVC system on or off: feature that lets the driver view 2. Press the CONFIG button to 1. Shift into P (Park). symbols on the navigation screen enter the configure menu while using the RVC. The Ultrasonic options. 2. Press the CONFIG button to Rear Park Assist (URPA) system enter the configure menu must not be disabled to use the 3. Select Display options. caution symbols. The error message 4. Select Rear Camera Options. 3. Select Display. Rear Parking Assist Symbols Unavailable may display if URPA 5. Select Symbols. When a check has been disabled and the symbols mark appears next to the have been turned on. See Symbols option, symbols will Ultrasonic Parking Assist on appear. page 8‑40. Guidelines The symbols appear and may cover The RVC system has a guideline an object when viewing the overlay that can help the driver align navigation screen when an object is the vehicle when backing into a detected by the URPA system. parking spot. To turn the guidelines on or off: 1. Shift into P (Park). 2. Press the CONFIG button to 4. Select Rear Camera Options. enter the configure menu 5. Select Camera. When a check options. mark appears next to the Camera option, then the RVC system is on. Driving and Operating 8-47

3. Select Display Rear Vision Camera Location 4. Select Rear Camera Options. 5. Select Guidelines. When a check mark appears next to the Guidelines option, guidelines will appear. Rear Vision Camera Error Messages Service Rear Vision Camera System: This message can display when the system is not receiving information it requires from other vehicle systems. The camera is located above the If any other problem occurs or if a license plate. problem persists, see your dealer/ retailer. The area displayed by the camera is limited, it does not display objects that are close to either corner or under the bumper and can vary depending on vehicle orientation or road conditions. The distance of the image that appears on the screen is different from the actual distance. A. View displayed by the camera. The following illustration shows the field of view that the camera B. Corner of the rear bumper. provides. 8-48 Driving and Operating

When the System Does Not Fuel Seem To Work Properly Use of the recommended fuel is an The RVC system may not work important part of the proper properly or display a clear image if: maintenance of this vehicle. To help . The RVC is turned off. See keep the engine clean and maintain “Turning the Rear Camera optimum vehicle performance, we System On or Off” earlier in this recommend the use of gasoline section. advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. . It is dark. Look for the TOP TIER label on the . The sun or the beam of fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets headlamps are shining directly enhanced detergency standards into the camera lens. developed by auto companies. A list . Ice, snow, mud, or anything else of marketers providing TOP TIER builds up on the camera lens. Detergent Gasoline can be found at Clean the lens, rinse it with www.toptiergas.com. water, and wipe it with a soft cloth. . The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the position and mounting angle of the camera can change or the camera can be affected. Be sure to have the camera and its position and mounting angle checked at your dealer/retailer. Driving and Operating 8-49

The 8th digit of the Vehicle If the vehicle has the 3.6L Gasoline Specifications Identification Number (VIN) shows (VIN Code V), use premium the code letter or number that unleaded gasoline with a posted At a minimum, gasoline should identifies the vehicle's engine. octane rating of 91 or higher. You meet ASTM specification The VIN is at the top left of the can also use regular unleaded D 4814 in the United States or instrument panel. See Vehicle gasoline rated at 87 octane or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Identification Number (VIN) on higher, but the vehicle's acceleration Canada. Some gasolines contain page 11‑1. could be slightly reduced, and a an octane-enhancing additive called slight audible knocking noise, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese Recommended Fuel commonly referred to as spark tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend knock, might be heard. If the octane against the use of gasolines If the vehicle has a 2.4L L4 engine is less than 87, a heavy knocking containing MMT. See Fuel Additives (VIN Code C) or the 3.0L V6 engine noise might be heard when driving. on page 8‑50 for additional (VIN Code G), use regular unleaded If this occurs, use a gasoline rated information. gasoline with a posted octane rating at 87 octane or higher as soon as of 87 or higher. If the octane rating possible. Otherwise, you could is less than 87, an audible knocking damage the engine. If heavy noise, commonly referred to as knocking is heard when using spark knock, might be heard when gasoline rated at 87 octane or driving. If this occurs, use a higher, the engine needs service. gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine needs service. 8-50 Driving and Operating

California Fuel Fuels in Foreign Fuel Additives Requirements Countries To provide cleaner air, all gasolines If the vehicle is certified to meet If you plan on driving in another in the United States are now California Emissions Standards, it is country outside the United States or required to contain additives that designed to operate on fuels that Canada, the proper fuel might be help prevent engine and fuel system meet California specifications. See hard to find. Never use leaded deposits from forming, allowing the the underhood emission control gasoline or any other fuel not emission control system to work label. If this fuel is not available in recommended in the previous text properly. In most cases, nothing states adopting California emissions on fuel. Costly repairs caused by should have to be added to the fuel. standards, the vehicle will operate use of improper fuel would not be However, some gasolines contain satisfactorily on fuels meeting covered by the vehicle warranty. only the minimum amount of federal specifications, but emission additive required to meet U.S. To check the fuel availability, ask an Environmental Protection Agency control system performance might auto club, or contact a major oil be affected. The malfunction regulations. To help keep fuel company that does business in the injectors and intake valves clean, indicator lamp could turn on and the country where you will be driving. vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. or if the vehicle experiences See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on problems due to dirty injectors or page 4‑17. If this occurs, return to valves, look for gasoline that is your authorized dealer/retailer for advertised as TOP TIER Detergent diagnosis. If it is determined that the Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER condition is caused by the type of label on the fuel pump to ensure fuel used, repairs might not be gasoline meets enhanced covered by the vehicle warranty. detergency standards developed by the auto companies. A list of marketers providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at www.toptiergas.com. Driving and Operating 8-51

For customers who do not use TOP However, E85 (85% ethanol) and Some gasolines that are not TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, other fuels containing more than reformulated for low one bottle of GM Fuel System 10% ethanol must not be used in emissions can contain an Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel vehicles that were not designed for octane-enhancing additive called tank at every engine oil change, can those fuels. methylcyclopentadienyl help clean deposits from fuel Notice: This vehicle was not manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel designed for fuel that contains the attendant where you buy System Treatment PLUS is the only methanol. Do not use fuel gasoline whether the fuel contains gasoline additive recommended by containing methanol. It can MMT. We recommend against the General Motors. It is available at corrode metal parts in the fuel use of such gasolines. Fuels your dealer/retailer. system and also damage plastic containing MMT can reduce the life Gasolines containing oxygenates, and rubber parts. That damage of spark plugs and the performance such as ethers and ethanol, and would not be covered under the of the emission control system could reformulated gasolines might be vehicle warranty. be affected. The malfunction available in your area. We indicator lamp might turn on. If this recommend that you use these occurs, return to your dealer/retailer gasolines, if they comply with the for service. specifications described earlier. 8-52 Driving and Operating

Filling the Tank The tethered fuel cap is behind Do not top off or overfill the tank and the fuel door on the vehicle's wait a few seconds before removing passenger side. Turn the fuel cap the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted { WARNING counterclockwise to remove. While surfaces as soon as possible. See Fuel vapor burns violently and a refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap Exterior Care on page 9‑84. from the disk on the end of the fuel fuel fire can cause bad injuries. cap to the mating feature on the fuel To help avoid injuries to you and { WARNING door hinge. Reinstall the cap by others, read and follow all the turning it clockwise until it clicks If a fire starts while you are instructions on the fuel pump refueling, do not remove the island. Turn off the engine when nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by refueling. Do not smoke near fuel { WARNING shutting off the pump or by or when refueling the vehicle. Do Fuel can spray out on you if you notifying the station attendant. not use cellular phones. Keep open the fuel cap too quickly. Leave the area immediately. sparks, flames, and smoking If you spill fuel and then materials away from fuel. Do not something ignites it, you could be Notice: If a new fuel cap is leave the fuel pump unattended badly burned. This spray can needed, be sure to get the right when refueling the vehicle. This is happen if the tank is nearly full, type of cap from your dealer/ against the law in some places. and is more likely in hot weather. retailer. The wrong type fuel cap Do not re-enter the vehicle while Open the fuel cap slowly and wait might not fit properly, might pumping fuel. Keep children away for any hiss noise to stop. Then cause the malfunction indicator from the fuel pump; never let unscrew the cap all the way. lamp to light, and could damage children pump fuel. the fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑17. Driving and Operating 8-53

Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing Container . Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing { WARNING with the inside of the fill Information opening before operating the Only use towing equipment that has Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be while it is in the vehicle. Static been designed for the vehicle. maintained until the filling is Contact your dealer/retailer or electricity discharge from the complete. container can ignite the fuel trailering retailer for assistance with vapor. You can be badly burned . Do not smoke while preparing the vehicle for towing a trailer. and the vehicle damaged if this pumping fuel. occurs. To help avoid injury to you . Do not use a cellular phone See the following trailer towing and others: while pumping fuel. information in this section: . Dispense fuel only into . For information on driving while approved containers. towing a trailer, see “Driving Characteristics and . Do not fill a container while it Towing Tips”. is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, . For maximum vehicle and trailer or on any surface other than weights, see “Trailer Towing”. the ground. . For information on equipment to (Continued) tow a trailer, see “Towing Equipment”. 8-54 Driving and Operating

For information on towing a disabled The following information has vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on WARNING (Continued) important trailering tips and rules for page 9‑81. For information on your safety and that of your towing the vehicle behind another Pull a trailer only if all the steps in passengers. Read this section vehicle — such as a motorhome, this section have been followed. carefully before pulling a trailer. see Recreational Vehicle Towing on Ask your dealer/retailer for advice page 9‑81. and information about towing a Pulling A Trailer trailer with the vehicle. Here are some important points: Driving Characteristics . There are many laws, including The vehicle can tow a trailer when and Towing Tips speed limit restrictions that apply equipped with the proper trailer to trailering. Check for legal towing equipment. For trailer requirements with state or { WARNING ing capacity, see Trailer Towing provincial police. (2.4L L4 Engine) on page 8‑58 or The driver can lose control when Trailer Towing (3.0L and 3.6L . Do not tow a trailer at all during pulling a trailer if the correct V6 Engines) on page 8‑58. the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles) equipment is not used or the Trailering changes handling, the new vehicle is driven. The vehicle is not driven properly. acceleration, braking, durability engine, axle or other parts could For example, if the trailer is too and fuel economy. With the added be damaged. heavy, the brakes may not work weight, the engine, transmission, . During the first 800 km well — or even at all. The driver wheel assemblies and tires are (500 miles) that a trailer is and passengers could be forced to work harder and under towed, do not drive over 80 km/h seriously injured. The vehicle greater loads. The trailer also adds (50 mph) and do not make starts may also be damaged; the wind resistance, increasing the at full throttle. This reduces wear resulting repairs would not be pulling requirements. For safe on the vehicle. covered by the vehicle warranty. trailering, correctly use the proper trailering equipment. . The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). (Continued) Use a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often. Driving and Operating 8-55

. Do not use the Fuel Saver Mode During the trip, check regularly to be Passing when towing. sure that the load is secure, and the More passing distance is needed . lamps and trailer brakes are working Obey speed limit restrictions. when towing a trailer. Because the properly. Do not drive faster than the rig is longer, it is necessary to go maximum posted speed for Towing with a Stability Control farther beyond the passed vehicle trailers, or no more than 90 km/h before returning to the lane. (55 mph), to reduce wear on the System vehicle. When towing, the sound of the Backing Up stability control system might be Driving with a Trailer Hold the bottom of the steering heard. The system is reacting to the wheel with one hand. To move the Towing a trailer requires experience. vehicle movement caused by the trailer to the left, move that hand to Get familiar with handling and trailer, which mainly occurs during the left. To move the trailer to the braking with the added trailer cornering. This is normal when right, move your hand to the right. weight. The vehicle is now longer towing heavier trailers. Always back up slowly and, and not as responsive as the Following Distance if possible, have someone vehicle is by itself. guide you. Check all trailer hitch parts and Stay at least twice as far behind the attachments, safety chains, vehicle ahead as you would when electrical connectors, lamps, tires driving the vehicle without a trailer. and mirror adjustments. If the trailer This can help to avoid situations has electric brakes, start the vehicle that require heavy braking and and trailer moving and then apply sudden turns. the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. 8-56 Driving and Operating

Making Turns When towing a trailer, the arrows on When towing at high altitude on the instrument panel flash for turns steep uphill grades, engine coolant Notice: Making very sharp turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are boils at a lower temperature than at while trailering could cause the burned out. Check occasionally to normal altitudes. If the engine is trailer to come in contact with the be sure the trailer bulbs are still turned off immediately after towing vehicle. The vehicle could be working. at high altitude on steep uphill damaged. Avoid making very grades, the vehicle could show sharp turns while trailering. Driving On Grades signs similar to engine overheating. When turning with a trailer, make Reduce speed and shift to a To avoid this, let the engine run wider turns than normal so the lower gear before starting down a while parked, preferably on level trailer will not strike soft shoulders, long or steep downgrade. If the ground, with the transmission in curbs, road signs, trees or other transmission is not shifted down, the P (Park) for a few minutes before objects. Use the turn signal well in brakes might have to be used so turning the engine off. If the advance and avoid jerky or sudden much that they would get hot and no overheat warning comes on, see maneuvers. longer work well. Engine Overheating on page 9‑21. Turn Signals When Towing a The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). Trailer Use a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often. The turn signal indicators on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping. Driving and Operating 8-57

Parking on Hills 3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance When Trailer place, release the brake pedal Towing until the chocks absorb the load. { WARNING The vehicle needs service more 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then often when pulling a trailer. See this Parking the vehicle on a hill with apply the parking brake and shift manual's Maintenance Schedule or the trailer attached can be into P (Park). Index for more information. Things dangerous. If something goes 5. Release the brake pedal. that are especially important in wrong, the rig could start to move. trailer operation are automatic People can be injured, and both Leaving After Parking on a Hill transmission fluid, engine oil, axle the vehicle and the trailer can be 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal lubricant, belts, cooling system and damaged. When possible, always while you: brake system. Inspect these before park the rig on a flat surface. and during the trip. . Start the engine. If parking the rig on a hill: Check periodically to see that all . Shift into a gear. hitch nuts and bolts are tight. 1. Press the brake pedal, but do . Release the parking brake. not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn Engine Cooling When Trailer the wheels into the curb if facing 2. Let up on the brake pedal. Towing downhill or into traffic if facing 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is The cooling system may temporarily uphill. clear of the chocks. overheat during severe operating 2. Have someone place chocks 4. Stop and have someone pick up conditions. See Engine Overheating under the trailer wheels. and store the chocks. on page 9‑21. 8-58 Driving and Operating

Trailer Towing It depends on how the rig is used. Weight of the Trailer Tongue For example, speed, altitude, road The tongue load (A) of any trailer is (2.4L L4 Engine) grades, outside temperature and an important weight to measure Vehicles with a four cylinder engine how much the vehicle is used to pull because it affects the total gross are neither designed nor intended to a trailer are all important. It can weight of the vehicle. The Gross tow a trailer. depend on any special equipment Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the on the vehicle, and the amount of curb weight of the vehicle, any tongue weight the vehicle can carry. Trailer Towing (3.0L and cargo carried in it, and the people See Weight of the Trailer Tongue “ ” who will be riding in the vehicle. 3.6L V6 Engines) later in this section for more If there are a lot of options, Before pulling a trailer, there are information. equipment, passengers or cargo in three important considerations that Maximum trailer weight is calculated the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue have to do with weight: assuming only the driver is in the weight the vehicle can carry, which . The weight of the trailer. tow vehicle and it has all the will also reduce the trailer weight the required trailering equipment. The . The weight of the trailer tongue. vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, weight of additional optional the tongue load must be added to . The total weight on your equipment, passengers and cargo in the GVW because the vehicle will vehicle's tires. the tow vehicle must be subtracted be carrying that weight, too. See Weight of the Trailer from the maximum trailer weight. Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑12 Ask your dealer/retailer for trailering for more information. How heavy can a trailer safely be? information or advice, or write us at For a vehicle with a V6 engine, it our Customer Assistance Offices. should never weigh more than See Customer Assistance Offices 454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that (US, Can) on page 12‑3 for more can be too heavy. information. Driving and Operating 8-59

Total Weight on Your . Will any holes be made in the Vehicle's Tires body of the vehicle when the trailer hitch is installed? If there Be sure the vehicle's tires are are, seal the holes when the inflated to the upper limit for cold hitch is removed. If the holes are tires. These numbers can be found not sealed, dirt, water, and on the Tire-Loading Information deadly carbon monoxide (CO) label. See Vehicle Load Limits on from the exhaust can get into the page 8‑12. Make sure not to go vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on over the GVW limit for the vehicle, page 8‑26. including the weight of the trailer tongue. Safety Chains The trailer tongue (A) should weigh Always attach chains between the Towing Equipment vehicle and the trailer. Cross the 10‐15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). safety chains under the tongue of Hitches the trailer to help prevent the tongue After loading the trailer, weigh the Use the correct hitch equipment. from contacting the road if it trailer and then the tongue, See your dealer/retailer or a hitch becomes separated from the hitch. separately, to see if the weights are dealer for assistance. Leave enough slack so the rig can proper. If they are not, adjustments turn. Never allow safety chains to . The rear bumper on the vehicle might be made by moving some drag on the ground. items around in the trailer. is not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper. 8-60 Driving and Operating

Trailer Brakes Conversions and Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is Does the trailer have its own Add-Ons not operating. brakes? Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes The vehicle has an airbag system. so they are installed, adjusted and Add-On Electrical Before attempting to add anything maintained properly. Equipment electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Because the vehicle has antilock Notice: Do not add anything Vehicle on page 2 36 and Adding brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's ‑ electrical to the vehicle unless Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped brake system. If this is done, both you check with your dealer/ Vehicle on page 2‑37. brake systems will not work well, retailer first. Some electrical or at all. equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Vehicle Care 9-1

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . 9-15 Bulb Replacement Vehicle Care Cooling System ...... 9-17 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-34 Engine Coolant ...... 9-18 Halogen Bulbs ...... 9-34 General Information Engine Overheating ...... 9-21 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Overheated Engine Protection Lighting ...... 9-35 General Information ...... 9-2 Operating Mode ...... 9-23 Headlamps, Front Turn Signal California Proposition Power Steering Fluid ...... 9-23 and Parking Lamps ...... 9-35 65 Warning ...... 9-3 Washer Fluid ...... 9-24 Fog Lamps ...... 9-37 California Perchlorate Materials Brakes ...... 9-25 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Requirements ...... 9-3 Brake Fluid ...... 9-26 Stoplamps, and Back-Up Accessories and Battery ...... 9-27 Lamps ...... 9-37 Modifications ...... 9-3 Starter Switch Check ...... 9-28 License Plate Lamp ...... 9-38 Vehicle Checks Automatic Transmission Shift Replacement Bulbs ...... 9-39 Lock Control System Doing Your Own Electrical System Service Work ...... 9-4 Check ...... 9-29 Hood ...... 9-5 Ignition Transmission Lock Electrical System Engine Compartment Check ...... 9-29 Overload ...... 9-40 Fuses and Circuit Overview ...... 9-6 Park Brake and P (Park) Breakers ...... 9-40 Engine Oil ...... 9-11 Mechanism Check ...... 9-30 Engine Compartment Fuse Engine Oil Life System ...... 9-13 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . 9-30 Block ...... 9-41 Automatic Transmission Headlamp Aiming Instrument Panel Fuse Fluid ...... 9-14 Headlamp Aiming ...... 9-31 Block ...... 9-44 Rear Compartment Fuse Block ...... 9-46 9-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires Wheel Alignment and Tire General Information Tires ...... 9-48 Balance ...... 9-68 Winter Tires ...... 9-48 Wheel Replacement ...... 9-69 For service and parts needs, visit Tire Sidewall Labeling ...... 9-49 Tire Chains ...... 9-70 your dealer/retailer. You will receive Tire Designations ...... 9-51 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 9-70 genuine GM parts and GM-trained Tire Terminology and Tire Changing ...... 9-72 and supported service people. Definitions ...... 9-52 Compact Spare Tire ...... 9-76 Genuine GM parts have one of Tire Pressure ...... 9-56 these marks: Tire Pressure Monitor Jump Starting System ...... 9-57 Jump Starting ...... 9-77 Tire Pressure Monitor Towing Operation ...... 9-59 Towing the Vehicle ...... 9-81 Tire Inspection ...... 9-62 Recreational Vehicle Tire Rotation ...... 9-62 Towing ...... 9-81 When It Is Time for New Tires ...... 9-63 Appearance Care Buying New Tires ...... 9-64 Exterior Care ...... 9-84 Different Size Tires and Interior Care ...... 9-88 Wheels ...... 9-66 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 9-67 Vehicle Care 9-3

California Proposition California Perchlorate Accessories and 65 Warning Materials Requirements Modifications Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag accessories to the vehicle can affect known to the State of California to initiators, pretensioners, vehicle performance and safety, cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in including such things as airbags, other reproductive harm. Engine remote keyless transmitters, may braking, stability, ride and handling, exhaust, many parts and systems, contain perchlorate materials. emissions systems, aerodynamics, many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary. durability, and electronic systems wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see like antilock brakes, traction control, emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ and stability control. Some of these perchlorate. accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation or use of non‐GM certified parts, including control module modifications, is not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts. 9-4 Vehicle Care

GM Accessories are designed to Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service complement and function with other work, use the proper service systems on the vehicle. Your GM manual. It tells you much more dealer/retailer can accessorize the Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle vehicle using genuine GM Service Work than this manual can. To order the Accessories. When you go to your proper service manual, see Service GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM { WARNING Publications Ordering Information on Accessories, you will know that page 12‑13. GM-trained and supported service You can be injured and the This vehicle has an airbag system. technicians will perform the work vehicle could be damaged if you Before attempting to do your own using genuine GM Accessories. try to do service work on a vehicle service work, see Airbag System Also, see Adding Equipment to the without knowing enough about it. Check on page 2‑38. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on . Be sure you have sufficient Keep a record with all parts receipts page 2‑37. knowledge, experience, and list the mileage and the date the proper replacement of any service work performed. parts, and tools before See Maintenance Records on attempting any vehicle page 10‑10. maintenance task. . Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other fasteners. English and metric fasteners can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are used, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. Vehicle Care 9-5

Hood To open the hood, do the following:

2. Push the secondary hood release lever, located under the center of the hood above the grille, to the right to disengage it. 1. Pull the interior hood release handle located to the left of the 3. Lift the hood. steering column below the Before closing the hood, make sure instrument panel. all the filler caps are properly secured. Pull the hood down and close it firmly. 9-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.4 L L4 Engine Vehicle Care 9-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Power Steering Reservoir and page 9‑15. Cap. See Power Steering Fluid B. Engine Cover. on page 9‑23. C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine H. Engine Coolant Reservoir and Pressure Cap. See Engine Oil on page 9‑11. Coolant on page 9‑18. D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine I. Battery Cover. See Battery on Oil on page 9‑11. page 9‑27. E. Transmission Fluid Cap and Dipstick. See Automatic J. Engine Compartment Fuse Transmission Fluid on Block on page 9‑41. page 9‑14. K. Windshield Washer Fluid F. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on Reservoir. See Brakes on page 9‑24. page 9‑25. 9-8 Vehicle Care

3.0 L V6 Engine Vehicle Care 9-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Brake Master Cylinder page 9‑15. Reservoir. See Brakes on B. Power Steering Reservoir and page 9‑25. Cap. See Power Steering Fluid H. Engine Coolant Reservoir and on page 9‑23. Pressure Cap. See Engine C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Coolant on page 9‑18. Oil on page 9‑11. I. Battery Cover. See Battery on D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of page 9‑27. View). See Engine Oil on J. Engine Compartment Fuse page 9‑11. Block on page 9‑41. E. Engine Cover. K. Windshield Washer Fluid F. Transmission Fluid Cap and Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on Dipstick. See Automatic page 9‑24. Transmission Fluid on page 9‑14. 9-10 Vehicle Care

3.6 L V6 Engine Vehicle Care 9-11

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Brake Master Cylinder Engine Oil page 9‑15. Reservoir. See Brakes on Checking Engine Oil B. Power Steering Reservoir and page 9‑25. Cap. See Power Steering Fluid H. Engine Coolant Reservoir and It is a good idea to check the engine on page 9‑23. Pressure Cap. See Engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Coolant on page 9‑18. get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must Oil on page 9 11. I. Battery Cover. See Battery on ‑ be on level ground. D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of page 9‑27. View). See Engine Oil on J. Engine Compartment Fuse The engine oil dipstick handle page 9 11. Block on page 9 41. is a yellow loop. See Engine ‑ ‑ Compartment Overview on E. Engine Cover. K. Windshield Washer Fluid page 9‑6 for the location of the F. Transmission Fluid Cap and Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on engine oil dipstick. page 9 24. Dipstick. See Automatic ‑ 1. Turn off the engine and give the Transmission Fluid on oil several minutes to drain back page 9‑14. into the oil pan. If this is not done, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. 9-12 Vehicle Care

When to Add Engine Oil . American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 9‑6 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. If the oil is below the cross-hatched Oils meeting these requirements area at the tip of the dipstick, Add enough oil to put the level should have the starburst add at least one liter/quart of the somewhere in the proper operating symbol on the container. This recommended oil. This section range. Push the dipstick all the way symbol indicates that the oil has explains what kind of oil to use. back in when through. been certified by the American For engine oil crankcase capacity, Petroleum Institute (API). see Capacities and Specifications What Kind of Engine Oil to Use on page 11‑2. Look for three things: Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Notice: Do not add too much oil. . GM6094M Standard GM6094M and showing If the engine has so much oil Use only an oil that meets GM the American Petroleum Institute that the oil level gets above the Standard GM6094M. Certified For Gasoline Engines cross-hatched area that shows starburst symbol. Failure to use . the proper operating range, the SAE 5W-30 the recommended oil can result engine could be damaged. SAE 5W-30 is best for the in engine damage not covered by vehicle. These numbers on an the vehicle warranty. oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. Vehicle Care 9-13

Cold Temperature Operation Engine Oil Life System as possible within the next 1 000 km (600 miles). It is possible that, If in an area of extreme cold, where When to Change Engine Oil the temperature falls below −29°C if driving under the best conditions, (−20°F), use either an SAE 5W-30 This vehicle has a computer system the oil life system might not indicate synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 that indicates when to change the that an oil change is necessary for engine oil. Both provide easier cold engine oil and filter. This is based over a year. However, the engine oil starting for the engine at extremely on engine revolutions and engine and filter must be changed at least low temperatures. Always use temperature, and not on mileage. once a year and at this time the an oil that meets the required Based on driving conditions, the system must be reset. Your dealer/ specification, GM6094M. mileage at which an oil change is retailer has trained service people indicated can vary considerably. who will perform this work using Engine Oil Additives / Engine For the oil life system to work genuine parts and reset the system. Oil Flushes properly, the system must be reset It is also important to check the oil every time the oil is changed. regularly and keep it at the proper Do not add anything to the oil. level. The recommended oils with the When the system has calculated starburst symbol that meet GM that oil life has been diminished, it If the system is ever reset standards are all that is needed for indicates that an oil change is accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) good performance and engine necessary. A “Change Engine since the last oil change. protection. Oil Soon” message comes on. See Engine Oil Messages on Remember to reset the oil life Engine oil system flushes are not system whenever the oil is changed. recommended and could cause page 4‑35. Change the oil as soon engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. 9-14 Vehicle Care

How to Reset the Engine Oil What to Do with Used Oil Automatic Transmission Life System Used engine oil contains certain Fluid Reset the system whenever the elements that can be unhealthy for engine oil is changed so that the your skin and could even cause How to Check Automatic system can calculate the next cancer. Do not let used oil stay on Transmission Fluid engine oil change. To reset the your skin for very long. Clean your It is not necessary to check system: skin and nails with soap and water, the transmission fluid level. or a good hand cleaner. Wash or 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with A transmission fluid leak is the only properly dispose of clothing or rags the engine off. reason for fluid loss. If a leak containing used engine oil. See the occurs, take the vehicle to your 2. Press the DIC menu button on manufacturer's warnings about the dealer/retailer service department the turn signal lever to scroll use and disposal of oil products. and have it repaired as soon as through the menu items on the Used oil can be a threat to the possible. DIC screen. environment. If you change your 3. Press the set button to clear the own oil, be sure to drain all the oil “Change Engine Oil Soon” from the filter before disposal. Never message and/or restore the dispose of oil by putting it in the “Remaining Oil Life 100%” trash, pouring it on the ground, into message. sewers, or into streams or bodies of 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. The system is reset when the “Change Engine Oil Soon” message is off and the “Remaining Oil Life 100%” message is is displayed. Vehicle Care 9-15

There is a special procedure for Engine Air Cleaner/Filter How to Inspect the Engine Air checking and changing the Cleaner/Filter transmission fluid. Because this The engine air cleaner/filter is procedure is difficult, you should located in the engine compartment To inspect the air cleaner/filter, have this done at your dealer/ on the driver's side of the vehicle. remove the filter from the vehicle retailer service department. Contact See Engine Compartment Overview and lightly shake the filter to release your dealer/retailer for additional on page 9‑6 for more information loose dust and dirt. If the filter information or the procedure can on location. remains caked with dirt, a new filter is required. be found in the service manual. When to Inspect the Engine Air To purchase a service manual, see Cleaner/Filter To inspect or replace the engine air Service Publications Ordering cleaner/filter do the following: Information on page 12‑13. Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace 2.4 L L4 Engine Change the fluid and filter at the it at the first oil change after each intervals listed in Scheduled 80 000 km (50,000 ) interval. Maintenance on page 10 2, and ‑ See Scheduled Maintenance on be sure to use the fluid listed in page 10 2 for more information. Recommended Fluids and ‑ If you are driving in dusty/dirty Lubricants on page 10 7. ‑ conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

1. Remove the screws on top of the engine air cleaner/filter housing. 9-16 Vehicle Care

2. Lift the filter cover housing away 3.0 L V6 Engine shown, 5. Lower the filter cover housing from the engine. 3.6 L V6 Engine similar toward the engine. 3. Pull out the filter. 6. Install the screws to the top of 4. Inspect or replace the engine air the housing to lock the cover in cleaner/filter. place. 5. Lower the filter cover housing { WARNING toward the engine. 6. Install the screws to the top of Operating the engine with the air the housing to lock the cover in cleaner/filter off can cause you or place. others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when 1. Remove the screws on top of working on the engine and do not the engine air cleaner/filter drive with the air cleaner/filter off. housing. Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is 2. Lift the filter cover housing away off, dirt can easily get into the from the engine. engine, which could damage it. 3. Pull out the filter. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving. 4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. Vehicle Care 9-17

Cooling System 3.0 L V6 Engine shown, 3.6 L V6 Engine similar { WARNING The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct Heater and radiator hoses, and working temperature. other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, When it is safe to lift the hood: you can be burned. 2.4 L L4 Engine Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans than DEX-COOL® can cause B. Coolant Recovery Tank and premature engine, heater core, Pressure Cap or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could require changing sooner, at 50 000 km { WARNING (30,000 miles) or 24 months, A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan An electric engine cooling fan whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by B. Coolant Recovery Tank and under the hood can start up even Pressure Cap the vehicle warranty. Always use when the engine is not running DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant and can cause injury. Keep in the vehicle. hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. 9-18 Vehicle Care

Engine Coolant What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® The cooling system in the vehicle is coolant. If using this mixture, ® { WARNING filled with DEX-COOL engine nothing else needs to be added. coolant. This coolant is designed to Adding only plain water to the This mixture: remain in the vehicle for five years cooling system can be . or 240 000 km (150,000 miles), Gives freezing protection down whichever occurs first. dangerous. Plain water, or some to −37°C (−34°F), outside other liquid such as alcohol, can temperature. The following explains the cooling boil before the proper coolant . Gives boiling protection up to system and how to check and add mixture will. The vehicle's coolant coolant when it is low. If there is a 129°C (265°F), engine warning system is set for the temperature. problem with engine overheating, proper coolant mixture. With plain see Engine Overheating on water or the wrong mixture, the . Protects against rust and page 9 21. ‑ engine could get too hot but you corrosion. would not get the overheat . Will not damage aluminum parts. warning. The engine could catch . Helps keep the proper engine fire and you or others could be temperature. burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and Notice: If an improper coolant DEX-COOL® coolant. mixture is used, the engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other parts. Vehicle Care 9-19

Checking Coolant If no coolant is visible in the surge Notice: This vehicle has a tank, add coolant as follows: specific coolant fill procedure. The vehicle must be on a level Failure to follow this procedure surface when checking the coolant How to Add Coolant to the could cause the engine to level. Recovery Tank overheat and be severely Check to see if coolant is visible in damaged. the coolant recovery tank. If the { WARNING coolant inside the coolant recovery { WARNING tank is boiling, do not do anything You can be burned if you spill else until it cools down. If coolant is coolant on hot engine parts. An electric engine cooling fan visible but the coolant level is not at Coolant contains ethylene glycol under the hood can start up even or above the mark pointed to, add a and it will burn if the engine parts when the engine is not running 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable are hot enough. Do not spill ® and can cause injury. Keep water and DEX-COOL coolant at coolant on a hot engine. hands, clothing, and tools away the coolant recovery tank, but be from any underhood electric fan. sure the cooling system is cool before this is done. 9-20 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you The coolant surge tank pressure turn the surge tank pressure cap can be removed when the cap — even a little — they can cooling system, including the surge come out at high speed. Never tank pressure cap and upper turn the cap when the cooling radiator hose, is no longer hot. system, including the surge tank 1. Turn the pressure cap slowly pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the counterclockwise. If a hiss is 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with cooling system and surge tank heard, wait for that to stop. the proper mixture to the mark pressure cap to cool if you ever A hiss means there is still some pointed to on the front of the have to turn the pressure cap. pressure left. coolant surge tank. 2. Then keep turning the cap and remove it. Vehicle Care 9-21

4. With the coolant surge tank cap Engine Overheating If you do decide to lift the hood, off, start the engine and let it run make sure the vehicle is parked on until the upper radiator hose The vehicle has several indicators a level surface. to warn of engine overheating. starts getting hot. Watch out for Then check to see if the engine the engine cooling fan(s). By this There is a coolant temperature cooling fans are running. If the time, the coolant level inside gauge and a warning light on the engine is overheating, the fan(s) the coolant surge tank may be instrument panel cluster that should be running. If they are not, lower. If the level is lower, add indicate an overheated engine do not continue to run the engine more of the proper mixture to condition. See Engine Coolant and have the vehicle serviced. the coolant surge tank until the Temperature Gauge on page 4‑14 level reaches the mark pointed for more information. Notice: Engine damage from to on the front of the coolant running the engine without surge tank. You may decide not to lift the hood coolant is not covered by the when this warning appears, but warranty. 5. Replace the cap. Be sure the instead get service help right away. cap is hand–tight and full See Roadside Assistance Program seated. on page 12‑6. Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured. If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank. 9-22 Vehicle Care

If Steam Is Coming From The If the overheat warning displays with If the temperature overheat gauge Engine Compartment no sign of steam: is no longer in the overheat zone or 1. Turn the air conditioning off. an overheat warning no longer See Overheated Engine Protection displays, the vehicle can be driven. Operating Mode on page 9‑23 for 2. Turn the heater on to the highest Continue to drive the vehicle slow information on driving to a safe temperature and to the highest for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe place in an emergency. fan speed. Open the windows as vehicle distance from the vehicle in If No Steam Is Coming From necessary. front. If the warning does not come The Engine Compartment 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine back on, continue to drive normally. idle in N (Neutral) while stopped. If an engine overheat warning is If the warning continues, pull over, If it is safe to do so, pull off the displayed but no steam can be seen stop, and park the vehicle road, shift to P (Park) or or heard, the problem might not be right away. N (Neutral) and let the too serious. Sometimes the engine engine idle. If there is no sign of steam, idle the can get a little too hot when the engine for three minutes while vehicle: parked. If the warning is still . Climbing a long hill on a hot day. displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated . Stopping after high-speed Engine Protection Operating Mode” driving. later in this section. . Idling for long periods in traffic. . Towing a trailer. Vehicle Care 9-23

Overheated Engine Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering Protection Fluid Operating Mode Check the level after the vehicle has been driven for at least This emergency operating mode twenty minutes so the fluid is warm. allows the vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency To check the power steering fluid: situation. If an overheated engine 1. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF condition exists, an overheat See Engine Compartment Overview and let the engine compartment protection mode which alternates on page 9‑6 for information on the cool down. firing groups of cylinders helps location of the power steering fluid 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the prevent engine damage. In this reservoir. reservoir clean. mode, there is significant loss in power and engine performance. When to Check Power Steering 3. Unscrew the cap and pull it The engine coolant temperature Fluid straight up. warning light comes on the It is not necessary to regularly 4. Wipe the dipstick with a instrument panel, to indicate the check power steering fluid unless a clean rag. vehicle has entered overheated leak is suspected in the system or engine protection operating mode. an unusual noise is heard. A fluid 5. Replace the cap and completely The temperature gauge also loss in this system could indicate a tighten it. indicates an overheat condition problem. Have the system inspected 6. Remove the cap again and look exists. Driving extended km (miles) and repaired. at the fluid level on the dipstick. and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided. 9-24 Vehicle Care

Washer Fluid Notice: . What to Use When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the When windshield washer fluid manufacturer's instructions is needed, be sure to read the for adding water. manufacturer instructions before . Do not mix water with use. If operating the vehicle in an ready-to-use washer fluid. area where the temperature can Water can cause the solution fall below freezing, use a fluid that to freeze and damage the has sufficient protection against washer fluid tank and other freezing. parts of the washer system. Also, water does not clean as When the engine is hot, the level Adding Washer Fluid well as washer fluid. should be at the hot MAX level. When the engine is cold, the fluid . Fill the washer fluid tank only level should be between MIN and three-quarters full when it is MAX on the dipstick. very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing What to Use occurs, which could To determine what kind of fluid to damage the tank if it is use, see Recommended Fluids and Open the cap with the washer completely full. symbol on it. Add washer fluid Lubricants on page 10‑7. Always . Do not use engine coolant use the proper fluid. until the tank is full. See Engine Compartment Overview on (antifreeze) in the windshield washer. It can damage the page 9‑6 for reservoir location. vehicle's windshield washer system and paint. Vehicle Care 9-25

Brakes Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment can cause a brake squeal when the Every time the brakes are applied, This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brakes are first applied or lightly with or without the vehicle moving, brake pads have built-in wear applied. This does not mean the brakes adjust for wear. indicators that make a high-pitched something is wrong with the brakes. warning sound when the brake pads Replacing Brake System Parts are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the if the vehicle is to have really good proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed specifications in Capacities and { WARNING and tested with top-quality brake Specifications on page 11‑2. parts. When parts of the braking The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts. not work well. That could lead to If this is not done, the brakes might Brake Pedal Travel an accident. When the brake not work properly. For example, wear warning sound is heard, See your dealer/retailer if the brake installing disc brake pads that are wrong for the vehicle, can change have the vehicle serviced. pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase the balance between the front and Notice: Continuing to drive with in pedal travel. This could be a rear brakes — for the worse. The worn-out brake pads could result sign that brake service might be braking performance expected can in costly brake repair. required. change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed. 9-26 Vehicle Care

Brake Fluid There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir { WARNING might go down: If too much brake fluid is added, it . The brake fluid level goes down can spill on the engine and burn, because of normal brake lining if the engine is hot enough. You wear. When new linings are or others could be burned, and installed, the fluid level goes the vehicle could be damaged. back up. Add brake fluid only when work is The brake master cylinder reservoir . A fluid leak in the brake done on the brake hydraulic is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as hydraulic system can also cause indicated on the reservoir cap. See system. a low fluid level. Have the brake Engine Compartment Overview on hydraulic system fixed, since a When the brake fluid falls to a low page 9 6 for the location of the ‑ leak means that sooner or later level, the brake warning light comes reservoir. the brakes will not work well. on. See Brake System Warning Do not top off the brake fluid. Light on page 4‑19. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. Vehicle Care 9-27

What to Add Notice: Battery Use only new DOT 3 brake . Using the wrong fluid Refer to the replacement number on fluid from a sealed container. can badly damage brake the original battery label when a See Recommended Fluids and hydraulic system parts. new battery is needed. Lubricants on page 10‑7. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, Always clean the brake fluid { DANGER reservoir cap and the area around such as engine oil, in the the cap before removing it. This brake hydraulic system can Battery posts, terminals, and damage brake hydraulic helps keep dirt from entering the related accessories contain lead system parts so badly that reservoir. and lead compounds, chemicals they will have to be replaced. known to the State of California to Do not let someone put in { WARNING the wrong kind of fluid. cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. With the wrong kind of fluid in . If brake fluid is spilled on the brake hydraulic system, the the vehicle's painted If the battery has a very low charge brakes might not work well. This surfaces, the paint finish can or is dead, it might not be possible could cause a crash. Always use be damaged. Be careful not to remove the ignition key from the the proper brake fluid. to spill brake fluid on the ignition switch or shift out of vehicle. If you do, wash it off P (Park). See Shifting Out of Park immediately. on page 8‑25. 9-28 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Storage Starter Switch Check 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake on { WARNING { WARNING page 8‑32. Batteries have acid that can burn When you are doing this Do not use the accelerator you and gas that can explode. inspection, the vehicle could pedal, and be ready to turn off You can be badly hurt if you are move suddenly. If the vehicle the engine immediately if it not careful. See Jump Starting on moves, you or others could be starts. page 9 77 for tips on working ‑ injured. 3. Try to start the engine in each around a battery without gear. The vehicle should start getting hurt. 1. Before starting this check, be only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). sure there is enough room If the vehicle starts in any other Infrequent Usage: Remove the around the vehicle. position, contact your dealer/ black, negative (−) cable from the retailer for service. battery to keep the battery from running down. Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger. Vehicle Care 9-29

Automatic Transmission 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. Ignition Transmission Shift Lock Control See Parking Brake on Lock Check page 8‑32. System Check Be ready to apply the regular While parked, and with the parking brake immediately if the vehicle brake set, try to turn the ignition to { WARNING begins to move. LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position. When you are doing this 3. With the engine off, turn the . The ignition should turn to inspection, the vehicle could ignition to ON/RUN, but do not start the engine. Without LOCK/OFF only when the shift move suddenly. If the vehicle lever is in P (Park). moves, you or others could be applying the regular brake, try injured. to move the shift lever out of . With the key access ignition P (Park) with normal effort. If the system, the ignition key should 1. Before starting this check, be shift lever moves out of P (Park), come out only in LOCK/OFF. contact your dealer/retailer for sure there is enough room Contact your dealer/retailer if service. around the vehicle. It should be service is required. parked on a level surface. 9-30 Vehicle Care

Park Brake and P (Park) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Wiper Blade Replacement vehicle facing downhill. Keeping Mechanism Check your foot on the regular brake, set Windshield wiper blades should be the parking brake. inspected for wear and cracking. { See Scheduled Maintenance on WARNING . To check the parking brake's page 10‑2 for more information. When you are doing this check, holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in Replacement blades come in the vehicle could begin to move. different types and are removed You or others could be injured N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake in different ways. For proper type and property could be damaged. pedal. Do this until the vehicle is and length, see Maintenance Make sure there is room in front held by the parking brake only. Replacement Parts on page 10‑9. of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular . To check the P (Park) brake at once should the vehicle mechanism's holding ability: begin to move. With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake. Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required. Vehicle Care 9-31

To replace the windshield wiper 3. With the latch open, pull the Headlamp Aiming blade: wiper blade down towards the The headlamp aiming system has 1. Pull the windshield wiper windshield far enough to release been preset at the factory. assembly away from the it from the J-hooked end of the windshield. wiper arm. If the vehicle is damaged in an 4. Remove the wiper blade. accident, the aim of the headlamps may be affected and adjustment Allowing the wiper blade arm to may be necessary. touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could It is recommended that a dealer/ damage the windshield. Any retailer adjust the headlamps. damage that occurs would not To re-aim the headlamps yourself, be covered by the vehicle use the following procedure. warranty. Do not allow the wiper The vehicle should be properly blade to touch the windshield. prepared as follows: 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 for . The vehicle should be placed so wiper blade replacement. the headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft.) from a light colored wall. 2. Lift up on plastic latch in the . The vehicle must have all four middle of the wiper blade where tires on a level surface which is the wiper arm attaches. level all the way to the wall. 9-32 Vehicle Care

. The vehicle should be placed so Headlamp aiming is done with the it is perpendicular to the wall or vehicle's low-beam headlamps. other flat surface. The high-beam headlamps will be . The vehicle should not have any correctly aimed if the low-beam snow, ice, or mud on it. headlamps are aimed properly. . The vehicle should be fully To adjust the vertical aim, do the assembled and all other work following: stopped while headlamp aiming 1. Open the hood. See Hood on is being performed. page 9‑5. . The vehicle should be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one person or 75 kg (160 lbs) Up-Level sitting in the driver's seat. 2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of . Tires should be properly inflated. the low‐beam headlamp. 3. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim dot on the low‐beam headlamp. Record the distance.

Base Vehicle Care 9-33

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall the width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in Step 4. Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up which may cause damage to the headlamp. 6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a piece of 4. At the wall measure from the Base cardboard or equivalent in front ground upward (A) to the of the headlamp not being recorded distance from adjusted. This allows only the Step 3 and mark it. beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the flat surface. 9-34 Vehicle Care

Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on page 9‑39. For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer/retailer. Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING Up-Level 9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is positioned at the 7. Locate the vertical headlamp Halogen bulbs have pressurized bottom edge of the horizontal aiming screws, which are under gas inside and can burst if you tape line. The lamp on the the hood near each headlamp drop or scratch the bulb. You or left (A) shows the correct assembly. others could be injured. Be sure headlamp aim. The lamp on the The adjustment screw can be right (B) shows the incorrect to read and follow the instructions turned with a E8 Torx® socket. headlamp aim. on the bulb package. 8. Turn the vertical aiming screw 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for until the headlamp beam the opposite headlamp. is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle of the beam. Vehicle Care 9-35

High Intensity Discharge Headlamps, Front Turn (HID) Lighting Signal and Parking Lamps { WARNING Base Headlamp Assembly The low beam high intensity The base model vehicle has a discharge lighting system halogen high-beam headlamp, a operates at a very high voltage. low-beam/Daytime Running Lamp If you try to service any of the (DRL) headlamp and a turn signal/ system components, you could be parking lamp on the headlamp seriously injured. Have your assembly. dealer/retailer or a qualified To replace one of these bulbs: technician service them. A. Low-Beam Headlamp/DRL 1. Open the hood. See Hood on B. High-Beam Headlamp The up‐level vehicle has HID page 9‑5. headlamps. The park lamp function C. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp is also a function of the HID 2. If replacing a headlamp bulb, headlamp. After an HID headlamp remove the dust cover from the bulb has been replaced, the beam back of the headlamp housing might be a slightly different shade by turning counterclockwise than it was originally. This is normal. a quarter turn. 9-36 Vehicle Care

3. Remove the bulb socket from Up–Level Headlamp Assembly the headlamp by turning The up level model vehicle has a counterclockwise a quarter turn. – high intensity discharge (HID) high/ 4. Remove the bulb from the low beam, a dedicated DRL and a socket. turn signal lamp on the headlamp 5. Install the new bulb in the assembly. The park lamp is also socket. the function of the HID headlamp. See High Intensity Discharge (HID) 6. Install the bulb socket by turning Lighting on page 9‑35 for more clockwise a quarter turn. information. 7. If a headlamp bulb was To replace one of these bulbs: replaced, Install the dust cover in the back of the headlamp 1. Open the hood. See Hood on A. DRL Lamp housing by turning clockwise page 9‑5. B. Turn Signal Lamp a quarter turn. 2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly. 3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket. 4. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the socket into the headlamp assembly by turning it clockwise. Vehicle Care 9-37

Fog Lamps 3. Remove the old bulb from the Taillamps, Turn Signal, bulb socket and push the new To replace one of these bulbs: bulb straight into the bulb socket Stoplamps, and Back-Up until it connects. Lamps 4. Push the bulb socket into the bulb assembly to lock it into place. 5. Reconnect the bulb socket to the electrical connector.

1. Locate the bulb assembly under the front facia. A. Turn Signal Lamp 2. Disconnect the bulb socket from B. Back–Up Lamp the electrical connector and pull out the bulb assembly. To replace one of these lamps: 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 1‑11. 2. Pull back the trunk trim. 3. Remove the four plastic wing nuts retaining the taillamp assembly in place. 9-38 Vehicle Care

4. Pull out the taillamp assembly 7. Push the new bulb straight into License Plate Lamp and disconnect the wiring the bulb socket until it clicks. harness. The licence plate lamps for this 8. Turn the bulb socket clockwise vehicle are on the trunk lid. to reinstall. To replace one of these bulbs: 9. Reconnect the wiring harness. 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on 10. Push the taillamp assembly page 1‑11 for more information. back into place on the vehicle. 11. Turn the four wing nuts clockwise to reinstall them. 12. Place the trunk trim to its original location.

A. Back-up Lamp B. Turn Signal Lamp 5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it. 6. Pull the old bulb straight out of 2. Push the end on either of the the bulb socket. lamp assemblies (passenger side shown) and then move the lamp assembly down to remove it from trunk lid. Vehicle Care 9-39

5. Push the replacement bulb Replacement Bulbs straight into the bulb socket and Bulb turn the bulb socket clockwise to Exterior Lamp install into lamp assembly. Number 6. Move the lamp assembly into Back-Up Lamp W16W the trunk lid engaging the clip Daytime Running side first. 3157K Lamp (Up-Level) 7. Push on the lamp side opposite Fog Lamp H11LL the clip until the lamp assembly snaps into place. Front Turn Signal/ 3757NAK Park Lamp A. Bulb Socket Headlamp High H9 B. Lamp Assembly Beam (Base) C. Bulb Headlamp Low H11LL Beam (Base) 3. Turn the bulb socket (A) counterclockwise to remove from License Plate Lamp W5WLL lamp assembly (C). Rear Turn Signal 3757AK 4. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of the bulb socket. For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your dealer/retailer. 9-40 Vehicle Care

Electrical System Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit An electrical overload may cause Breakers the lamps to go on and off, or in Electrical System The wiring circuits in the vehicle are some cases to remain off. Have the Overload protected from short circuits by a headlamp wiring checked right away combination of fuses and circuit The vehicle has fuses and circuit if the lamps go on and off or breakers. This greatly reduces the breakers to protect against an remain off. electrical system overload. chance of damage caused by Windshield Wipers electrical problems. When the current electrical load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens If the wiper motor overheats due to To check a fuse, look at the and closes, protecting the circuit heavy snow or ice, the windshield silver-colored band inside the fuse. until the current load returns to wipers will stop until the motor cools If the band is broken or melted, normal or the problem is fixed. and will then restart. replace the fuse. Be sure to replace This greatly reduces the chance of a bad fuse with a new one of the Although the circuit is protected identical size and rating. circuit overload and fire caused by from electrical overload, overload electrical problems. due to heavy snow or ice, may Fuses of the same amperage can Fuses and circuit breakers protect cause wiper linkage damage. be temporarily borrowed from the following in the vehicle: Always clear ice and heavy snow another fuse location, if a fuse goes from the windshield before using the out. Replace the fuse as soon as . Headlamp Wiring windshield wipers. possible. . Windshield Wiper Motor If the overload is caused by an To identify and check fuses, circuit . Power Windows and other electrical problem and not snow or breakers, and relays, see Engine Power Accessories ice, be sure to get it fixed. Compartment Fuse Block on page 9‑41, Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 9‑44, and Rear Compartment Fuse Block on page 9‑46. Vehicle Care 9-41

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover, squeeze the three retaining clips on Engine Compartment Fuse Block the cover and lift it straight up. Notice: Spilling liquid on any J-Case Usage J-Case Usage electrical components on the Fuses Fuses vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical 6 Wiper 22 Sunroof component. 12 Starter Front Power 24 Windows Rear Power 21 Windows Antilock Brake 26 System Pump 9-42 Vehicle Care

J-Case Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Fuses 9 Ignition Coils ‐ Odd 33 Heated Seat 27 Electric Park Brake Engine Control Antilock Brake 10 34 Rear Window Module System Valves 28 Defogger Post Catalytic 35 Amplifier Brake 11 Converter Oxygen 41 36 AFL Ignition Vacuum Pump Sensor Heater 37 Right High Beam 42 Cooling Fan K2 Trans Ignition/Fuel 13 System Control 38 Left High Beam 45 Cooling Fan K1 Module 46 Cooling Fan Relay Mini Fuses Usage 16 MAF Pre Catalytic Transmission 17 Airbag Module 47 Converter Oxygen 1 Sensor Heater Control Module 18 SBZ Ignition 48 Fog Lamps Engine Control Variable Effort 2 23 Module Battery Steering Right High Intensity Engine Control 49 Discharge 5 29 Power Lumbar, Left Module Ignition Headlamp Body Control 32 8 Ignition Coils ‐ Even Module Vehicle Care 9-43

Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Relays Usage Left High Intensity 56 Windshield Washer 13 Cooling Fan 50 Discharge 60 Heated Mirror 15 Run / Crank Headlamp 62 Canister Vent Rear Window 51 Horn 17 Defogger 64 AFL Battery 52 Cluster Ignition 65 Theft Deterrent Horn Inside Rearview Micro Usage Mirror, Rear Vision Fuel System Control Relays 53 67 Camera, Module 2 Starter Vacuum Pump Regulated Voltage 69 4 Wiper Speed Heating, Ventilation Control Sensor 54 and Air Conditioning 5 Wiper Control Outside Rear View Mini Relays Usage 10 Cooling Fan Mirror, Universal Engine Control Headlamp 7 14 55 Garage Door Module Low Beam Opener, Window Switch 9 Cooling Fan 9-44 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel Fuse Press in on the sides of the door to Block release it from the instrument panel.

Pull the door toward you to release The instrument panel fuse block is it from the hinge. located in the instrument panel, on the driver side of the vehicle. To access the fuses, open the fuse panel door by pulling down at the top.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block Vehicle Care 9-45

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Steering Wheel Front Heater Instrument Panel 1 21 Controls Backlight 11 Ventilation Air Cluster Conditioning/Blower Body Control Discrete Logic 2 22 Module 7 12 Passenger Seat Ignition Switch Body Control 13 Driver Seat Body Control 3 23 Module 5 Module 3 Diagnostic Link 14 4 Radio Connector Body Control 24 Module 2 OnStar® Universal 15 Airbag 5 Hands Free Phone Rear Heater 16 Trunk 25 Ventilation Air 6 Power Outlet 1 Heater Ventilation Conditioning/Blower 7 Power Outlet 2 17 Air Conditioning 26 AC/DC Inverter Controller Body Control 8 ® Module 1 Radio, OnStar , Relays Usage 18 Universal Hands Body Control 9 Free Phone R1 Trunk Relay Module 4 19 Display R2 Not Used Body Control 10 Module 8 Automatic Occupant R3 Power Outlet Relay 20 Sensing 9-46 Vehicle Care

Rear Compartment Fuse Block

The rear compartment fuse block is located on the left side of the trunk behind a cover. Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage 5 Not Used 8 Not Used Heated Steering 12 Not Used 6 Wheel 15 Not Used 7 Not Used Vehicle Care 9-47

Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage J‐Case Usage Fuses Side Blind Zone, 29 Not Used 16 Ultrasonic Rear Park 13 Not Used 30 Not Used Assist 14 Not Used Electronic 17 Not Used 31 Suspension Control 34 Not Used 18 PEPS Rear Seat 35 PEPS 32 19 Not Used Infotainment 36 Not Used Rear Sunshade, 33 All Wheel Drive 20 ‐ 37 Not Used Ventilated Seats J Case Usage 21 Not Used ‐ Relays Usage Fuses 22 Not Used K1 Not Used 1 Not Used 23 Not Used Seat Ventilation, 2 Not Used K2 24 Not Used Sunshade 3 Not Used Heated Steering 25 Not Used K3 4 Not Used Wheel 26 Not Used 9 Not Used K4 Not Used 27 Not Used 10 Not Used 28 Not Used 11 Not Used 9-48 Vehicle Care

Winter Tires Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) If you expect to drive on snow or ice Tires . Underinflated tires pose the covered roads often, you may want same danger as overloaded Your new vehicle comes with to get winter tires for your vehicle. tires. The resulting accident All season tires provide good overall high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. performance on most surfaces but leading tire manufacturer. If you Check all tires frequently to they may not offer the traction you ever have questions about your maintain the recommended would like or the same level of tire warranty and where to pressure. Tire pressure performance as winter tires on snow obtain service, see your vehicle should be checked when or ice covered roads. your tires are cold. See Tire Warranty booklet for details. Winter tires, in general, are Pressure on page 9‑56. For additional information refer designed for increased traction on to the tire manufacturer. . Overinflated tires are more snow and ice covered roads. With likely to be cut, punctured winter tires, there may be decreased { WARNING or broken by a sudden dry road traction, increased road impact — such as when you noise, and shorter tread life. After Poorly maintained and improperly hit a pothole. Keep tires at switching to winter tires, be alert for used tires are dangerous. the recommended pressure. changes in vehicle handling and braking. . Overloading your tires can . Worn, old tires can cause cause overheating as a result accidents. If your tread is of too much flexing. You badly worn, or if your tires could have an air-out and a have been damaged, serious accident. See Vehicle replace them. Load Limits on page 8‑12. (Continued) Vehicle Care 9-49

See your dealer/retailer for details Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the regarding winter tire availability and “Tire Size” illustration later in this proper tire selection. Also, see Useful information about a tire is section for more detail. Buying New Tires on page 9‑64. molded into its sidewall. The (B) TPC Spec (Tire If you choose to use winter tires: examples below show a typical passenger vehicle tire and a Performance Criteria . Use tires of the same brand and compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original tread type on all four wheel equipment tires designed to positions. GM's specific tire performance . Use only radial ply tires of the criteria have a TPC specification same size, load range, and code molded onto the sidewall. speed rating as the original GM's TPC specifications meet equipment tires. or exceed all federal safety Winter tires with the same speed guidelines. rating as your original equipment (C) DOT (Department of tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. Transportation): The If you choose winter tires with a Department of Transportation lower speed rating, never exceed (DOT) code indicates that the tire's maximum speed capability. Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of (A) Tire Size: The tire size is Transportation Motor Vehicle a combination of letters and Safety Standards. numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, 9-50 Vehicle Care

(D) Tire Identification Number (G) Maximum Cold Inflation (B) Temporary Use Only: The (TIN): The letters and numbers Load Limit: Maximum load compact spare tire or temporary following the DOT (Department that can be carried and the use tire has a tread life of of Transportation) code is maximum pressure needed to approximately 5 000 km the Tire Identification Number support that load. (3,000 miles) and should not be (TIN). The TIN shows the driven at speeds over 105 km/h manufacturer and plant code, (65 mph). The compact spare tire size, and date the tire was tire is for emergency use when manufactured. The TIN is a regular road tire has lost air molded onto both sides of the and gone flat. If your vehicle tire, although only one side may has a compact spare tire, have the date of manufacture. see Compact Spare Tire on (E) Tire Ply Material: The type page 9‑76 and If a Tire Goes Flat of cord and number of plies in on page 9‑70. the sidewall and under the tread. (F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire Compact Spare Tire Example manufacturers are required to (A) Tire Ply Material: The grade tires based on three type of cord and number of plies performance factors: treadwear, in the sidewall and under the traction, and temperature tread. resistance. For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 9‑67. Vehicle Care 9-51

(C) Tire Identification Number (F) Tire Size: A combination of Tire Designations (TIN): The letters and numbers letters and numbers define a following the DOT (Department tire's width, height, aspect ratio, Tire Size of Transportation) code is construction type, and service The following illustration shows the Tire Identification Number description. The letter T as the an example of a typical (TIN). The TIN shows the first character in the tire size passenger vehicle tire size. manufacturer and plant code, means the tire is for temporary tire size, and date the tire was use only. manufactured. The TIN is (G) TPC Spec (Tire molded onto both sides of the Performance Criteria tire, although only one side may Specification): Original have the date of manufacture. equipment tires designed to (D) Maximum Cold Inflation GM's specific tire performance (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: Load Limit: Maximum load criteria have a TPC specification The United States version of a that can be carried and the code molded onto the sidewall. metric tire sizing system. The maximum pressure needed to GM's TPC specifications meet letter P as the first character in support that load. or exceed all federal safety the tire size means a passenger (E) Tire Inflation: The guidelines. vehicle tire engineered to temporary use tire or compact standards set by the U.S. Tire spare tire should be inflated and Rim Association. to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit information on tire pressure and number indicates the tire section inflation see Tire Pressure on width in millimeters from page 9‑56. sidewall to sidewall. 9-52 Vehicle Care

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit (F) Service Description: These Accessory Weight: This number that indicates the tire characters represent the load means the combined weight height‐to‐width measurements. index and speed rating of the of optional accessories. For example, if the tire size tire. The load index represents Some examples of optional aspect ratio is 60, as shown in the load carry capacity a tire is accessories are, automatic item C of the illustration, it would certified to carry. The speed transmission, power steering, mean that the tire's sidewall is rating is the maximum speed a power brakes, power windows, 60 percent as high as it is wide. tire is certified to carry a load. power seats, and air (D) Construction Code: A conditioning. letter code is used to indicate Tire Terminology and Aspect Ratio: The relationship the type of ply construction in Definitions of a tire's height to its width. the tire. The letter R means Air Pressure: The amount of Belt: A rubber coated layer of radial ply construction; the air inside the tire pressing cords that is located between letter D means diagonal or outward on each square inch the plies and the tread. Cords bias ply construction; and the of the tire. Air pressure is may be made from steel or other letter B means belted‐bias ply expressed in psi (pounds per reinforcing materials. construction. square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches. Vehicle Care 9-53

Bead: The tire bead contains Curb Weight: The weight of a GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight steel wires wrapped by steel motor vehicle with standard and Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits cords that hold the tire onto optional equipment including the on page 8‑12 . the rim. maximum capacity of fuel, oil, GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire and coolant, but without Weight Rating for the front axle. in which the plies are laid at passengers and cargo. See Vehicle Load Limits on alternate angles less than DOT Markings: A code molded page 8‑12. 90 degrees to the centerline of into the sidewall of a tire GAWR RR: Gross Axle the tread. signifying that the tire is in Weight Rating for the rear axle. Cold Tire Pressure: The compliance with the U.S. See Vehicle Load Limits on Department of Transportation amount of air pressure in a tire, page 8‑12 . (DOT) motor vehicle safety measured in psi (pounds per Intended Outboard Sidewall: square inch) or kPa (kilopascal) standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification The side of an asymmetrical tire, before a tire has built up heat that must always face outward from driving. See Tire Pressure Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also when mounted on a vehicle. on page 9‑56. identify the tire manufacturer, Kilopascal (kPa): The metric production plant, brand, and unit for air pressure. date of production. 9-54 Vehicle Care

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A Maximum Loaded Vehicle manufacturer, brand, and/or tire used on light duty trucks and Weight: The sum of curb model name molding that is some multipurpose passenger weight, accessory weight, higher or deeper than the same vehicles. vehicle capacity weight, and moldings on the other sidewall Load Index: An assigned production options weight. of the tire. number ranging from 1 to 279 Normal Occupant Weight: The Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A that corresponds to the load number of occupants a vehicle tire used on passenger cars and carrying capacity of a tire. is designed to seat multiplied by some light duty trucks and Maximum Inflation Pressure: 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle multipurpose vehicles. The maximum air pressure to Load Limits on page 8‑12 . Recommended Inflation which a cold tire can be inflated. Occupant Distribution: Pressure: Vehicle The maximum air pressure is Designated seating positions. manufacturer's recommended molded onto the sidewall. Outward Facing Sidewall: The tire inflation pressure as shown Maximum Load Rating: The side of an asymmetrical tire that on the tire placard. See Tire load rating for a tire at the has a particular side that faces Pressure on page 9‑56 and maximum permissible inflation outward when mounted on a Vehicle Load Limits on pressure for that tire. vehicle. The side of the tire that page 8‑12 . contains a whitewall, bears Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic white lettering, or bears tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Vehicle Care 9-55

Rim: A metal support for a tire Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Vehicle Capacity Weight: and upon which the tire beads bands, sometimes called wear The number of designated are seated. bars, that show across the seating positions multiplied by Sidewall: The portion of a tire tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated between the tread and the bead. (1/16 inch) of tread remains. cargo load. See Vehicle Load See When It Is Time for New Limits on page 8‑12 . Speed Rating: An Tires on page 9‑63. alphanumeric code assigned Vehicle Maximum Load on the to a tire indicating the maximum UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Tire: Load on an individual tire speed at which a tire can Grading Standards): A tire due to curb weight, accessory operate. information system that provides weight, occupant weight, and consumers with ratings for a cargo weight. Traction: The friction between tire's traction, temperature, Vehicle Placard: A label the tire and the road surface. and treadwear. Ratings The amount of grip provided. permanently attached to a are determined by tire vehicle showing the vehicle's Tread: The portion of a tire manufacturers using capacity weight and the original that comes into contact with government testing procedures. equipment tire size and the road. The ratings are molded into recommended inflation pressure. the sidewall of the tire. See “Tire and Loading See Uniform Tire Quality Information Label” under Vehicle Grading on page 9 67. ‑ Load Limits on page 8‑12. 9-56 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure If your tires have too much air For additional information (over‐inflation), you can get regarding how much weight Tires need the correct amount the following: your vehicle can carry, and an of air pressure to operate example of the Tire and Loading . Unusual wear effectively. Information label, see Vehicle Notice: Do not let anyone tell . Poor handling Load Limits on page 8‑12. How you that under‐inflation or . Rough ride you load your vehicle affects over inflation is all right. It is vehicle handling and ride ‐ . not. If your tires do not have Needless damage from comfort. Never load your vehicle road hazards enough air (under‐inflation), with more weight than it was you can get the following: A vehicle specific Tire and designed to carry. Loading Information label is . Too much flexing attached to your vehicle. This When to Check . Too much heat label shows your vehicle's Check your tires once a month . Tire overloading original equipment tires and the or more. Do not forget to check correct inflation pressures for the compact spare tire, if the . Premature or your tires when they are cold. vehicle has one. The compact irregular wear The recommended cold tire spare should be at 60 psi . Poor handling inflation pressure, shown on the (420 kPa). For additional information regarding the . Reduced fuel economy label, is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support compact spare tire, see your vehicle's maximum load Compact Spare Tire on carrying capacity. page 9‑76. Vehicle Care 9-57

How to Check If the cold tire inflation pressure Tire Pressure Monitor Use a good quality pocket-type matches the recommended System gauge to check tire pressure. pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no The Tire Pressure Monitor System You cannot tell if your tires are (TPMS) uses radio and sensor properly inflated simply by further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, technology to check tire pressure looking at them. Radial tires may levels. The TPMS sensors monitor look properly inflated even when add air until you reach the the air pressure in your vehicle's recommended amount. they are under‐inflated. Check tires and transmit tire pressure the tire's inflation pressure when If you overfill the tire, release readings to a receiver located in the the tires are cold. Cold means air by pushing on the metal stem vehicle. your vehicle has been sitting for in the center of the tire valve. Each tire, including the spare at least three hours or driven no Re‐check the tire pressure with (if provided), should be checked more than 1.6 km (1 mile). the tire gauge. monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended Remove the valve cap from the Be sure to put the valve caps by the vehicle manufacturer on the tire valve stem. Press the tire back on the valve stems. They vehicle placard or tire inflation gauge firmly onto the valve to help prevent leaks by keeping pressure label. (If your vehicle has get a pressure measurement. out dirt and moisture. tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) 9-58 Vehicle Care

As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been Always check the TPMS malfunction vehicle has been equipped with a equipped with a TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tire pressure monitoring system indicator to indicate when the tires or wheels on your vehicle to (TPMS) that illuminates a low system is not operating properly. ensure that the replacement or tire pressure telltale when one or The TPMS malfunction indicator is alternate tires and wheels allow more of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure the TPMS to continue to function under‐inflated. telltale. When the system detects a properly. Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for See Tire Pressure Monitor approximately one minute and then pressure telltale illuminates, you Operation on page 9‑59 for should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated. additional information. soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon to the proper pressure. Driving on subsequent vehicle start‐ups as Federal Communications long as the malfunction exists. a significantly under‐inflated tire Commission (FCC) and causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is Industry Canada lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation illuminated, the system may not be See Radio Frequency Statement on also reduces fuel efficiency and able to detect or signal low tire page 12‑17 for information tire tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS regarding Part 15 of the Federal vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety Communications Commission (FCC) ability. of reasons, including the installation Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or Canada. not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly. responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under‐inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Vehicle Care 9-59

Tire Pressure Monitor inflate the tires to the recommended A Tire and Loading Information pressure shown on the tire loading label, attached to your vehicle, Operation information label. See Vehicle Load shows the size of your vehicle's This vehicle may have a Tire Limits on page 8‑12. original equipment tires and the Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). At the same time a message to correct inflation pressure for your The TPMS is designed to warn the check the pressure in a specific tire vehicle's tires when they are cold. driver when a low tire pressure appears on the Driver Information See Vehicle Load Limits on condition exists. TPMS sensors are Center (DIC) display. The low tire page 8‑12, for an example of the mounted onto each tire and wheel pressure warning light and the DIC Tire and Loading Information label assembly, excluding the spare tire warning message come on at each and its location on your vehicle. and wheel assembly. The TPMS ignition cycle until the tires are Also see Tire Pressure on sensors monitor the air pressure in inflated to the correct inflation page 9‑56. the vehicle's tires and transmits the pressure. Using the DIC, tire Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you tire pressure readings to a receiver pressure levels can be viewed by about a low tire pressure condition located in the vehicle. the driver. For additional information but it does not replace normal tire and details about the DIC operation maintenance. See Tire Inspection and displays see Driver Information on page 9‑62, Tire Rotation on Center (DIC) on page 4‑25. page 9‑62 and Tires on page 9‑48. The low tire pressure warning light Notice: Liquid tire sealants could may come on in cool weather when damage the Tire Pressure Monitor the vehicle is first started, and then System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor When a low tire pressure condition turn off as you start to drive. This damage caused by using a tire is detected, the TPMS illuminates could be an early indicator that the sealant is not covered by your the low tire pressure warning light air pressure in the tire(s) are getting warranty. Do not use liquid tire located on the instrument panel low and need to be inflated to the sealants. cluster. If the warning light comes proper pressure. on, stop as soon as possible and 9-60 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction Light and . The TPMS sensor matching . Replacement tires or wheels do Message process was started but not not match your vehicle's original completed or not completed equipment tires or wheels. Tires The TPMS will not function properly successfully after rotating the and wheels other than those if one or more of the TPMS sensors vehicle's tires. The DIC message recommended for your vehicle are missing or inoperable. When the and TPMS malfunction light could prevent the TPMS from system detects a malfunction, the should go off once the TPMS functioning properly. See Buying low tire warning light flashes for sensor matching process is New Tires on page 9‑64. about one minute and then stays on performed successfully. See . for the remainder of the ignition Operating electronic devices or “TPMS Sensor Matching being near facilities using radio cycle. A DIC warning message is Process” later in this section. also displayed. The low tire warning wave frequencies similar to the . light and DIC warning message One or more TPMS sensors are TPMS could cause the TPMS come on at each ignition cycle until missing or damaged. The DIC sensors to malfunction. the problem is corrected. Some of message and the TPMS If the TPMS is not functioning it the conditions that can cause the malfunction light should go off cannot detect or signal a low tire malfunction light and DIC message when the TPMS sensors are condition. See your dealer/retailer to come on are: installed and the sensor for service if the TPMS malfunction matching process is performed light and DIC message comes on . One of the road tires has been successfully. See your dealer/ and stays on. replaced with the spare tire. retailer for service. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re‐install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor. Vehicle Care 9-61

TPMS Sensor Matching You have two minutes to match A message asking if you are Process the first tire/wheel position, and sure you want to begin this five minutes overall to match all process should appear. Each TPMS sensor has a unique four tire/wheel positions. If it takes identification code. Any time you 6. Press the SET/CLR button again longer than two minutes, to match to confirm the selection. rotate your vehicle's tires or replace the first tire and wheel, or more than one or more of the TPMS sensors, five minutes to match all four tire The horn sounds twice to signal the identification codes will need to and wheel positions the matching the receiver is in relearn mode be matched to the new tire/wheel process stops and you need to and the TIRE LEARNING position. The sensors are matched start over. ACTIVE message displays on to the tire/wheel positions in the the DIC screen. following order: driver side front tire, The TPMS sensor matching process passenger side front tire, passenger is outlined below: 7. Start with the driver side front tire. side rear tire, and driver side rear 1. Set the parking brake. tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. 8. Remove the valve cap from the See your dealer/retailer for service. 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with valve cap stem. Activate the the engine off. The TPMS sensors can also be TPMS sensor by increasing or matched to each tire/wheel position 3. Use the MENU button to select decreasing the tire's air pressure by increasing or decreasing the the Vehicle Information Menu for five seconds, or until a horn tire's air pressure. If increasing the in the Driver Information chirp sounds. The horn chirp, tire's air pressure, do not exceed Center (DIC). which may take up to the maximum inflation pressure 4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to 30 seconds to sound, confirms indicated on the tire's sidewall. the Tire Pressure Menu Item that the sensor identification screen. code has been matched to this To decrease air-pressure out of a tire and wheel position. tire you can use the pointed end of 5. Press the SET/CLR button to the valve cap, a pencil-style air begin the sensor matching pressure gage, or a key. process. 9-62 Vehicle Care

9. Proceed to the passenger side Tire Inspection Any time you notice unusual front tire, and repeat the wear, rotate the tires as soon procedure in Step 8. We recommend that you as possible and check wheel regularly inspect your vehicle's 10. Proceed to the passenger side alignment. Also check for rear tire, and repeat the tires, including the spare tire, damaged tires or wheels. See procedure in Step 8. if the vehicle has one, for signs When It Is Time for New Tires of wear or damage. See When It on page 9‑63 and Wheel 11. Proceed to the driver side rear Is Time for New Tires on tire, and repeat the procedure Replacement on page 9‑69. in Step 8. The horn sounds two page 9‑63 for more information. times to indicate the sensor identification code has been Tire Rotation matched to the driver side rear Tires should be rotated every tire, and the TPMS sensor 8 000 to 13 000 km (5,000 to matching process is no longer 8,000 miles). See Scheduled active. The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC Maintenance on page 10‑2. display screen goes off. The purpose of a regular tire 12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. 13. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure This will ensure that the vehicle continues to perform most like it level as indicated on the Tire When rotating the vehicle's tires, and Loading Information label. did when the tires were new. always use the correct rotation 14. Put the valve caps back on the pattern shown here. valve stems. Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire rotation. Vehicle Care 9-63

After the tires have been When It Is Time for New { WARNING rotated, adjust the front and rear Tires inflation pressures as shown on Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the the Tire and Loading Information Various factors, such as parts to which it is fastened, can maintenance, temperatures, driving label. See Tire Pressure on make wheel nuts become loose page 9 56 and Vehicle Load speeds, vehicle loading, and road ‑ after time. The wheel could come conditions influence when you need Limits on page 8‑12. off and cause an accident. When new tires. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor changing a wheel, remove any System. See Tire Pressure rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In Monitor Operation on page 9‑59. an emergency, use a cloth or a Make certain that all wheel nuts paper towel to do this; but be sure are properly tightened. See to use a scraper or wire brush “Wheel Nut Torque” under later, if needed, to get all the rust Capacities and Specifications on or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat page 11‑2. on page 9‑70.

One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which appear when the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or less of tread remaining. 9-64 Vehicle Care

The vehicle needs new tires if any The rubber in tires degrades over Buying New Tires of the following statements are true: time. This is also true for the spare GM has developed and matched . tire, if the vehicle has one, even You can see the indicators at specific tires for your vehicle. three or more places around if it is not being used. Multiple the tire. conditions affect how fast this aging The original equipment tires takes place, including temperatures, installed on your vehicle, . You can see cord or fabric loading conditions, and inflation when it was new, were designed showing through the tire's pressure maintenance. With proper to meet General Motors rubber. care and maintenance tires typically Tire Performance Criteria . The tread or sidewall is cracked, wear out before they degrade due to Specification (TPC Spec) age. If you are unsure about the cut, or snagged deep enough to system rating. If you need show cord or fabric. need to replace the tires as they get older, consult the tire manufacturer replacement tires, GM strongly . The tire has a bump, bulge, for more information. recommends that you get tires or split. with the same TPC Spec rating. . The tire has a puncture, cut, This way, your vehicle will or other damage that cannot be continue to have tires that are repaired well because of the size designed to give the same or location of the damage. performance and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original tires. Vehicle Care 9-65

GM's exclusive TPC Spec See Tire Inspection on page 9‑62 { WARNING system considers over a dozen and Tire Rotation on page 9‑62 critical specifications that impact for information on proper tire If you use bias-ply tires on the the overall performance of your rotation. vehicle, the wheel rim flanges vehicle, including brake system could develop cracks after performance, ride and handling, { WARNING many miles of driving. A tire traction control, and tire Mixing tires could cause you and/or wheel could fail pressure monitoring suddenly, causing a crash. performance. GM's TPC Spec to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different Use only radial-ply tires with number is molded onto the tire's the wheels on the vehicle. sidewall near the tire size. If the sizes, brands, or types (radial tires have an all‐season tread and bias-belted tires), the If you must replace your design, the TPC Spec number vehicle may not handle vehicle's tires with those that do will be followed by an MS for properly, and you could have not have a TPC Spec number, mud and snow. See Tire a crash. Using tires of different make sure they are the same Sidewall Labeling on page 9‑49 sizes, brands, or types may size, load range, speed rating, for additional information. also cause damage to your and construction type (radial and vehicle. Be sure to use the GM recommends replacing tires bias‐belted tires) as your correct size, brand, and type vehicle's original tires. in sets of four. This is because of tires on all wheels. It is all uniform tread depth on all tires right to drive with your will help keep your vehicle compact spare temporarily, as performing most like it did when it was developed for use on the tires were new. Replacing your vehicle. See Compact less than a full set of tires can Spare Tire on page 9‑76. affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle. 9-66 Vehicle Care

Vehicles that have a tire Different Size Tires and { WARNING pressure monitoring system Wheels could give an inaccurate If you add different sized low‐pressure warning if non‐TPC If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original wheels, your vehicle may not Spec rated tires are installed provide an acceptable level of on your vehicle. Non TPC equipment wheels and tires, this ‐ could affect the way your vehicle performance and safety if tires not Spec rated tires may give a performs, including its braking, ride recommended for those wheels low‐pressure warning that is and handling characteristics, are selected. You may increase higher or lower than the proper stability, and resistance to rollover. the chance that you will crash and warning level you would get with Additionally, if your vehicle has suffer serious injury. Only use GM TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire electronic systems such as anti‐lock specific wheel and tire systems Pressure Monitor System on brakes, rollover airbags, traction developed for your vehicle, and page 9‑57. control, and electronic stability have them properly installed by a control, the performance of these GM certified technician. Your vehicle's original systems can be affected. equipment tires are listed on See Buying New Tires on the Tire and Loading Information page 9‑64 and Accessories and Label. See Vehicle Load Limits Modifications on page 9‑3 for on page 8‑12 , for more additional information. information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle. Vehicle Care 9-67

Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system does Treadwear Grading not apply to deep tread, The treadwear grade is a winter-type snow tires, Quality grades can be found comparative rating based on the space-saver, or temporary use wear rate of the tire when tested where applicable on the tire spare tires, tires with nominal sidewall between tread shoulder under controlled conditions on rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches a specified government test and maximum section width. (25 to 30 cm), or to some For example: course. For example, a tire limited-production tires. graded 150 would wear one and Treadwear 200 Traction AA While the tires available on a half (1½) times as well on the Temperature A General Motors passenger cars government course as a tire The following information relates and light trucks may vary with graded 100. The relative to the system developed by the respect to these grades, they performance of tires depends United States National Highway must also conform to federal upon the actual conditions of Traffic Safety Administration safety requirements and their use, however, and may (NHTSA), which grades tires additional General Motors Tire depart significantly from the by treadwear, traction, and Performance Criteria (TPC) norm due to variations in temperature performance. standards. driving habits, service practices This applies only to vehicles All Passenger Car Tires Must and differences in road sold in the United States. Conform to Federal Safety characteristics and climate. The grades are molded on the Requirements In Addition To sidewalls of most passenger car These Grades. tires. The Uniform Tire Quality 9-68 Vehicle Care

Traction – AA, A, B, C Temperature – A, B, C properly inflated and not The traction grades, from The temperature grades are A overloaded. Excessive speed, highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, (the highest), B, and C, underinflation, or excessive and C. Those grades represent representing the tire's resistance loading, either separately or in the tire's ability to stop on wet to the generation of heat and combination, can cause heat pavement as measured under its ability to dissipate heat buildup and possible tire failure. controlled conditions on when tested under controlled specified government test conditions on a specified indoor Wheel Alignment and Tire surfaces of asphalt and laboratory test wheel. Sustained Balance concrete. A tire marked C may high temperature can cause The tires and wheels on the vehicle have poor traction performance. the material of the tire to were aligned and balanced carefully Warning: The traction grade degenerate and reduce tire life, at the factory to give the longest tire assigned to this tire is based on and excessive temperature life and best overall performance. straight-ahead braking traction can lead to sudden tire failure. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tests, and does not include The grade C corresponds to a tire balancing will not be necessary acceleration, cornering, level of performance which all on a regular basis. However, if there is unusual tire wear or the vehicle hydroplaning, or peak traction passenger car tires must meet pulls to one side or the other, the characteristics. under the Federal Motor Safety alignment should be checked. If the Standard No. 109. Grades B and vehicle vibrates when driving on a A represent higher levels of smooth road, the tires and wheels performance on the laboratory might need to be rebalanced. See test wheel than the minimum your dealer/retailer for proper required by law. Warning: The diagnosis. temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is Vehicle Care 9-69

Wheel Replacement Used Replacement Wheels { WARNING Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or Using the wrong replacement { WARNING corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel Putting a used wheel on the loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and nuts on your vehicle can be vehicle is dangerous. You cannot wheel nuts should be replaced. dangerous. It could affect the know how it has been used or If the wheel leaks air, replace it braking and handling of your how far it has been driven. (except some aluminum wheels, vehicle, make your tires lose air It could fail suddenly and cause a which can sometimes be repaired). and make you lose control. You crash. If you have to replace a See your dealer/retailer if any of could have a collision in which wheel, use a new GM original these conditions exist. you or others could be injured. equipment wheel. Your dealer/retailer will know the Always use the correct wheel, kind of wheel you need. wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for Each new wheel should have the replacement. same load-carrying capacity, Notice: The wrong wheel can diameter, width, offset, and be also cause problems with bearing mounted the same way as the life, brake cooling, speedometer one it replaces. or odometer calibration, If you need to replace any of the headlamp aim, bumper height, wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or Tire Pressure Monitor System or tire chain clearance to the (TPMS) sensors, replace them only body and chassis. with new GM original equipment See If a Tire Goes Flat on parts. This way, you will be sure to page 9 70 for more information. have the right wheel, wheel bolts, ‑ wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for the vehicle. 9-70 Vehicle Care

Tire Chains A rear blowout, particularly on a WARNING (Continued) curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction { WARNING vehicle's wheels. If you do find you would use in a skid. In any rear traction devices that will fit, install Do not use tire chains. There is blowout remove your foot from the them on the front tires. accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle not enough clearance. Tire chains under control by steering the way used on a vehicle without the If a Tire Goes Flat you want the vehicle to go. It may proper amount of clearance can be very bumpy and noisy, but you cause damage to the brakes, It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving, especially if can still steer. Gently brake to a suspension or other vehicle parts. stop, well off the road if possible. The area damaged by the tire you maintain your vehicle's tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is chains could cause you to lose { WARNING control of the vehicle and you or much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a others may be injured in a crash. blowout, here are a few tips about Lifting a vehicle and getting under Use another type of traction what to expect and what to do: it to do maintenance or repairs device only if its manufacturer is dangerous without the If a front tire fails, the flat tire appropriate safety equipment and recommends it for use on the creates a drag that pulls the vehicle training. If a jack is provided with vehicle and tire size combination toward that side. Take your foot off the vehicle, it is designed only for and road conditions. Follow that the accelerator pedal and grip the manufacturer's instructions. To steering wheel firmly. Steer to changing a flat tire. If it is used for help avoid damage to the vehicle, maintain lane position, and then anything else, you or others could drive slowly, readjust or remove gently brake to a stop well out of the be badly injured or killed if the the device if it is contacting the traffic lane. vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack vehicle, and do not spin the is provided with the vehicle, only (Continued) use it for changing a flat tire. Vehicle Care 9-71

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly WARNING (Continued) to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard 3. Turn off the engine and do Warning Flashers on page 5‑3. not restart while the vehicle is raised. { WARNING 4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle. Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip To be certain the vehicle will not off the jack and roll over or fall on move, put blocks at the front and you or other people. You and they rear of the tire farthest away from could be badly injured or even the one being changed. That A. Wheel Block killed. Find a level place to would be the tire on the other B. Flat Tire change your tire. To help prevent side, at the opposite end of the vehicle. The following information explains the vehicle from moving: how to repair or change a tire. 1. Set the parking brake firmly. When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), 2. Put an automatic use the following example as a transmission shift lever in guide to assist you in the placement P (Park), or shift a manual of wheel blocks (A). transmission to 1 (First) or R (Reverse). (Continued) 9-72 Vehicle Care

Tire Changing 4. Place the spare tire next to the Store the wheel cover in the tire being changed. trunk until you have the flat tire Removing the Spare Tire and 5. The jack and tools are stored repaired or replaced. Tools below the spare tire. Remove The equipment you need is located them from their container and in the trunk. place them near the tire being changed. 1. Open the trunk. 2. Remove the spare tire cover. Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 9‑70 for more information. 2. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen and 3. Turn the wheel wrench remove the wheel nut caps. counterclockwise to loosen all If needed, finish loosening them the wheel nuts, but do not by hand. The nut caps will not remove them yet. come off of the wheel cover. Notice: Make sure that the jack The edge of the wheel cover lift head is in the correct position 3. Turn the retainer nut could be sharp, so do not try to or you may damage your vehicle. counterclockwise and remove remove the cover with your bare The repairs would not be covered the spare tire. hands. Do not drop the cap or by your warranty. lay it face down, as it could become scratched or damaged. Vehicle Care 9-73

{ WARNING

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.

4. Position the jack head, as shown 5. Attach the jack handle. { WARNING Set the jack to the necessary height before positioning it below { WARNING Lifting a vehicle and getting the jacking point. Getting under a vehicle when it is under it to do maintenance or jacked up is dangerous. If the repairs is dangerous without the vehicle slips off the jack, you appropriate safety equipment and could be badly injured or killed. training. If a jack is provided with Never get under a vehicle when it the vehicle, it is designed only for is supported only by a jack. changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire. 9-74 Vehicle Care

WARNING (Continued)

paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 9‑70.

6. Turn the jack handle clockwise 7. Remove all of the wheel nuts. to raise the vehicle far enough 8. Remove the flat tire. off the ground for the compact spare to fit under the vehicle. { WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When 9. Remove any rust or dirt from the changing a wheel, remove any wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel. rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In 10. Install the compact spare tire. an emergency, use a cloth or a (Continued) Vehicle Care 9-75

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Never use oil or grease on bolts to the proper torque specification or nuts because the nuts might after replacing. Follow the torque come loose. The vehicle's wheel specification supplied by the could fall off, causing a crash. aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel 11. Put the wheel nuts back on nuts. See Capacities and with the rounded end of the Specifications on page 11‑2 for nuts toward the wheel. Turn original equipment wheel nut each nut clockwise by hand torque specifications. until the wheel is held against the hub. 13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in Notice: Improperly tightened a crisscross sequence, as 12. Lower the vehicle by wheel nuts can lead to brake shown. turning the jack handle pulsation and rotor damage. counterclockwise. Lower To avoid expensive brake repairs, 14. Lower the jack all the way and the jack completely. evenly tighten the wheel nuts in remove the jack from under the the proper sequence and to the vehicle. { WARNING proper torque specification. See 15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly Capacities and Specifications on with the wheel wrench. Wheel nuts that are improperly or page 11‑2 for the wheel nut torque specification. Notice: Wheel covers will not fit incorrectly tightened can cause on your vehicle's compact spare. the wheels to become loose or If you try to put a wheel cover on come off. The wheel nuts should the compact spare, the cover or be tightened with a torque wrench the spare could be damaged. (Continued) 9-76 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire The compact spare is for temporary If this vehicle has a compact spare and Tools use only. Replace the compact tire it was fully inflated when the spare tire with a full-size tire as vehicle was new, however, it can { WARNING soon as you can. lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should Storing a jack, a tire, or other Compact Spare Tire be 420 kPa (60 psi). equipment in the passenger After installing the compact spare compartment of the vehicle could { WARNING on the vehicle, stop as soon as cause injury. In a sudden stop or possible and make sure the spare collision, loose equipment could Driving with more than one tire is correctly inflated. The strike someone. Store all these in compact spare tire at a time could compact spare is made to perform the proper place. result in loss of braking and well at speeds up to 105 km/h handling. This could lead to a (65 mph) for distances up to To store the flat or spare tire and crash and you or others could be 5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you can tools: injured. Use only one compact finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your 1. Place the jack and tools in the spare tire at a time. convenience. Of course, it is best to rear storage compartment. replace the spare with a full-size tire 2. Place the flat or spare tire in the as soon as possible. The spare tire storage compartment below the will last longer and be in good floor covering. shape in case it is needed again. Secure it with the retainer nut. If the wheel is larger than the spare, place the floor cover on the projecting wheel. Vehicle Care 9-77

Notice: When the compact spare Jump Starting Trying to start the vehicle by is installed, do not take the pushing or pulling it will not vehicle through an automatic If the battery has run down, try to work, and it could damage the car wash with guide rails. The use another vehicle and some vehicle. jumper cables to start your vehicle. compact spare can get caught on The jump start positive (A) is Be sure to use the following steps to the rails which can damage the located under a trim cover in the do it safely. tire, wheel and other parts of the engine compartment on the driver vehicle. side of the vehicle. Do not use the compact spare on { WARNING other vehicles. Batteries can hurt you. They can Do not mix the compact spare tire be dangerous because: or wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire . They contain acid that can and its wheel together. burn you. Notice: Tire chains will not fit the . They contain gas that can compact spare. Using them can explode or ignite. damage the vehicle and can . They contain enough damage the chains too. Do not electricity to burn you. use tire chains on the compact spare. If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you. This post is used instead of a direct connection to the battery. Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty. 9-78 Vehicle Care

Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle. 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and switch off all lights and accessories in both vehicles, except the hazard warning flashers if needed.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up even 1. Check the other vehicle. It must 2. Position the two vehicles so that when the engine is not running have a 12-volt battery with a they are not touching. and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any negative ground system. 3. Set the parking brake firmly and Notice: If the other vehicle's put the shift lever in P (Park). underhood electric fan. system is not a 12-volt system See Shifting Into Park on with a negative ground, both page 8‑24. vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle. Vehicle Care 9-79

6. Do not let the other end of the { WARNING { WARNING red positive (+) cable touch metal. Connect it to the Using a match near a battery can Fans or other moving engine positive (+) terminal of the cause battery gas to explode. parts can injure you badly. Keep good battery (B). Use a remote People have been hurt doing this, your hands away from moving positive (+) terminal if the vehicle and some have been blinded. parts once the engine is running. has one. Use a flashlight if you need more light. 7. Connect one end of the black negative (–) cable to the Be sure the battery has enough negative (–) terminal of the water. You do not need to add good battery (C). Use a remote water to the battery installed in negative (−) terminal if the your new vehicle. But if a battery vehicle has one. has filler caps, be sure the right Do not let the other end touch amount of fluid is there. If it is low, anything until the next step. add water to take care of that The other end of the negative (–) first. If you don't, explosive gas cable does not go to the dead could be present. battery. It goes to a heavy, Battery fluid contains acid that unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative ( ) terminal can burn you. Do not get it on 5. Connect one end of the red – on the vehicle with the dead you. If you accidentally get it in positive (+) cable to the jump battery. your eyes or on your skin, flush start positive (+) post (A). Use a the place with water and get remote positive (+) terminal if the medical help immediately. vehicle has one. 9-80 Vehicle Care

8. Connect the other end of the To disconnect the jumper cables black negative (–) cable to an from both vehicles: unpainted heavy metal engine 1. Disconnect the black part (D) away from the dead negative (−) cable from the battery, but not near engine vehicle that had the dead parts that move. battery. 9. Start the engine in the vehicle 2. Disconnect the black with the good battery and run negative (−) cable from the the engine at idle speed for at vehicle with the good battery. least four minutes. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) 10. Try to start the vehicle that had cable from the vehicle with the the dead battery. If it will not Jumper Cable Removal good battery. start after a few tries, it probably needs service. A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) Part or Remote Negative ( ) cable from the other vehicle. Notice: If the jumper cables are – Terminal connected or removed in the 5. Return the caps over the wrong order, electrical shorting B. Good Battery or Remote positive (+) and negative (–) may occur and damage the Positive (+) and Remote terminals to their original vehicle. The repairs would not be Negative (–) Terminals positions. covered by the vehicle warranty. C. Dead Battery or Remote Always connect and remove the Positive (+) Terminal jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal. Vehicle Care 9-81

Towing Recreational Vehicle Here are some important things to Towing consider before recreational vehicle Towing the Vehicle towing: Recreational vehicle towing means . What is the towing capacity To avoid damage, the disabled towing the vehicle behind another of the towing vehicle? vehicle should be towed with all vehicle – such as behind a Be sure to read the tow four wheels off the ground. Consult motorhome. The two most common vehicle manufacturer's your dealer/retailer or a professional types of recreational vehicle towing recommendations. towing service if the disabled are known as dinghy towing and vehicle must be towed. See dolly towing. Dinghy towing is . What is the distance that will be Roadside Assistance Program on towing the vehicle with all four travelled? Some vehicles have page 12‑6. wheels on the ground. Dolly towing restrictions on how far and how is towing the vehicle with two long they can tow. To tow the vehicle behind wheels on the ground and two . another vehicle for recreational Is the proper towing equipment wheels up on a device known purposes such as behind a going to be used? See your — as a dolly. motorhome, see Recreational dealer/retailer or trailering Vehicle Towing following. professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations. . Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed. 9-82 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing From the Front 2. Turn the engine off and firmly set Dinghy Towing From the Rear the parking brake. When dinghy towing, the vehicle should be run at the beginning of 3. Following the manufacturer's each day and at each RV fuel stop instructions, securely attach the for about five minutes. This will vehicle being towed to the tow ensure proper lubrication of vehicle. transmission components. 4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ ACCESSORY and shift the transmission to N (Neutral). 5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle. When towing the vehicle for The vehicle was not designed to be extended periods of time, start the towed from the rear with all four vehicle as often as possible to wheels on the ground. prevent battery drain. This should be done when the tow vehicle is parked. Use the following procedure to dinghy tow the vehicle from the front with all four wheels on the ground: 1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow vehicle and shift the transmission to P (Park). Vehicle Care 9-83

Dolly Towing From the Front Use the following procedure to dolly Dolly Towing From the Rear tow the vehicle from the front: 1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. 2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly. 3. Shift the transmission to P (Park). 4. Firmly set the parking brake. 5. Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to . Vehicles with front-wheel drive ensure that the front wheels are The vehicle cannot be dolly towed can be dolly towed from the locked into the straight ahead from the rear. front. position. . Vehicles with all-wheel drive can 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly be dolly towed from the front following the manufacturer's with a maximum speed not to instructions. exceed the legal limit or 50 km/h 7. Release the parking brake only (30 mph). after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle. 8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. 9-84 Vehicle Care

Appearance Care Notice: Machine compounding or Protecting Exterior Bright Metal aggressive polishing on a Parts Exterior Care basecoat/clearcoat paint finish Bright metal parts should be may damage it. Use only cleaned regularly to keep their Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ non-abrasive waxes and polishes luster. Wash with water or use Lenses that are made for a basecoat/ chrome polish on chrome or clearcoat paint finish on the stainless steel trim, if necessary. Use only lukewarm or cold water, a vehicle. soft cloth and a car washing soap to Use special care with aluminum Foreign materials such as calcium clean exterior lamps and lenses. trim. To avoid damaging protective chloride and other salts, ice melting Follow instructions under Washing trim, never use auto or chrome “ agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, the Vehicle” later in this section. polish, steam or caustic soap to bird droppings, chemicals from clean aluminum. A coating of Finish Care industrial chimneys, etc., can wax, rubbed to high polish, is damage the vehicle's finish if they Occasional waxing or mild polishing recommended for all bright metal remain on painted surfaces. Wash parts. of the vehicle by hand may be the vehicle as soon as possible. necessary to remove residue from If necessary, use non-abrasive the paint finish. Approved cleaning cleaners that are marked safe for products can be obtained from your painted surfaces to remove foreign dealer/retailer. matter. If the vehicle has a basecoat/ Exterior painted surfaces are clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat subject to aging, weather and gives more depth and gloss to the chemical fallout that can take their colored basecoat. Always use toll over a period of years. To keep waxes and polishes that are the paint finish looking new, keep non-abrasive and made for a the vehicle garaged or covered basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. whenever possible. Vehicle Care 9-85

Washing the Vehicle Do not use cleaning agents that are Dry the finish with a soft, clean petroleum based or that contain chamois or an all-cotton towel to To preserve the vehicle's finish, acid or abrasives, as they can avoid surface scratches and water keep it clean by washing it often. damage the paint, metal or plastic spotting. Do not wash the vehicle in direct on the vehicle. Approved cleaning High pressure car washes could sunlight and use a car products can be obtained from cause water to enter the vehicle. washing soap. your dealer/retailer. Follow all Avoid using high pressure washes Notice: Certain cleaners contain manufacturer directions regarding closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the chemicals that can damage the correct product usage, necessary surface of the vehicle. Use of power emblems or nameplates on the safety precautions and appropriate washers exceeding 8,274 kPa vehicle. Check the cleaning disposal of any vehicle care (1,200 psi) can result in damage or product label. If it states that it product. removal of paint and decals. should not be used on plastic Rinse the vehicle well, before Notice: Conveyor systems on parts, do not use it on the vehicle washing and after to remove all some automatic car washes could or damage may occur and it cleaning agents completely. If they damage the vehicle. There may would not be covered by the are allowed to dry on the surface, not be enough clearance for the warranty. they could stain. undercarriage. Check with the car wash manager before using the automatic car wash. 9-86 Vehicle Care

Weatherstrips Notice: Chrome wheels and other The surface of these wheels is chrome trim may be damaged if similar to the painted surface of the Silicone grease on weatherstrips will the vehicle is not washed after vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, make them last longer, seal better, driving on roads that have been chemicals, abrasive polishes, and not stick or squeak. Apply sprayed with magnesium, calcium abrasive cleaners, cleaners with silicone grease with a clean cloth. or sodium chloride. These acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes During very cold, damp weather chlorides are used on roads for on them because the surface could frequent application may be conditions such as ice and dust. be damaged. Do not use chrome required. See Recommended Fluids Always wash the vehicle's polish on aluminum wheels. and Lubricants on page 10‑7. chrome with soap and water after Notice: Using chrome polish on Wheels and Trim — Aluminum exposure. aluminum wheels could damage or Chrome Notice: Using strong soaps, the wheels. The repairs would The vehicle may have either chemicals, abrasive polishes, not be covered by the vehicle aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. cleaners, brushes, or cleaners warranty. Use chrome polish on that contain acid on aluminum chrome wheels only. Keep the wheels clean using a soft or chrome-plated wheels, could Use chrome polish only on clean cloth with mild soap and damage the surface of the water. Rinse with clean water. After chrome-plated wheels, but avoid wheel(s). The repairs would any painted surface of the wheel, rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft not be covered by the vehicle clean towel. A wax may then be and buff off immediately after warranty. Use only approved application. applied. cleaners on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Vehicle Care 9-87

Notice: Driving the vehicle Windshield and Wiper Blades Tires through an automatic car wash Clean the outside of the windshield Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to that has silicone carbide tire with glass cleaner. clean the tires. cleaning brushes, could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated Clean the rubber blades using a lint Notice: Using petroleum-based wheels. The repairs would not be free cloth or paper towel soaked tire dressing products on the covered by the vehicle warranty. with windshield washer fluid or a vehicle may damage the paint Never drive a vehicle that has mild detergent. Wash the windshield finish and/or tires. When applying aluminum or chrome-plated thoroughly when cleaning the a tire dressing, always wipe off wheels through an automatic car blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, any overspray from all painted wash that uses silicone carbide and a buildup of vehicle wash/ surfaces on the vehicle. tire cleaning brushes. wax treatments may cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades Sheet Metal Damage if they are worn or damaged. If the vehicle is damaged and Wipers can be damaged by: requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body . Extreme dusty conditions repair shop applies anti-corrosion . Sand and salt material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion . Heat and sun protection. . Snow and ice, without proper Original manufacturer replacement removal parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty. 9-88 Vehicle Care

Finish Damage At least every spring, flush these Interior Care materials from the underbody with Any stone chips, fractures or deep plain water. Clean any areas where The vehicle's interior will continue to scratches in the finish should be mud and debris can collect. Dirt look its best if it is cleaned often. repaired right away. Bare metal will packed in close areas of the frame Dust and dirt can accumulate on the corrode quickly and may develop should be loosened before being upholstery and cause damage to into major repair expense. flushed. Your dealer/retailer or an the carpet, fabric, leather, and Minor chips and scratches can be underbody car washing system can plastic surfaces. Stains should be repaired with touch-up materials do this. removed quickly as extreme heat available from your dealer/retailer. could cause them to set rapidly. Chemical Paint Spotting Larger areas of finish damage can Lighter colored interiors may be corrected in your dealer's/ Some weather and atmospheric require more frequent cleaning. retailer's body and paint shop. conditions can create a chemical Newspapers and garments that can Underbody Maintenance fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall transfer color to home furnishings upon and attack painted surfaces on can also transfer color to the Chemicals used for ice and snow the vehicle. This damage can take vehicle's interior. removal and dust control can collect two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped Remove dust from small buttons on the underbody. If these are not discolorations, and small, irregular and knobs with a small brush with removed, corrosion and rust can dark spots etched into the paint soft bristles. develop on the underbody parts surface. such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection. Vehicle Care 9-89

Your dealer/retailer has products for Cleaners can contain solvents that . Never apply heavy pressure or cleaning the vehicle's interior. When can become concentrated in the rub aggressively with a cleaning cleaning the vehicle's interior, only vehicle's interior. Before using cloth. Use of heavy pressure can use cleaners specifically designed cleaners, read and adhere to all damage the interior and does for the surfaces that are being safety instructions on the label. not improve the effectiveness of cleaned. Permanent damage can While cleaning the vehicle's interior, soil removal. result from using cleaners on maintain adequate ventilation by . Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. surfaces for which they were not opening the vehicle's doors and Avoid laundry detergents or intended. Apply the cleaner directly windows. dishwashing soaps with to the cleaning cloth to prevent Do not clean the interior using the degreasers. Using too much over-spray. Remove any accidental following cleaners or techniques: soap will leave a residue that over-spray from other surfaces leaves streaks and attracts dirt. immediately. . Never use a knife or any other For liquid cleaners, about sharp object to remove a soil 20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of Notice: Using abrasive cleaners from any interior surface. when cleaning glass surfaces on water is a good guide. . the vehicle, could scratch the Never use a stiff brush. It can . Do not heavily saturate the glass and/or cause damage to the cause damage to the vehicle's upholstery while cleaning. rear window defogger. When interior surfaces. . cleaning the glass on the vehicle, Damage to the vehicle's interior use only a soft cloth and glass may result from the use of many cleaner. organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. 9-90 Vehicle Care

Fabric/Carpet To clean: If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or spot Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white lifter may be necessary. Test a small brush attachment to remove dust cloth with water or club soda. hidden area for colorfastness before and loose dirt. A canister vacuum 2. Remove excess moisture. using a commercial upholstery with a beater bar in the nozzle may cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally only be used on floor carpet and 3. Start on the outside edge of the cleaned area gives any impression carpeted floor mats. For soils, soil and gently rub toward the that a ring formation may result, always try to remove them first with center. Continue cleaning, using clean the entire surface. plain water or club soda. Before a clean area of the cloth each cleaning, gently remove as much of time it becomes soiled. A paper towel can be used to blot the soil as possible using one of the 4. Continue to gently rub the excess moisture from the fabric or following techniques: soiled area. carpet after the cleaning process. . For liquids: gently blot the 5. If the soil is not completely remaining soil with a paper removed, use a mild soap towel. Allow the soil to absorb solution and repeat the cleaning into the paper towel until no process with plain water. more can be removed. . For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and then vacuum. Vehicle Care 9-91

Leather Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Some commercial products may increase gloss on the instrument To remove dust, a soft cloth Other Plastic Surfaces panel. The increase in gloss may dampened with water can be used. To remove dust, a soft cloth cause annoying reflections in the If a more thorough cleaning is dampened with water can be windshield and even make it difficult necessary, a soft cloth dampened used. If a more thorough cleaning to see through the windshield under with a mild soap solution can be is necessary, a clean soft cloth certain conditions. used. Allow the leather to dry dampened with a mild soap solution naturally. Do not use heat, steam, can be used to gently remove Care of Safety Belts or spot lifters or spot removers, dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters Keep belts clean and dry. or shoe polish on leather. Many or removers on plastic surfaces. commercial leather cleaners Many commercial cleaners and and coatings that are sold to coatings that are sold to preserve { WARNING preserve and protect leather and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the may permanently change the Do not bleach or dye safety belts. appearance and feel of the appearance and feel of the interior It may severely weaken them. leather and are not recommended. and are not recommended. Do not In a crash, they might not be able Do not use silicone or wax-based use silicone or wax-based products, to provide adequate protection. products, or those containing or those containing organic solvents Clean safety belts only with mild organic solvents to clean the to clean the vehicle's interior soap and lukewarm water. vehicle's interior because they can because they can alter the alter the appearance by increasing appearance by increasing the the gloss in a non-uniform manner. gloss in a non-uniform manner. 9-92 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES Service and Maintenance 10-1

General Information Please read the information under Service and Scheduled Maintenance. To keep Maintenance Notice: Maintenance the vehicle in good condition, see intervals, checks, inspections, your dealer/retailer. recommended fluids, and The maintenance schedule is for lubricants are necessary to General Information vehicles that: General Information ...... 10-1 keep this vehicle in good working condition. Damage caused by . Carry passengers and cargo Scheduled Maintenance failure to follow scheduled within recommended limits on Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 10-2 maintenance might not be the Tire and Loading Information covered by the vehicle warranty. label. See Vehicle Load Limits Recommended Fluids, on page 8‑12. Lubricants, and Parts Proper vehicle maintenance helps . Recommended Fluids and to keep the vehicle in good working Are driven on reasonable road Lubricants ...... 10-7 condition, improves fuel economy, surfaces within legal driving Maintenance Replacement and reduces vehicle emissions for limits. Parts ...... 10-9 better air quality. . Use the recommended fuel. See Recommended Fuel on Maintenance Records Because of all the different ways people use vehicles, maintenance page 8‑49. Maintenance Records ...... 10-10 needs vary. The vehicle might need more frequent checks and services. 10-2 Service and Maintenance

technicians, uses genuine GM Scheduled { WARNING replacement parts, as well as, up to date tools and equipment to ensure Maintenance Performing maintenance work can fast and accurate diagnostics. be dangerous. Some jobs can When the Change Engine Oil cause serious injury. Perform The proper replacement parts, Soon Message Displays maintenance work only if you fluids, and lubricants to use are Change engine oil and filter. have the required know-how and listed in Recommended Fluids and See Engine Oil on page 9‑11. the proper tools and equipment. Lubricants on page 10‑7 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on An Emission Control Service. If in doubt, see your dealer/ page 10 9. We recommend the use retailer to have a qualified ‑ When the “Change Engine Oil of genuine parts from your dealer/ Soon” message displays, service is technician do the work. retailer. See Doing Your Own Service required for the vehicle as soon as possible, within the next 1 000 km/ Work on page 9‑4. Rotation of New Tires 600 miles. If driving under the best To maintain ride, handling, and At your General Motors dealer/ conditions, the engine oil life system performance of the vehicle, it is might not indicate the need for retailer, you can be certain that important that the first rotation you will receive the highest level vehicle service for more than a year. service for new tires be performed The engine oil and filter must be of service available. Your dealer/ when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km retailer has specially trained service changed at least once a year and (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire the oil life system must be reset. Rotation on page 9‑62. Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians who will perform this work and reset the system. Service and Maintenance 10-3

If the engine oil life system is reset Maintenance I . Engine air cleaner filter accidentally, service the vehicle inspection (vehicles driven . Change engine oil and filter. within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since in dusty conditions only). See Engine Oil on page 9 11. the last service. Reset the oil life ‑ See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on An Emission Control Service. system whenever the oil is changed. page 9‑15. See Engine Oil Life System on . Engine coolant level check. . Brake system inspection page 9‑13. See Engine Coolant on (or every 12 months, whichever page 9‑18. When the “Service Engine Oil” occurs first). . message displays, certain services, Windshield washer fluid level Maintenance II checks, and inspections are check. See Washer Fluid on required. The services described page 9‑24. . Perform all services described in Maintenance I. for Maintenance I should be . Tire inflation check. See Tire performed at every engine oil Pressure on page 9‑56. . Steering and suspension change. The services described inspection. Visual inspection . Tire wear inspection. See Tire for Maintenance II should be for damaged, loose, or missing Inspection on page 9 62. performed when: ‑ parts or signs of wear. . . Rotate tires. See Tire Rotation Maintenance I was performed . Engine cooling system on page 9 62. the last time the engine oil was ‑ inspection. Visual inspection changed. . Fluids visual leak check of hoses, pipes, fittings, and . It has been 10 months or more (or every 12 months, whichever clamps and replacement, since the “Service Engine Oil” occurs first). A leak in any if needed. message has displayed or since system must be repaired the last service. and the fluid level checked. 10-4 Service and Maintenance

. Windshield wiper blade . Restraint system component Additional Required Services inspection for wear, cracking, check. See Safety System or contamination and windshield Check on page 2‑24. At Each Fuel Stop and wiper blade cleaning, . Automatic transmission fluid . Engine oil level check. if contaminated. See Exterior level check and adding fluid, See Engine Oil on page 9‑11. Care on page 9‑84. Worn if needed. See Automatic . Engine coolant level check. See or damaged wiper blade Transmission Fluid on replacement. See Wiper Blade Engine Coolant on page 9‑18. page 9‑14. Replacement on page 9‑30. . Windshield washer fluid level . Engine air cleaner filter . check. See Washer Fluid on Body hinges and latches, inspection. See Engine Air key lock cylinders, folding page 9‑24. Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑15. seat hardware, and sunroof Once a Month (if equipped) lubrication. See . Passenger compartment Recommended Fluids and air filter replacement (or every . Tire inflation check. See Tire Lubricants on page 10‑7. 12 months, whichever occurs Pressure on page 9‑56. More frequent lubrication may first). More frequent replacement . Tire wear inspection. See Tire be required when vehicle is may be required if vehicle is Inspection on page 9‑62. exposed to a corrosive driven regularly under dusty environment. Applying silicone conditions. grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Service and Maintenance 10-5

Once a Year First Engine Oil Change After First Engine Oil Change After Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles . See Starter Switch Check on page 9‑28. . Fuel system inspection for . Automatic transmission fluid damage or leaks. change (normal service). . See Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System See Automatic Transmission First Engine Oil Change After Fluid on page 9 14. Check on page 9‑29. Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles ‑ . Spark plug replacement and . See Ignition Transmission Lock . Engine air cleaner filter spark plug wires inspection. Check on page 9‑29. replacement. See Engine Air An Emission Control Service. . See Park Brake and P (Park) Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑15. First Engine Oil Change After Mechanism Check on . Automatic transmission fluid page 9‑30. change (severe service) for Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles . . Engine cooling system and vehicles mainly driven in Engine cooling system drain, pressure cap pressure check. heavy city traffic in hot weather, flush, and refill, cooling system Radiator and air conditioning in hilly or mountainous terrain, and cap pressure check, and condenser outside cleaning. when frequently towing a cleaning of outside of radiator See Cooling System on trailer, or used for taxi, and air conditioning condenser page 9‑17. police, or delivery service. (or every 5 years, whichever See Automatic Transmission occurs first). See Cooling . Exhaust system and nearby heat Fluid on page 9‑14. System on page 9‑17. An shields inspection for loose or Emission Control Service. damaged components. . Engine accessory drive belt . Accelerator pedal check for inspection for fraying, excessive damage, high effort, or binding. cracks, or obvious damage and Replace if needed. replacement, if needed. An Emission Control Service. 10-6 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Service Maintenance I II Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. • • Engine coolant level check. • • Windshield washer fluid level check. • • Tire inflation pressures check. • • Tire wear inspection. • • Rotate tires. • • Fluids visual leak check. • • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • • Brake system inspection. • • Steering and suspension inspection. • Engine cooling system inspection. • Windshield wiper blades inspection. • Body components lubrication. • Restraint system components check. • Automatic transmission fluid level check. • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). • Passenger compartment air filter replacement. • Service and Maintenance 10-7

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst Engine Oil symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil on page 9‑11. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant. Engine Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 9‑18. DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, Hydraulic Brake System in Canada 88862807). Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent. Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. 10-8 Service and Maintenance

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Key Lock Cylinders in Canada 10953474). Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB. Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Hood and Door Hinges in Canada 10953474). Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) Weatherstrip Conditioning or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887). Service and Maintenance 10-9

Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer. Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 55560894 A3128C Engine Oil Filter 2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G 3.0L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48 3.6L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48 Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 13271191 CF176 Spark Plugs 2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41–108 3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41–109 3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41–109 Wiper Blades Driver Side – 65 cm (25.6 in) 25892079 — Passenger Side – 45 cm (17.7 in) 25892080 — 10-10 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Records After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Service and Maintenance 10-11

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading 10-12 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Technical Data 11-1

Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN Vehicle Identification is the engine code. This code Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine, Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement Number (VIN) ...... 11-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications” Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications Label ...... 11-1 on page 11‑2 for the vehicle's engine code. Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications ...... 11-2 Service Parts Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 11-4 This legal identifier is in the front Identification Label corner of the instrument panel, on This label, in the trunk, has the the left side of the vehicle. It can be following information: seen through the windshield from . Vehicle Identification outside. The VIN also appears on Number (VIN) the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and certificates of title . Model designation and registration. . Paint information . Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle. 11-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications Capacities Application Metric English For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Engine Cooling System 2.4L L4 Engine 7.1 L 7.5 qt 3.0L V6 Engine 9.4 L 9.9 qt 3.6L V6 Engine 9.4 L 9.9 qt Engine Oil with Filter 2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt 3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt 3.6L V6 Engine 5.2 L 5.5 qt Fuel Tank AWD 74.0 L 19.5 gal FWD 70.5 L 18.6 gal Technical Data 11-3

Capacities Application Metric English Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill) 2.4L L4 Engine, 6–Speed Automatic 8.0 L 8.5 qt 3.0L V6 Engine, All Wheel Drive, 6–Speed Automatic 9.0 L 9.5 qt 3.0L V6 Engine, Front Wheel Drive, 6–Speed Automatic 9.0 L 9.5 qt 3.6L V6 Engine, 6–Speed Automatic 9.0 L 9.5 qt Wheel Nut Torque 150 Y 110 ft lb *See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 9‑14 for information on checking fluid level. All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 2.4L L4 Engine C Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in) 3.0L V6 Engine G Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in) 3.6L V6 Engine V Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in) 11-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.4L L4 Engine 3.0L, 3.6L V6 Engines (Hydraulic Power Steering) 2.4L L4 Engine (Electric Power Steering) Customer Information 12-1

Reporting Safety Defects Customer Information Customer Reporting Safety Defects to Information the United States Government ...... 12-14 Customer Satisfaction Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are Customer Satisfaction Government ...... 12-15 important to your dealer and to Procedure ...... 12-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Buick. Normally, any concerns General Motors ...... 12-15 Customer Assistance Offices with the sales transaction or the (US, Can) ...... 12-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of your vehicle will be Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your GM dealer's sales Telephone (TTY) Users Privacy Vehicle Data Recording and or service departments. Sometimes, (US, Can) ...... 12-4 however, despite the best intentions Online Owner Center ...... 12-4 Privacy ...... 12-15 Event Data Recorders ...... 12-16 of all concerned, misunderstandings GM Mobility Reimbursement ® can occur. If your concern has not Program ...... 12-5 OnStar ...... 12-16 Navigation System ...... 12-17 been resolved to your satisfaction, Roadside Assistance the following steps should be taken: Program ...... 12-6 Radio Frequency Scheduling Service Identification (RFID) ...... 12-17 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Appointments ...... 12-8 Radio Frequency with a member of dealership Courtesy Transportation Statement ...... 12-17 management. Normally, concerns Program ...... 12-8 can be quickly resolved at that level. Collision Damage Repair . . . 12-10 If the matter has already been Service Publications reviewed with the sales, service, Ordering Information ...... 12-13 or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager. 12-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO : If after contacting a When contacting Buick, please case will generally be heard within member of dealership management, remember that your concern will 40 days. If you do not agree with the it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's decision given in your case, you resolved by the dealership without facility. That is why we suggest you may reject it and proceed with any further help, in the U.S., contact the follow Step One first if you have a other venue for relief available Buick Customer Assistance Center concern. to you. by calling 1-800-521-7300. In STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Canada, contact General Motors of Both General Motors and your Line Program using the toll-free Canada Customer Communication dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them Centre by calling 1‐800-263-3777 sure you are completely satisfied at the following address: (English) or 1-800-263-7854 with your new vehicle. However, in (French). BBB Auto Line Program the United States, if you continue to Council of Better Business We encourage you to call the remain unsatisfied after following Bureaus, Inc. toll-free number in order to give your the procedure outlined in Steps One 4200 Wilson Boulevard inquiry prompt attention. Please and Two, you can file with the BBB Suite 800 have the following information Auto Line Program to enforce your Arlington, VA 22203-1838 available to give the Customer rights. Assistance Representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 The BBB Auto Line Program is an dr.bbb.org/goauto . Vehicle Identification Number. out of court program administered This is available from the vehicle by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all registration or title, or the plate Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of at the top left of the instrument disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by panel. the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage and other Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves . Dealership name and location be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility . Vehicle delivery date and dispute resolution program prior to limitations and/or discontinue its present mileage filing a court action, use of the participation in this program. program is free of charge and your Customer Information 12-3

STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance Owners: In the event that you eligibility in the Canadian Motor do not feel your concerns have Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), Offices been addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Buick encourages customers to call procedure outlined in Steps one Alternatively you may call the the toll-free number for assistance. and two, General Motors of Canada General Motors Customer However, if a customer wishes to Limited wants you to be aware Communication Centre, write or e-mail Buick, the letter of its participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-3777 (English), should be addressed to: Mediation/Arbitration program. 1-800-263-7854 (French), or General Motors of Canada Limited you may write to the Mediation/ United States — Customer has committed to binding arbitration Arbitration Program at the following Assistance of owner disputes involving address. Your inquiry should be Buick Customer Assistance Center factory-related vehicle service accompanied by your Vehicle P.O. Box 33136 claims. The program provides for Identification Number (VIN). Detroit, MI 48232-5136 the review of the facts involved by Mediation/Arbitration Program www.Buick.com an impartial third party arbiter, and c/o Customer Communication 1-800-521-7300 may include an informal hearing Centre before the arbiter. The program is 1-800-832-8425 (For Text General Motors of Canada Limited Telephone devices (TTYs)) designed so that the entire dispute Mail Code: CA1-163-005 settlement process, from the time Roadside Assistance: 1908 Colonel Sam Drive 1-800-252-1112 you file your complaint to the final Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 decision, should be completed in From Puerto Rico: approximately 70 days. We believe 1-800-496-9992 (English) our impartial program offers 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, From U.S. Virgin Islands quick, and free of charge. 1-800-496-9994 12-4 Customer Information

Canada — Customer Mexico, Central America and Online Owner Center Assistance Caribbean Islands/Countries Online Owner Center (U.S.) — General Motors of Canada Limited (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer www.gmownercenter.com/ Customer Communication Centre, buick CA1-163-005 Assistance 1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors de Mexico, Information and services Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 S. de R.L. de C.V. customized for your specific www.gmcanada.com Customer Assistance Center vehicle — all in one convenient place. 1-800-263-3777 (English) Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 1-800-263-7854 (French) Col. Lomas de Bezares . Digital owner manual, warranty 1-800-263-3830 (For Text C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. information, and more Telephone devices (TTYs)) 01-800-508-0000 . Online service and maintenance Roadside Assistance: Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 records 1-800-268-6800 . Find Buick dealers for service Overseas — Customer Customer Assistance for nationwide Assistance Text Telephone (TTY) . Exclusive privileges and offers Please contact the local General Users . Recall notices for your specific Motors Business Unit. To assist customers who are deaf, vehicle hard of hearing, or speech-impaired . OnStar® and GM Cardmember and who use Text Telephones Services Earnings summaries (TTYs), Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users in Canada can dial 1‐800‐263-3830. Customer Information 12-5

Other Helpful Links: Here are a few of the valuable GM Mobility tools and services you will have Buick — www.buick.com access to: Reimbursement Program Buick Merchandise — . www.buickmerchandise.com My Showroom: Find and save information on vehicles and Help Center — www.buick.com/ current offers in your area. helpcenter . My Dealers/Retailers: Save . FAQ details such as address and . Contact Us phone number for each of your preferred GM dealers/retailers. This program, available to qualified My GM Canada . My Driveway: Access quick applicants, can reimburse you up (Canada) — www.gm.ca links to parts and service to $1,000 of the cost of eligible My GM Canada is a estimates, check trade-in aftermarket adaptive equipment password-protected section of values, or schedule a service required for your vehicle, such as www.gm.ca where you can save appointment by adding the hand controls or a wheelchair/ information on GM vehicles, get vehicles you own to your scooter lift. personalized offers, and use handy driveway profile. The offer is available for a very tools and forms with greater ease. . My Preferences: Manage your limited period of time from the profile and use tools and forms date of vehicle purchase/lease. with greater ease. For more details, or to determine your vehicle's eligibility, visit To sign up, visit the My GM Canada gmmobility.com or call the GM section within www.gm.ca. Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. 12-6 Customer Information

General Motors of Canada Calling for Assistance Coverage also has a Mobility Program. When calling Roadside Assistance, Services are provided up to 5 years/ Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) have the following information 160 000 km (100,000 miles), for details. TTY users call ready: whichever comes first. 1-800-263-3830. . Your name, home address, and In the U.S., anyone driving the Roadside Assistance home telephone number vehicle is covered. In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without Program . Telephone number of your location permission from the owner is not For U.S. purchased vehicles, call covered. . Location of the vehicle 1-800-252-1112; (Text Telephone Roadside Assistance is not a part of (TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). . Model, year, color, and license the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For Canadian purchased vehicles, plate number of the vehicle Buick and General Motors of call 1-800-268-6800. . Odometer reading, Vehicle Canada Limited reserve the right to Service is available 24 hours a day, Identification Number (VIN), and make any changes or discontinue 365 days a year. delivery date of the vehicle the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification. . Description of the problem Buick and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same type of claim is made many times. Customer Information 12-7

Services Provided . Flat Tire Change: Service is Services Specific to Canadian provided to change a flat tire Purchased Vehicles . Emergency Fuel Delivery: with the spare tire. The spare Delivery of enough fuel for the tire, if equipped, must be in good . Fuel delivery: Reimbursement vehicle to get to the nearest condition and properly inflated. is approximately $5 Canadian. service station. It is the owner's responsibility for Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted. Propane and other . Lock‐Out Service: Service is the repair or replacement of the provided to unlock the vehicle if tire if it is not covered by the fuels are not provided through you are locked out. A remote warranty. this service. unlock may be available if you . . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle ® Battery Jump Start: Service is have OnStar . For security provided to jump start a dead registration is required. reasons, the driver must present battery. . Trip Routing Service: Detailed identification before this service maps of North America are is given. Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance provided when requested either . Emergency Tow From a Public with the most direct route or the Road or Highway: Tow to . Impound towing caused by most scenic route. There is a the nearest Buick dealer for violation of any laws. six request limit per year. warranty service, or if the vehicle . Legal fines. Additional travel information was in a crash and cannot be is also available. Allow three driven. Assistance is also given . Mounting, dismounting or weeks for delivery. when the vehicle is stuck in changing of snow tires, chains, sand, mud, or snow. or other traction devices. . Towing or services for vehicles driven on a non-public road or highway. 12-8 Customer Information

. Trip Interruption Benefits and Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Assistance: Must be over 250 kilometres from where Appointments Program your trip was started to When your vehicle requires To enhance your ownership qualify. General Motors of warranty service, contact your experience, we and our participating Canada Limited requires dealer/retailer and request an dealers are proud to offer Courtesy pre-authorization, original appointment. By scheduling a Transportation, a customer support detailed receipts, and a copy service appointment and advising program for vehicles with the of the repair orders. Once your service consultant of your Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty authorization has been received, transportation needs, your dealer/ Coverage period in Canada) and the Roadside Assistance advisor retailer can help minimize your extended powertrain, and hybrid will help you make arrangements inconvenience. specific warranty in both the U.S. and explain how to receive and Canada. payment. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department Several courtesy transportation . Alternative Service: If immediately, keep driving it until options are available to assist in assistance cannot be provided it can be scheduled for service, reducing your inconvenience when right away, the Roadside unless, of course, the problem is warranty repairs are required. Assistance advisor may give safety-related. If it is, please call you permission to get local Courtesy Transportation is not a your dealership/retailer, let them part of the New Vehicle Limited emergency road service. know this, and ask for instructions. You will receive payment, up to Warranty. A separate booklet $100, after sending the original If the dealer/retailer requests you to entitled “Warranty and Owner receipt to Roadside Assistance. bring the vehicle for service, you are Assistance Information” furnished Mechanical failures may be urged to do so as early in the work with each new vehicle provides covered, however any cost for day as possible to allow for the detailed warranty coverage parts and labor for repairs not same day repair. information. covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility. Customer Information 12-9

Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel Courtesy Rental Vehicle Reimbursement Warranty service can generally Your dealer may arrange to be completed while you wait. If your vehicle requires overnight provide you with a courtesy However, if you are unable to warranty repairs, and public rental vehicle or reimburse you wait, GM helps to minimize your transportation is used instead of the for a rental vehicle that you obtain inconvenience by providing several dealer's shuttle service, the expense if your vehicle is kept for an transportation options. Depending must be supported by original overnight warranty repair. Rental on the circumstances, your dealer receipts and can only be up to the reimbursement will be limited and can offer you one of the following: maximum amount allowed by GM must be supported by original for shuttle service. In addition, for receipts. This requires that you sign Shuttle Service U.S. customers, should you arrange and complete a rental agreement Shuttle service is the preferred transportation through a friend or and meet state/provincial, local, and means of offering Courtesy relative, limited reimbursement for rental vehicle provider requirements. Transportation. Dealers may provide reasonable fuel expenses may Requirements vary and may include you with shuttle service to get you be available. Claim amounts minimum age requirements, to your destination with minimal should reflect actual costs and insurance coverage, credit card, interruption of your daily schedule. be supported by original receipts. etc. You are responsible for fuel This includes one‐way or round trip See your dealer for information usage charges and may also be shuttle service within reasonable regarding the allowance amounts responsible for taxes, levies, usage time and distance parameters of the for reimbursement of fuel or other fees, excessive mileage, or rental dealer's area. transportation costs. usage beyond the completion of the repair. It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a courtesy rental. 12-10 Customer Information

Additional Program Collision Damage Repair Recycled original equipment Information parts may also be used for repair. If your vehicle is involved in These parts are typically removed All program options, such as shuttle a collision and it is damaged, from vehicles that were total losses service, may not be available at have the damage repaired by a in prior crashes. In most cases, every dealer. Please contact your qualified technician using the proper the parts being recycled are from dealer for specific information equipment and quality replacement undamaged sections of the vehicle. about availability. All Courtesy parts. Poorly performed collision A recycled original equipment GM Transportation arrangements will repairs diminish your vehicle's part, may be an acceptable choice be administered by appropriate resale value, and safety to maintain your vehicle's originally dealer personnel. performance can be compromised designed appearance and safety General Motors reserves the right in subsequent collisions. performance, however, the history of to unilaterally modify, change or Collision Parts these parts is not known. Such parts discontinue Courtesy Transportation are not covered by your GM New at any time and to resolve all Genuine GM Collision parts are Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any questions of claim eligibility new parts made with the same related failures are not covered by pursuant to the terms and materials and construction methods that warranty. conditions described herein as the parts with which your vehicle at its sole discretion. was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle's designed appearance, durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty. Customer Information 12-11

Aftermarket collision parts are Repair Facility Many insurance policies provide also available. These are made reduced protection to your GM We recommend that you choose a by companies other than GM and vehicle by limiting compensation collision repair facility that meets may not have been tested for your for damage repairs by using your needs before you ever need vehicle. As a result, these parts aftermarket collision parts. Some collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may fit poorly, exhibit premature insurance companies will not may have a collision repair center durability/corrosion problems, specify aftermarket collision parts. with GM-trained technicians and and may not perform properly When purchasing insurance, we state of the art equipment, or be in subsequent collisions. recommend that you assure your able to recommend a collision Aftermarket parts are not covered vehicle will be repaired with GM repair center that has GM-trained by your GM New Vehicle Limited original equipment collision parts. technicians and comparable Warranty, and any vehicle failure If such insurance coverage is equipment. related to such parts are not not available from your current covered by that warranty. Insuring Your carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier. Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and If your vehicle is leased, the leasing collision insurance coverage. There company may require you to have are significant differences in the insurance that assures repairs with quality of coverage afforded by Genuine GM Original Equipment various insurance policy terms. Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs. 12-12 Customer Information

If a Crash Occurs Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage If there has been an injury, call . Driver's name, address, phone Repair Process emergency services for help. Do not number In the event that your vehicle leave the scene of a crash until all . Driver's license number requires damage repairs, GM matters have been taken care of. recommends that you take an Move the vehicle only if its position . Owner's name, address, phone active role in its repair. If you have puts you in danger, or you are number a pre-determined repair facility of instructed to move it by a police . Vehicle license plate choice, take your vehicle there, officer. or have it towed there. Specify to . Vehicle make, model and the facility that any required Give only the necessary information model year to police and other parties involved replacement collision parts be . in the crash. Vehicle Identification original equipment parts, either Number (VIN) new Genuine GM parts or recycled For emergency towing see What . original GM parts. Remember, Will You See After an Airbag Insurance company and policy number recycled parts will not be covered Inflates? on page 2‑30. by your GM vehicle warranty. . General description of the damage to the other vehicle Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Choose a reputable repair facility Depending on your policy limits, that uses quality replacement parts. See “Collision Parts” earlier in this section. If the airbag has inflated, see What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? on page 2‑30. Customer Information 12-13 your insurance company may Service Publications Owner Information initially value the repair using Owner publications are written aftermarket parts. Discuss this with Ordering Information specifically for owners and intended your repair professional, and insist Service Manuals to provide basic operational on Genuine GM parts. Remember if information about the vehicle. your vehicle is leased you may be Service Manuals have the diagnosis The owner manual includes the obligated to have the vehicle and repair information on engines, Maintenance Schedule for all repaired with Genuine GM parts, transmission, axle, suspension, models. even if your insurance coverage brakes, electrical, steering, does not pay the full cost. body, etc. In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and Warranty If another party's insurance Service Bulletins Booklet. company is paying for the repairs, Service Bulletins give additional you are not obligated to accept a technical service information RETAIL SELL PRICE: repair valuation based on that needed to knowledgeably service $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee insurance company's collision General Motors cars and trucks. Without Portfolio: Owner policy repair limits, as you have no Each bulletin contains instructions Manual only. contractual limits with that company. to assist in the diagnosis and RETAIL SELL PRICE: In such cases, you can have control service of your vehicle. of the repair and parts choices as $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee long as cost stays within reasonable Current and Past Model Order limits. Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle. 12-14 Customer Information

ORDER TOLL FREE: Reporting Safety group of vehicles, it may order 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday a recall and remedy campaign. 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time Defects However, NHTSA cannot For Credit Card Orders Only become involved in individual (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Reporting Safety Defects problems between you, your Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web to the United States dealer, or General Motors. at: helminc.com Government To contact NHTSA, you may Or you can write to: If you believe that your vehicle call the Vehicle Safety Hotline Helm, Incorporated has a defect which could cause toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 P.O. Box 07130 a crash or could cause injury or (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Detroit, MI 48207 death, you should immediately http://www.safecar.gov; or Prices are subject to change inform the National Highway write to: without notice and without incurring Traffic Safety Administration Administrator, NHTSA obligation. Allow ample time for (NHTSA) in addition to notifying 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. delivery. General Motors. Washington, D.C. 20590 Note to Canadian Customers: All If NHTSA receives similar listed prices are quoted in U.S. You can also obtain other funds. Canadian residents are to complaints, it may open an information about motor make checks payable in U.S. funds. investigation, and if it finds vehicle safety from that a safety defect exists in a http://www.safecar.gov. Customer Information 12-15

Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data to the Canadian to General Motors Recording and Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Privacy If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like believe that your vehicle has a this, please notify General Motors. Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record safety defect, notify Transport Call 1-800-521-7300, or write: Canada immediately, in addition information about the vehicle’s Buick Customer Assistance Center to notifying General Motors of performance and how it is driven. P.O. Box 33136 Canada Limited. Call them at For example, your vehicle uses Detroit, MI 48232-5136 1-800-333-0510 or write to: computer modules to monitor and In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 control engine and transmission Transport Canada (English) or 1-800-263-7854 performance, to monitor the Road Safety Branch (French), or write: conditions for airbag deployment 2780 Sheffield Road and deploy airbags in a crash and, Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 General Motors of Canada Limited if so equipped, to provide antilock Customer Communication Centre, braking to help the driver control the CA1-163-005 vehicle. These modules may store 1908 Colonel Sam Drive data to help your dealer/retailer Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 technician service your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings. 12-16 Customer Information

Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better GM will not access this data or understanding of the circumstances share it with others except: with the This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur. consent of the vehicle owner or, Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Important: EDR data is recorded if the vehicle is leased, with the of an EDR is to record, in certain consent of the lessee; in response crash or near crash-like situations, by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is to an official request of police or such as an airbag deployment or similar government office; as part of hitting a road obstacle, data that recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal GM's defense of litigation through will assist in understanding how the discovery process; or, as a vehicle's systems performed. data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded. required by law. Data that GM The EDR is designed to record data collects or receives may also be related to vehicle dynamics and However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine used for GM research needs or may safety systems for a short period of be made available to others for time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely research purposes, where a need is The EDR in this vehicle is designed shown and the data is not tied to a to record such data as: acquired during a crash investigation. specific vehicle or vehicle owner. . How various systems in your ® vehicle were operating To read data recorded by an EDR, OnStar special equipment is required, and . Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is If your vehicle has OnStar and you passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle subscribe to the OnStar services, buckled/fastened manufacturer, other parties, such please refer to the OnStar Terms . How far, if at all, the driver was as law enforcement, that have the and Conditions for information on special equipment, can read the data collection and use. See also pressing the accelerator and/or ® brake pedal information if they have access to OnStar System on page 4‑43 in the vehicle or the EDR. this manual for more information. . How fast the vehicle was traveling Customer Information 12-17

Navigation System Radio Frequency If your vehicle has a navigation Statement system, use of the system may This vehicle has systems that result in the storage of destinations, operate on a radio frequency that addresses, telephone numbers, and comply with Part 15 of the Federal other trip information. Refer to the Communications Commission (FCC) navigation system operating manual Rules and with RSS-210/211 of for information on stored data and Industry Canada. for deletion instructions. Operation is subject to the following Radio Frequency two conditions: Identification (RFID) 1. The device may not cause interference. RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire 2. The device must accept any pressure monitoring and ignition interference received, including system security, as well as in interference that may cause connection with conveniences undesired operation of the such as key fobs for remote door device. locking/unlocking and starting, and Changes or modifications to any of in-vehicle transmitters for garage these systems by other than an door openers. RFID technology in authorized service facility could void GM vehicles does not use or record authorization to use this equipment. personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information. 12-18 Customer Information

2 NOTES INDEX i-1

A Airbag System (cont.) Antilock Brake What Makes an Airbag System (ABS) ...... 8-31 Accessories and Inflate? ...... 2-30 Warning Light ...... 4-21 Modifications ...... 9-3 What Will You See After Appearance Care Accessory Power ...... 8-20 an Airbag Inflates? ...... 2-30 Exterior ...... 9-84 Adaptive Forward When Should an Airbag Interior ...... 9-88 Lighting (AFL) ...... 5-3 Inflate? ...... 2-28 Assistance Program, Add-On Electrical Where Are the Airbags? ...... 2-27 Roadside ...... 12-6 Equipment ...... 8-60 Airbags Audio Players ...... 6-20 Adding Equipment to the Adding Equipment to the CD ...... 6-20 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-37 Vehicle ...... 2-37 Audio System Adjustments Passenger Status Indicator . . .4-15 Backglass Antenna ...... 6-19 Lumbar, Front Seats ...... 2-5 Readiness Light ...... 4-15 Radio Reception ...... 6-18 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ...... 9-15 Servicing Airbag-Equipped Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 6-2 Air Filter, Passenger Vehicles ...... 2-36 Automatic Compartment ...... 7-8 System Check ...... 2-25 Headlamp System ...... 5-3 Air Intake ...... 7-8 Alarm System Automatic Climate Control Air Vents ...... 7-8 Anti-Theft ...... 1-13 System ...... 7-1 Airbag System All-Wheel Drive ...... 8-30 Automatic Transmission ...... 8-27 Check ...... 2-38 AM-FM Radio ...... 6-12 Fluid ...... 9-14 How Does an Airbag Antenna Manual Mode ...... 8-29 Restrain? ...... 2-30 Satellite Radio ...... 6-19 Shiftlock Control System Passenger Sensing Anti-Theft Check ...... 9-29 System ...... 2-32 Alarm System ...... 1-13 Auxiliary Devices ...... 6-29, 6-32 Alarm System Messages . . . . .4-37 i-2 INDEX

B Bulb Replacement (cont.) Cautions, Danger, and High Intensity Discharge Warnings ...... iv Battery ...... 9-27 (HID) Lighting ...... 9-35 CD Jump Starting ...... 9-77 License Plate Lamps ...... 9-38 DVD Player ...... 6-22 Load Management ...... 5-6 Taillamps, Turn Signal, CD Player ...... 6-20 Power Protection ...... 5-7 Stoplamps, and Back-Up Center Console Storage ...... 3-2 Voltage and Charging Lamps ...... 9-37 Chains, Tire ...... 9-70 Messages ...... 4-33 Buying New Tires ...... 9-64 Charging System Light ...... 4-16 Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . 9-30 Check Bluetooth . . . . 6-42, 6-43, 6-46, 6-58 Engine Lamp ...... 4-17 Brakes ...... 9-25 C Ignition Transmission Lock . . .9-29 Antilock ...... 8-31 Calibration ...... 4-8 Child Restraints Assist ...... 8-34 California Infants and Young Fluid ...... 9-26 Fuel Requirements ...... 8-50 Children ...... 2-41 Parking ...... 8-32 Perchlorate Materials Lower Anchors and System Messages ...... 4-33 Requirements ...... 9-3 Tethers for Children ...... 2-47 Braking ...... 8-4 Warning ...... 9-3 Older Children ...... 2-39 Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 8-17 Camera, Rear Vision ...... 8-45 Securing ...... 2-54, 2-56 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-39 Canadian Vehicle Owners ...... iv Systems ...... 2-43 Fog Lamps ...... 5-4, 9-37 Capacities and Where to Put the Restraint . . .2-45 Halogen Bulbs ...... 9-34 Specifications ...... 11-2 Circuit Breakers ...... 9-40 Headlamp Aiming ...... 9-31 Carbon Monoxide Cleaning Headlamps ...... 9-34 Engine Exhaust ...... 8-26 Exterior Care ...... 9-84 Headlamps, Front Turn Trunk ...... 1-11 Interior Care ...... 9-88 Signal and Parking Winter Driving ...... 8-9 Lamps ...... 9-35 INDEX i-3

Climate Control Systems Customer Assistance ...... 12-4 Dome Lamps ...... 5-5 Automatic ...... 7-1 Offices ...... 12-3 Door Dual Automatic ...... 7-4 Text Telephone (TTY) Ajar Messages ...... 4-34 Clock ...... 4-8, 4-9 Users ...... 12-4 Locks ...... 1-10 Cluster, IP ...... 4-12 Customer Information Power Locks ...... 1-10 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 12-10 Service Publications Drive Systems Compact Spare Tire ...... 9-76 Ordering Information ...... 12-13 All-Wheel Drive ...... 8-30 Compass ...... 4-8 Customer Satisfaction Driver Information Compass Messages ...... 4-34 Procedure ...... 12-1 Center (DIC) ...... 4-25 Control of a Vehicle ...... 8-4 Driving Convenience Net ...... 3-2 D Better Fuel Economy ...... 8-2 Coolant Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 12-10 Characteristics and Engine ...... 9-18 Danger, Warnings, and Towing Tips ...... 8-54 Engine Temperature Cautions ...... iv Defensive ...... 8-3 Gauge ...... 4-14 Data Recorders, Event ...... 12-16 Drunk ...... 8-3 Cooling System ...... 9-17 Daytime Running Highway Hypnosis ...... 8-8 Engine Messages ...... 4-35 Lamps (DRL) ...... 5-2 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 8-9 Courtesy Transportation Defensive Driving ...... 8-3 If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 8-12 Program ...... 12-8 Devices, Auxiliary ...... 6-29, 6-32 Loss of Control ...... 8-7 Cruise Control ...... 8-37 Differential, Limited-Slip ...... 8-36 Off-Road Recovery ...... 8-6 Light ...... 4-25 Displays Vehicle Load Limits ...... 8-12 Messages ...... 4-34 Head-Up ...... 4-29 Winter ...... 8-9 Cupholders ...... 3-1 i-4 INDEX

Dual Automatic Climate Engine Exit Lighting ...... 5-6 Control System ...... 7-4 Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 9-15 Extender, Safety Belt ...... 2-23 DVD Check and Service Engine Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 5-1 Rear Seat Entertainment Soon Lamp ...... 4-17 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 5-2 System ...... 6-34 Compartment Overview ...... 9-6 DVD/CD Player ...... 6-22 Coolant ...... 9-18 F Coolant Temperature Filter E Gauge ...... 4-14 Engine Air Cleaner ...... 9-15 Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 4-20 Cooling System ...... 9-17 Flash-to-Pass ...... 5-2 Electrical Equipment, Cooling System Messages . . .4-35 Flashers, Hazard Warning ...... 5-3 Add-On ...... 8-60 Drive Belt Routing ...... 11-4 Flat Tire ...... 9-70 Electrical System Exhaust ...... 8-26 Flat Tire, Changing ...... 9-72 Engine Compartment Fuse Overheated Protection Fluid Block ...... 9-41 Operating Mode ...... 9-23 Automatic Transmission ...... 9-14 Fuses and Circuit Overheating ...... 9-21 Brakes ...... 9-26 Breakers ...... 9-40 Power Messages ...... 4-36 Power Steering ...... 9-23 Instrument Panel Fuse Pressure Light ...... 4-23 Washer ...... 9-24 Block ...... 9-44 Running While Parked ...... 8-26 Fog Lamps Overload ...... 9-40 Starting ...... 8-20 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-4, 9-37 Rear Compartment Fuse Engine Oil Light ...... 4-25 Block ...... 9-46 Life System ...... 9-13 Folding Mirrors ...... 1-15 Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 8-35 Messages ...... 4-35 Front Seats Electronic Stability Control Entry Lighting ...... 5-5 Adjustment ...... 2-3 Indicator Light ...... 4-22 Equipment, Towing ...... 8-59 Heated ...... 2-7 Event Data Recorders ...... 12-16 Heated and Ventilated ...... 2-8 INDEX i-5

Front Storage ...... 3-2 G H Fuel ...... 8-48 Garage Door Opener ...... 4-45 Halogen Bulbs ...... 9-34 Additives ...... 8-50 Programming ...... 4-46 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 5-3 Economy Driving ...... 8-2 Gasoline Head Restraints ...... 2-2 Filling a Portable Fuel Specifications ...... 8-49 Head-Up Display (HUD) ...... 4-29 Container ...... 8-53 Gauges Headlamps Filling the Tank ...... 8-52 Engine Coolant Adaptive Forward Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .8-50 Temperature ...... 4-14 Lighting (AFL) ...... 5-3 Gasoline Specifications ...... 8-49 Fuel ...... 4-13 Aiming ...... 9-31 Gauge ...... 4-13 Odometer ...... 4-13 Automatic ...... 5-3 Low Fuel Warning Light ...... 4-24 Speedometer ...... 4-13 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-34 Recommended ...... 8-49 Tachometer ...... 4-13 Daytime Running Requirements, California . . . . .8-50 Warning Lights and Lamps (DRL) ...... 5-2 System Messages ...... 4-36 Indicators ...... 4-11 Flash-to-Pass ...... 5-2 Fuses General Information High Intensity Discharge Engine Compartment Fuse Service and Maintenance . . . . .10-1 (HID) Lighting ...... 9-35 Block ...... 9-41 Towing ...... 8-53 High-Beam On Light ...... 4-24 Fuses and Circuit Vehicle Care ...... 9-2 High/Low Beam Changer ...... 5-2 Breakers ...... 9-40 Glove Box ...... 3-1 Heated Instrument Panel Fuse GM Mobility Reimbursement Steering Wheel ...... 4-7 Block ...... 9-44 Program ...... 12-5 Heated and Ventilated Front Rear Compartment Fuse Seats ...... 2-8 Block ...... 9-46 i-6 INDEX

Heated Front Seats ...... 2-7 K Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 2-19 Heated Mirrors ...... 1-16 LATCH System Key and Lock Messages ...... 4-36 High-Beam On Light ...... 4-24 Replacing Parts After a Keyless Entry Highway Hypnosis ...... 8-8 Crash ...... 2-53 Remote (RKE) System . . . 1-4, 1-5 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 8-9 Latch, Lower Anchors and Keyless Entry System ...... 1-3 Hood ...... 9-5 Tethers for Children ...... 2-47 Keys ...... 1-2 Horn ...... 4-7 Light How to Wear Safety Belts Electric Parking Brake ...... 4-20 Properly ...... 2-13 L Lighting Labeling, Tire Sidewall ...... 9-49 Adaptive Forward ...... 5-3 Lamp Messages ...... 4-36 Entry ...... 5-5 I Lamps Ignition Positions ...... 8-18, 8-19 Exit ...... 5-6 Daytime Running (DRL) ...... 5-2 Ignition Transmission Lock Illumination Control ...... 5-5 Dome ...... 5-5 Check ...... 9-29 Lights Exterior Controls ...... 5-1 Immobilizer ...... 1-13 Airbag Readiness ...... 4-15 Exterior Lamps Off Infants and Young Children, Antilock Brake System Reminder ...... 5-2 Restraints ...... 2-41 (ABS) Warning ...... 4-21 Headlamps, Front Turn Instrument Cluster ...... 4-12 Charging System ...... 4-16 Signal and Parking Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 4-4 Cruise Control ...... 4-25 Lamps ...... 9-35 Introduction ...... iii, 6-1 Engine Oil Pressure ...... 4-23 License Plate ...... 9-38 Flash-to-Pass ...... 5-2 Malfunction Indicator ...... 4-17 Fog Lamps ...... 4-25 J Reading ...... 5-5 Jump Starting ...... 9-77 Sun Visor ...... 5-5 INDEX i-7

Lights (cont.) M Messages (cont.) High-Beam On ...... 4-24 Lamp ...... 4-36 Maintenance High/Low Beam Changer ...... 5-2 Ride Control System ...... 4-37 Records ...... 10-10 Low Fuel Warning ...... 4-24 Tire ...... 4-37 Maintenance Schedule Safety Belt Reminders ...... 4-14 Transmission ...... 4-38 Recommended Fluids and Security ...... 4-24 Vehicle ...... 4-33 Lubricants ...... 10-7 Taillamp Indicator ...... 4-25 Window ...... 4-38 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 10-2 Tire Pressure ...... 4-22 Mirrors Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 4-17 Traction Off ...... 4-21 Folding ...... 1-15 Manual Mode ...... 8-29 Limited-Slip Differential ...... 8-36 Heated ...... 1-16 Mass Storage Media (MEM) . . . 6-25 Locks Manual Rearview ...... 1-16 Messages Door ...... 1-10 Park Tilt ...... 1-16 Anti-Theft Alarm System ...... 4-37 Power Door ...... 1-10 Power ...... 1-15 Battery Voltage and Safety ...... 1-11 Monitor System, Tire Charging ...... 4-33 Loss of Control ...... 8-7 Pressure ...... 9-57 Brake System ...... 4-33 Low Fuel Warning Light ...... 4-24 Compass ...... 4-34 Lower Anchors and Tethers Door Ajar ...... 4-34 N for Children (LATCH Engine Cooling System ...... 4-35 Navigation System SYSTEM) ...... 2-47 Engine Oil ...... 4-35 Vehicle Data Recording Lumbar Adjustment ...... 2-5 Engine Power ...... 4-36 and Privacy ...... 12-17 Front Seats ...... 2-5 Fuel System ...... 4-36 Net, Convenience ...... 3-2 Key and Lock ...... 4-36 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 8-17 i-8 INDEX

O P Power (cont.) Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .8-20 Object Detection, Side Blind Park Seat Adjustment ...... 2-4 Zone Alert (SBZA) ...... 8-42 Shifting Into ...... 8-24 Steering Fluid ...... 9-23 Odometer ...... 4-13 Shifting Out of ...... 8-25 Windows ...... 1-17 Off-Road Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 1-16 Pregnancy, Using Safety Recovery ...... 8-6 Parking Belts ...... 2-23 Oil Assist, Ultrasonic ...... 8-40 Privacy Engine ...... 9-11 Brake ...... 8-32 Radio Frequency Engine Oil Life System ...... 9-13 Brake and P (Park) Identification (RFID) ...... 12-17 Messages ...... 4-35 Mechanism Check ...... 9-30 Program Pressure Light ...... 4-23 Over Things That Burn ...... 8-25 Courtesy Transportation ...... 12-8 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 2-39 Passenger Airbag Status Proposition 65 Warning, Online Owner Center ...... 12-4 Indicator ...... 4-15 California ...... 9-3 OnStar® System ...... 4-43 Passenger Compartment Air Operation, Infotainment Filter ...... 7-8 System ...... 6-7 Passenger Sensing System . . . 2-32 R Outlets Perchlorate Materials Radio Frequency Power ...... 4-10 Requirements, California ...... 9-3 Identification (RFID) ...... 12-17 Overheated Engine Phone Statement ...... 12-17 Protection Operating Mode . . . 9-23 Bluetooth ...... 6-42, 6-43, Radios Overheating, Engine ...... 9-21 6-46, 6-58 AM-FM Radio ...... 6-12 Overview Power CD/DVD Player ...... 6-22 Instrument Panel ...... 4-4 Door Locks ...... 1-10 Reception ...... 6-18 Overview, Infotainment Mirrors ...... 1-15 Satellite ...... 6-15 System ...... 6-3, 6-5 Outlets ...... 4-10 Protection, Battery ...... 5-7 INDEX i-9

Reading Lamps ...... 5-5 Replacing Safety Belt S Rear Seat Entertainment System Parts After a Safety Belts ...... 2-10 System ...... 6-34 Crash ...... 2-24 Care ...... 2-24 Rear Seats ...... 2-9 Reporting Safety Defects Extender ...... 2-23 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 8-45 Canadian Government ...... 12-15 How to Wear Safety Belts Rearview Mirrors ...... 1-16 General Motors ...... 12-15 Properly ...... 2-13 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 2-6 U.S. Government ...... 12-14 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 2-19 Recommended Fluids and Retained Accessory Reminders ...... 4-14 Lubricants ...... 10-7 Power (RAP) ...... 8-20 Replacing After a Crash ...... 2-24 Recommended Fuel ...... 8-49 Ride Control Systems ...... 8-35 Use During Pregnancy ...... 2-23 Records Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .8-35 Safety Defects Reporting Maintenance ...... 10-10 Enhanced Traction Canadian Government ...... 12-15 Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . 9-81 System (ETS) ...... 8-36 General Motors ...... 12-15 Reimbursement Program, Messages ...... 4-37 U.S. Government ...... 12-14 GM Mobility ...... 12-5 Selective ...... 8-36 Safety Locks ...... 1-11 Remote Keyless Entry Roadside Assistance Safety System Check ...... 2-24 (RKE) System ...... 1-3 1-5 Program ...... 12-6 – Satellite Radio ...... 6-15 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 1-8 Roof Scheduled Maintenance ...... 10-2 Replacement Bulbs ...... 9-39 Sunroof ...... 1-19 Scheduling Appointments ...... 12-8 Rotation, Tires ...... 9-62 Replacement Parts Seats Airbags ...... 2-38 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 11-4 Adjustment, Front ...... 2-3 Maintenance ...... 10-9 Running the Vehicle While Head Restraints ...... 2-2 Replacing Airbag System ...... 2-38 Parked ...... 8-26 Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 2-8 Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash ...... 2-53 i-10 INDEX

Seats (cont.) Service (cont.) Steering ...... 8-5 Heated Front ...... 2-7 Publications Ordering Fluid, Power ...... 9-23 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 2-5 Information ...... 12-13 Heated Wheel ...... 4-7 Power Adjustment, Front ...... 2-4 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .12-8 Wheel Adjustment ...... 4-6 Rear ...... 2-9 Servicing the Wheel Controls ...... 4-6 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 2-6 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-36 Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps Securing Child Shifting Bulb Replacement ...... 9-37 Restraints ...... 2-54, 2-56 Into Park ...... 8-24 Storage Security Out of Park ...... 8-25 Mass Media (MEM) ...... 6-25 Light ...... 4-24 Side Blind Zone Alert ...... 8-42 Storage Areas Vehicle ...... 1-13 Signals, Turn and Center Console ...... 3-2 Selective Ride Control ...... 8-36 Lane-Change ...... 5-4 Convenience Net ...... 3-2 Service Spare Tire Front ...... 3-2 Accessories and Compact ...... 9-76 Glove Box ...... 3-1 Modifications ...... 9-3 Specifications and Stuck Vehicle ...... 8-12 Doing Your Own Work ...... 9-4 Capacities ...... 11-2 Sun Visor Lamps ...... 5-5 Engine Soon Lamp ...... 4-17 Speedometer ...... 4-13 Sun Visors ...... 1-19 Maintenance Records ...... 10-10 Start Vehicle, Remote ...... 1-8 Sunroof ...... 1-19 Maintenance, General Starter Switch Check ...... 9-28 Symbols ...... v Information ...... 10-1 Starting the Engine ...... 8-20 System Check Parts Identification Label . . . . . 11-1 Automatic Transmission Shiftlock Control ...... 9-29 INDEX i-11

T Tires (cont.) Trailer Towing ...... 8-58 Terminology and Transmission Tachometer ...... 4-13 Definitions ...... 9-52 Automatic ...... 8-27 Taillamp Indicator Light ...... 4-25 Uniform Tire Quality Fluid, Automatic ...... 9-14 Taillamps Grading ...... 9-67 Messages ...... 4-38 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-37 Wheel Alignment and Tire Transportation Program, Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 12-4 Balance ...... 9-68 Courtesy ...... 12-8 Theft-Deterrent Wheel Replacement ...... 9-69 Trunk ...... 1-11 Systems ...... 1-13, 1-14 When It Is Time for New Turn and Lane-Change Immobilizer ...... 1-13 Tires ...... 9-63 Signals ...... 5-4 Time ...... 4-8, 4-9 Winter ...... 9-48 Turn Signal Tires Towing Bulb Replacement ...... 9-37 Buying New Tires ...... 9-64 Driving Characteristics ...... 8-54 Chains ...... 9-70 Equipment ...... 8-59 Changing ...... 9-72 U General Information ...... 8-53 Compact Spare ...... 9-76 Ultrasonic Parking Assist ...... 8-40 Recreational Vehicle ...... 9-81 Designations ...... 9-51 Uniform Tire Quality Trailer ...... 8-58 Different Size ...... 9-66 Grading ...... 9-67 Vehicle ...... 9-81 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 9-70 Universal Remote System . . . . . 4-45 Traction Inflation Monitor System ...... 9-59 Operation ...... 4-49 Control System (TCS) ...... 8-34 Inspection ...... 9-62 Programming ...... 4-46 Limited-Slip Differential ...... 8-36 Messages ...... 4-37 Using this Manual ...... iv Off Light ...... 4-21 Pressure Light ...... 4-22 Selective Ride Control ...... 8-36 Pressure Monitor System . . . . .9-57 Rotation ...... 9-62 Sidewall Labeling ...... 9-49 i-12 INDEX

V W Vehicle Warning Lights, Gauges, Canadian Owners ...... iv and Indicators ...... 4-11 Control ...... 8-4 Warnings ...... iv Load Limits ...... 8-12 Cautions and Danger ...... iv Messages ...... 4-33 Hazard Flashers ...... 5-3 Personalization ...... 4-38 Washer Fluid ...... 9-24 Remote Start ...... 1-8 Wheels Security ...... 1-13 Alignment and Tire Towing ...... 9-81 Balance ...... 9-68 Vehicle Care Different Size ...... 9-66 Tire Pressure ...... 9-56 Replacement ...... 9-69 Vehicle Identification When It Is Time for New Number (VIN) ...... 11-1 Tires ...... 9-63 Service Parts Identification Where to Put the Child Label ...... 11-1 Restraint ...... 2-45 Ventilation, Air ...... 7-8 Windows ...... 1-17 Visors ...... 1-19 Messages ...... 4-38 Power ...... 1-17 Windshield Wiper/Washer ...... 4-7 Winter Driving ...... 8-9 Winter Tires ...... 9-48 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . 9-30